100.105.01 (CBRN-TPS70 (V) 5-AN-1) Antenna OM-ocr

7cI IO(), lOS.
~/
CBRN-TPS 70(V)5-AN-1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
SITE LEVEL
RADAR SET TPS-70(V)5
ANTENNA
PART NUMBER 612J902G01
AS MODIFIED BY 613J117G01
WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORPORATION

7312 Parkway Drive South
Hanover. Maryland 21076-1199
F19628-87 -C-0187
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT: Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense (DOD) and US DOD contractors only for
administrative or operational use (31 July 1992).
HANDLING AND DESTRUCTION NOnCE: Handle in compliance with Distribution Statement and destroy by any method that
will prevent disclosure of the contents or reconstruction of the document.
31 JULY 1992
INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES.
LlSrOF EFFECTIVE PAGES
\ pa.t~s of iS5.ue for original and changed pages are:
Original ••• 0 ••• 31 JUL 1992
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 326 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

r - '
Page ·Change Page *Change Page ·Change
~<?" " No. No. No. No. No.
rrti-tle ......................... 0 FO-12 Sh 1-2 •••••• 0

A':)· • •••••••••••••• 0 FO-13 .......................... 0
f..,;;;-x:x i .......................... 0 FO-14 Sh 1-2 •.•.•• 0
1-0 - 1-16 .•..•.•. 0 FO-IS .......................... 0
:ir-~l............................. 0 FO-16 ........................ 0
2--2 Blank .................. 0 FO-17 . • . . • . . . . . . . . 0
3-1 ............................. 0
3-2 Blank ................ O
4-1 - 4-10 .•..•... 0
5-1 - 5-41 .•.••... 0
5-42 Blank .•.••.•• O
6-1 - 6-30 ...•.••• 0
7-1 -7-63 •.•.•.•.. 0
7-64 Blank ...••••. O
7-65 - 7-109 ..•••. 0
j:110, Blank •.••.•. O
7-111 - 7-145 •.••. 0
7-146 Blank •.••••. O
8-1 - 8-26 .............. 0
Glossary 1 -
,Glossary 2 •.••••• 0
FO-l Sh 1-3 •.••.•• 0
FO-2 Sh 1-2 •.....• 0
FO-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
FO.:....4 ............................ 0
FO-5 .......... e' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
FO~6 ............................ 0
FO-7 ........ e' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
FO-8 Sh 1-3 •.••.•. 0
FO-9 Sh 1-3 •.••.•. 0
FO-IO .......................... 0
'FO-II ........................ 0
* Zero in this column indicates an original page.
; A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Title
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ...................................... x

LIST OF TABLES ............................................... xtii
SAFETY SUMMARY ............................................... xi v
INTRODUCTION ................................................. xxi
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ . 1-1

1-2 EQUIPMENT PURPOSE .......................................... . 1-1
1-3 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ..................................... . 1'""1'
1-4 REFERENCE DATA .............................................. . 1~3
a. Leading Particulars ................................... . 1-3'
. .,
b. Capabilities and Limitations ........................ . 1,-3
c. Equipment Supplied .................................... . 1~3·
d. Recommended Support Equipment
and Consumable Materials ........................... .
e. Related Publications .................................. .
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION
2-1 INTRODUCTION.. ... ... ...... .. . .............. ...... ..... ... . ... 2-1
CHAPTER 3. PREPARATION FOR USE AND RESHIPMENT
3-1 INTRODUCTION ............ , ......... , ........................c:•• ;, ,3-.1
-,', " -
CHAPTER 4. OPERATION
...
4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .•. . .,., .. 4-1
- ;:
Section I. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
4-2 GENERAL ...................................................... . . 4'7 1

4-3 LOCATION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ..................... . 4-1
4-4 DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............ ',' ... . 4-1
4-5 INTERLOCKS ................................................... . " 4-:-1
I':'
Section II. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ,'", !
4-6 GENERAL ....................................................... . 4-9

4-7 TURN-ON PROCEDURE .......................................... . 4-9
4-8 OPERATING PROCEDURE ........................................ . 4-10
4-9 TURN-OFF PROCEDURE ......................................... . 4-10'
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Paragraph Title Page
CHAPTER 5. THEORY OF OPERATION
5-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 5-1
Section I. FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM OPERATION
5-2 GENERAL ...................................................... . 5-1

5-3 OVERALL DESCRIPTION ........................................ . 5-1
a. Mechanical Features ................................... . 5-1
b. Electrical/Electronic Features ..................... . 5-2
5-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS ................................... . 5-6
a. Rotation and Direction Monitoring .................. . 5-6
b. Level Moni tor ing ...................................... . 5-6
c. Radar Transmission .................................... . 5-9
d. Radar Reception ........................................ . 5-11
e. IFF Transmission/Reception .......................... . 5-18
Section II. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
5-5 GENERAL ...................................................... . 5-20

5-6 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS ........................ . 5-20
a. Amplifier-Demodulator A1AllA1A4A2Al ............... . 5-20
b. Moni tor and Control A3All ........................... . 5-22
Section III. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF MECHANICAL ASSEMBLIES
5-7 GENERAL ...................................................... . 5-38

5-8 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS ........................ . 5-38
a. Antenna Dr i ve Assembly A1AllA2 ..................... . 5-38
b. synchro and Encoder Geartrain
Assembly A1A11A1A4 .................................. . 5-38
CHAPTER 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 6-1

6-2 TROUBLESHOOTING PHILOSOPHY ................................ 6-1
a. Periodic Inspections .................................. 6-1
b. System Operation ....................................... 6-1
6-3 ANTENNA MONITORING AND FAULT ISOLATION (MFI) .......... 6-1
a. Power Supply voltages ................................. 6-2
b. Test Targets ............................................ 6-2
c. Use of RF Monitor Oscilloscope (Unit 3) ............ 6-2
d. Control Status Indicators ............................ 6-2
e. Isolation and Detection of Antenna Problems ....... 6-2
6-4 TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS ....................................... 6-3
a. Fault Isolation Index ................................. 6-3
b. Fault Isolation Procedures ........................... 6-3
CHAPTER 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6-5 ANT DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER lAlCB16 TRIPS

WHEN ACTUATED FAULT ISOLATION ......................... . 6-5
a. Test Equipment Required .............................. . 6-5
b. Preliminary Condi tions ............................... . 6-5
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-5
6-6 ANTENNA EMERGENCY STOP FAULT LAMP IS LIT
FAULT ISOLATION .......................................... . 6-7
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-7
6-7 ANTENNA FAILS TO GET UP TO SPEED FAULT ISOLATION ..... . 6-11
b. Preliminary Conditions ............................... . 6-11
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-11
6-8 TILT INDIC CIRCUIT BREAKER lAlCB19 TRIPS WHEN
ACTUATED FAULT ISOLATION ............................... . 6-13
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-13
6-9 TILT INDICATOR PWR SUPPLY FUSE lAlA5Fl BLOWS
WHEN POWER IS TURNED ON FAULT ISOLATION ............. . 6-17
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-17
6-10 EXCESSIVE IFF/SIF RETURNS WITHOUT PRIMARY RADAR
RETURNS FAULT ISOLATION ................................. . 6-19
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-19
6-11 IFF ANTENNA VSWR IS OUT-OF-TOLERANCE FAULT ISOLATION . 6-22
c. Procedure ............................................... . 6-22
6-12 ROTARY JOINT TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. . 6-27
a. Introduction ........................................... . 6-27
b. Detection of Problem .................................. . 6-27
c. Waveguide Leaks ........................................ . 6-27
d. Isolation of Air Pressure Leaks ..................... . 6-27
e. Slip Ring Problems .................................... . 6-28
f. Detection of Problem .................................. . 6-28
g. Isolation of Problem .................................. . 6-30
h. Repair ................................................... . 6-30
iii
CHAPTER 7. MAINTENANCE
Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION
7-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 7-1

7-2 MAINTENANCE CONCEPT......................................... 7-1
a. Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 7-1
b. Corrective Maintenance ................................ 7-1
c. Reference Designation ................................. 7-2
Section II. GENERAL MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
7-3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ........................................ . 7-2

7-4 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-2
7-5 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT ..................................... . 7-6
a. Tools .................................................... . 7-6
b. Electrical Connections ............................... . 7-6
c. Identification of Removed Parts .................... . 7-6
d. Inspection of Removed Parts ......................... . 7-6
e. Packings, Gaskets, and Seals ........................ . 7-6
f. Dropped Hardware ...................................... . 7-6
g. Lifting ................................................. . 7-6
h. Installation of Attaching Hardware ................. . 7-6
7-6 TORQUE-TIGHTENING PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES ............ . 7-7
a. Torque Wrenches ........................................ . 7-7
b. Use of Extensions, Adapters, or Crowfoot Wrenches 7-7
c. Torque Correction for Lubricated Fasteners ....... . 7-7
d. Application of Torque to Fasteners ................. . 7-9
e. Application of Torque to RF Connectors ............ . 7-10
f. Torque Value Cross-Reference Chart .... ; ............ . 7-10
Section III. MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION
7-7 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-12

7-8 PREPARING ANTENNA FOR MAINTENANCE ............... < •••••••• 7-12
a. Equipment and Supplies Required .................... . 7-12
b. Procedure ............................................... . 7-12
7-9 LOWERING ANTENNA ARRAY .................................... . 7-12
b. Maintenance Preparation .............................. . 7-12
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-14
7-10 RAISING ANTENNA ARRAY ..................................... . 7-16
a. Eq';lipment and Suppli~s Required .................... . 7-16
b. Ma~ntenance Preparat~on .............................. . 7-16
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-16
7-11 PURGING WAVEGUIDE SYSTEM ................................. . 7-18
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-18
iv
7-12 WAVEGUIDE MAINTENANCE ..................................... . 7-18

a. Equipment and Supplies Required ..................... . 7-18
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-20
7-13 CONVERSION CHARTS .......................................... . 7-21
a. Converting Inches to Millimeters ................... . 7-21
b. Converting Millimeters to Inches ................... . 7-21
c. Metric Conversions .................................... . 7-21
Section IV. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
7-14 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-25

7-15 ROTARY JOINT AIAllAl ....................................... . 7-25
a. Equipment and Supplies Required .................... .. 7-25
c. Removal Procedure ..................................... . 7-26
d. Replacement Procedure ................................. . 7-44
e. Follow-On Maintenance ................................. . 7-58
7-16 ENCODER AIAIIAIA4Al ........................................ . 7-58
7-17 AMPLIFIER-DEMODULATOR AIAIIAIA4A2Al ..................... . 7-62
7-18 SYNCHRO AIAIIAIA4A2Bl and B2 ............................. . 7-65
7-19 SENSOR RESOLVER AIAIIAIA4B3 .............................. . 7-68
c. Removal Procedu re ..................................... . 7-68
7-20 ANTENNA DRIVE MOTOR AIAllA2Bl ............................ . 7-71
v
7-21 VERTICAL SENSOR AIAIIA3Al ................................ . 7-74

d. Replacement Procedure ................................ . 7-77
e. Follow-On Maintenance ................................ . 7-77
7-22 +15 VOLT POWER SUPPLIES A2Al and A2A2 .................. . 7-77
7-23 RF RECEIVERS A3Al THROUGH A3A7 .......................... . 7-80
7-24 LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER A3A8 ................................. . 7-82
b. Preliminary Safety Precautions ..................... . 7-82
7-25 ±12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY A3A9 .............................. .. 7-84
7-26 VARIABLE COAXIAL ATTENUATORS A3AIOAl and A3AIOA2 ..... . 7-86
7-27 S-BAND RF AMPLIFIER A3AIOA3 .............................. . 7-89
7-28 MONITOR AND CONTROL BOARD A3All ......................... . 7-92
a Equipment and Supplies Required .................... . 7-92
1::. Maintenance Preparation .............................. . 7-92
c Removal Procedure ..................................... . 7-92
vi
7-29 STALO POWER DIVIDER BOARD A3A12 ......................... . 7-94

7-30 6-dB ATTENUATORS A3ATl THROUGH A3AT12 .................. . 7-96
7-31 RADOME A4Al ................................................. . 7-98
7-32 IFF ANTENNA (P /0 A5) ....................................... . 7-101
7-33 DUPLEXER A5Al ............................................... . 7-104
7-34 BACKFILL RADIATOR A6 ....................................... . 7-106
7-35 OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNA ................................... . 7-108
7-36 ELECTRONIC SWITCH DIODES .................................. . 7-111
vii
7-37 LOW-NOISE AMPLIFIERS A7Al THROUGH A7A11 ............... . 7-114

7-38 2: 1 MATRIX COMBINERS A7A15 THROUGH A7A25 .............. . 7-116
7-39 18 x 18 MATRICES A12 AND A13 ............................. . 7-118
7-40 RECEIVER-PROTECTORS ........................................ . 7-125
7-41 11 x 6 MATRIX ASSEMBLY A12 ............................... . 7-128
Section V. REPAIR
7-42 GENERAL ....................................................... 7-130
Section VI. ALIGNMENT
7-43 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-130

7-44 +15 VOLT POWER SUPPLIES A2Al and A2A2 ALIGNMENT ...... . 7-130
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-130
viii
7-45 ±12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY A3A9 ALIGNMENT ................... . 7-134

c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-134
7-46 VARIABLE COAXIAL ATTENUATORS A3AI0Al
and A3AI0A2 ADJUSTMENT .................................. . 7-136
a. Eq~ipment and Suppli,;!s Required .................... .. 7-136
b. Mal.ntenance Preparatl.on .............................. . 7-136
c. Attenuator A3AI0Al Adjustment ....................... . 7-136
d. Attenuator A3AI0A2 Adjustment ....................... . 7-136
7-47 MONITOR AND CONTROL BOARD A3All ALIGNMENT ............. . 7-138
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-138
Section VII. SERVICE
7-48 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-141

7-49 ANTENNA DRIVE ASSEMBLY AIAIIA2 OIL CHANGE ............. . 7-141
a. Eq~ipment and Suppli,;!s Required .................... .. 7-141
b. Mal.ntenance Preparatl.on .............................. . 7-141
c. Draining Procedure .................................... . 7-141
d. Refilling Procedure ................................... . 7-143
Section VIII. SPECIAL MAINTENANCE
7-50 GENERAL 7-143
Section IX. PERFORMANCE TESTS AND CHECKS
7-51 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-143

7-52 MAINTENANCE SUPPORT EQUIPMENT ............................ . 7-143
7-53 ANTENNA ROTATION CHECK .................................... . 7-143
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-143
7-54 ANTENNA WAVEGUIDE PRESSURE CHECK ........................ . 7-144
c. Procedure ............................................... . 7-144
CHAPTER 8. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
8-1 INTRODUCTION.. . .. . . ..... . . ....... ........... ........ . ... . . ... 8-1
GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................ Glossary 1
ix
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page

1-1 Antenna Group ............................................... . 1-0
4-1 Power Distribution Panel lAl Antenna Related
Controls and Indicators ................................. . 4-2
4-2 Antenna Group 51 Controls ................................ . 4-5
4-3 Power Supply Enclosure 51A2 Interlock Switch ......... . 4-6
4-4 Receiver Enclosure 51A3 Controls ........................ . 4-7
5-1 IFF/SIF Radiation Patterns ............................... . 5-5
5-2 Waveguide Circulator Flow Diagram ....................... . 5-11
5-3 18 x 18 Matrix Schematic Diagram ........................ . 5-15
5-4 3 x 3 Matrix Schematic Diagram .......................... . 5-16
5-5 RF Amplifier Block Diagram ............................... . 5-18
5-6 Amplifier-Demodulator Waveforms ......................... . 5-23
5-7 UART U3 Transmit Timing Diagram ......................... . 5-25
5-8 Data Transmission Timing Cycle, One Word .............. . 5-29
5-9 Receiver-Protector Test Timing Diagram ................. . 5-32
5-10 Antenna Drive and Data Drive Geartrain
Simplified Diagram ....................................... . 5-39
6-1 Antenna Drive Motor Assembly ............................. . 6-6
6-2 Safety Interlo,-::k Switch ................................... . 6-8
6-3 Antenna Soft S~art Assembly .............................. . 6-10
6-4 Back View of Power Distribution Panel lAl ............. . 6-12
6-5 Cable Entry Panel No.2 ................................... . 6-13
6-6 Antenna Pedestal Connections ............................. . 6-14
6-7 Junction Box and Vertical Sensor "Locations ............ . 6-16
6-8 Antenna Tilt Indicator (Outer Panel) .................. .. 6-18
6-9 Junction Box and Support Brackets ....................... . 6-20
6-10 IFF Radar and Backfill Radiator ................... , ..... . 6-21
6-11 Antenna Pedestal ........................................... . 6-24
6-12 Duplexer ..................................................... . 6-26
6-13 Channel Interface I Output Waveform .................... . 6-29
7-1 Torque Wrench and Extension Usage ....................... . 7-8
7-2 Sequence of Tightening Threaded Fasteners ............. . 7-9
7-3 Torque Value Cross-Reference Chart ..................... . 7-11
7-4 Preparing Antenna for Maintenance ....................... . 7-13
7-5 Lowering Antenna Array .................................... . 7-15
7-6 Raising Antenna Array ..................................... . 7-17
7-7 Purging Waveguide System ................................. . 7-19
7-8 Sequence for Tightening Waveguide Flange Screws ...... . 7-21
7-9 Converting Inches to Millimeters ........................ . 7-22
7-10 Converting Millimeters to Inches ........................ . 7-23
7-11 Metric Conversions ......................................... . 7-24
7-12 Waveguide Depressurization ............................... . 7-27
7-13 waveguide W7 Removal ............. , ........................ . 7-29
7-14 Access Cover Removal ...................................... . 7-31
7-15 Waveguide W70 Removal ..................................... . 7-33
7-16 Disconnection of Electr ical Cables ..................... , 7-37
7-17 Waveguide WIO/W66 Removal ................................ . 7-39
x
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued
Figure Title Page

7-18 Junction Box Removal ....................................... . 7-41
7-19 T-Handles Installation and Rotary Joint Removal ...... . 7-43
7-20 Rotary Joint Installation ................................. . 7-45
7-21 Waveguide W70 Installation ............................... . 7-47
7-22 Runout Deflection Check of Waveguide W70 ............... . 7-49
7-23 Waveguide WIO!W66 Installation ........................... . 7-51
7-24 Connecting Electrical Cables to Rotary Joint .......... . 7-53
7-25 Plate Assembly Installation
and External Cabling Connection ....................... . 7-55
7-26 Waveguide W7 Installation ................................. . 7-57
7-27 Junction Box Reinstallation .............................. . 7-59
7-28 Encoder Removal and Replacement ......................... . 7-61
7-29 Amplifier-Demodulator Removal and Replacement ......... . 7-63
7-30 Synchros Bl and B2 Removal and Replacement ............ . 7-67
7-31 Sensor Resolver Removal and Replacement ................ . 7-69
7-32 Antenna Drive Motor Removal and Replacement ........... . 7-73
7-33 vertical Sensor Removal and Replacement ................ . 7-75
7-34 +15 Volt Power Supplies A2Al and A2A2 Removal
and Replacement ........................................... . 7-79
7-35 RF Receivers A3Al Through A3A7 Removal and Replacement 7-81
7-36 Low-Noise Amplifier A3A8 Removal and Replacement ..... . 7-83
7-37 ±12 Volt Power Supply A3A9 Removal and Replacement ... . 7-85
7-38 Variable Coaxial Attenuators A3AIOAI and A3AIOA2
Removal and Replacement ................................. . 7-87
7-39 S-Band RF Amplifier A3AIOA3 Removal and Replacement 7-91
7-40 Monitor and Control Board A3All Removal
and Replacement ........................................... . 7-93
7-41 STALO Power Divider Board A3A12 Removal and Replacement 7-95
7-42 6-dB Attenuators A3ATI Through A3AT12 Removal
and Replacement ........................................... . 7-97
7-43 Radome A4Al Removal and Replacement ..................... . 7-99
7-44 IFF Antenna Removal and Replacement ..................... . 7-103
7-45 Duplexer A5Al Removal and Replacement .................. . 7-105
7-46 Backfill Radiator A6 Removal and Replacement .......... . 7-107
7-47 Omnidirectional Antenna Removal and Replacement ...... . 7-109
7-48 Electronic Switch Diodes Removal and Replacement ..... . 7-113
7-49 Low-Noise Amplifiers A7Al Through A7All Removal and
Replacement ............................................... . 7-115
7-50 2:1 Matrix Combiners A7A15 Through A7A25 Removal and
Replacement ............................................... . 7-117
7-51 18 X 18 Matrices A7A12 and A7A13 Removal and
Replacement ............................................... . 7-119
7-52 Receiver-Protector (Typical) Removal and
Replacement ............................................... . 7-127
7-53 11 x 6 Matrix Assembly A12 Removal and Replacement ... . 7-129
7-54 +15 Volt Power Supplies A2Al and A2A2 Alignment ...... . 7-132
7-55 +15 Volt Power Supplies A2Al and A2A2 Alignment
Locations .................................................. . 7-133
7-56 ±12 Volt Power Supply A3A9 Alignment Locations ....... . 7-135
7-57 Amplifier Panel Assembly A3AIO Alignment Locations ... . 7-137
xi
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued
Figure Title Page
7-58 Monitor and Control Board A3All Alignment Locations .. 7-140

7-59 Antenna Drive Assembly oil Change ....................... . 7-142
8-1 Type 26LS29 Quad 3-State Single-Ended Line Drivers 8-2

8-2 Type 26LS32 Quad Differential Line Receivers ......... . 8-3
8-3 Type 54LSOO Quad 2-Input positive NAND Gates ......... . 8-4
8-4 Type 54LS04 Hex Inverter Buffers/Drivers
wi th Open Collectors .................................... . 8-5
8-5 Type 54LS08 Quad 2-Input Positive AND Gates ........... . 8-6
8-6 Type 54LS10 Triple 3-Input positive NAND Gates ....... . 8-7
8-7 Type 54LSll Triple 3-Input positive AND Gates ........ . 8-8
8-8 Type 54LS27 Triple 3-Input positive NOR Gates ........ . 8-9
8-9 Type 54LS76 Dual J-K Flip-Flops with Clear
and Preset ................................................ . 8-10
8-10 Type 54LS123 Dual Retriggerable Monostable
Multi-vibrator ............................................ . 8-11
8-11 Type 54LS138 3-to-8 Line Decoder/Demultiplexer ....... . 8-12
8-12 Type 54LS224 16 x 4 Asynchronous FIFO Memories ....... . 8-13
8-13 Type 54LS273 8-Bit Registers with 1 Clear ............. . 8-15
8-14 Type 54LS1010 Triple 3-Input NAND Gate ................. . 8-16
8-15 Type 741HM Frequency-Compensated
Operational Amplifier ................................... . 8-17
8-16 Type CO-402D-2D Square Wave Crystal Oscillator ....... . 8-18
8-17 Type HD6402 Universal Asychronous
Receiver Transmitter with 3-State Output ............ . 8-19
8-18 Type HM7603 32 x 8 3-State PROM ......................... . 8-23
8-19 Type LM109K +5V, lA Fixed Voltage Regulator ........... . 8-24
8-20 Type LM111D Analog Voltage Comparator .................. . 8-25
8-21 Type LM120H-05 -5V, 0.5A Fixed Voltage Regulator ..... . 8-26
FO-l Antenna Group Assembly Major Assemblies

and Components (3 sheets)
FO-2 Overall Block Diagram (2 sheets)
FO-3 Drive, Direction Monitoring, and Level
Monitoring Functional Diagram
FO-4 Primary Radar Transmission Path Functional Diagram
FO-5 Primary Radar Reception Path Functional Diagram
FO-6 Secondary Radar Transmission/Reception Path
Functional Diagram
FO-7 Amplifier-demodulator A1AllA1A4A2Al Schematic Diagram
FO-8 Monitor and Control A3All Schematic Diagram (3 sheets)
FO-9 Antenna Cable Diagram (3 sheets)
FO-10 Junction Box A1AllA1A4A2 Wiring Diagram
FO-11 Power Supply Enclosure A2 Wiring Diagram
FO-12 Receiver Enclosure A3 Wiring Diagram (2 sheets)
FO-13 Electronic Switch SA-1868/UPX Wiring Diagram
FO-14 Waveguide and Cable Run, Shelter to Antenna (2 sheets)
FO-15 Transmit Path RF Components
FO-16 Receive Path RF Components
FO-17 Monitor and Control Board A3All Timing Diagram
xii
LIST OF TABLES
Number Title Page
1-1 Capabilities and Limitations ............................. . 1-4

1-2 Equipment Supplied ......................................... . 1-7
1-3 Recommended Support Equipment ............................ . 1-10
1-4 Consumable Materials ....................................... . 1-13
1-5 Related Publications ....................................... . 1-16
4-1 Power Distribution Panel lAl Antenna Related Controls

and Indicators Descriptions ............................ . 4-3
4-2 Antenna Group 51 Controls ................................. . 4-5
4-3 Power Supply Enclosure 51A2 Interlock .................. . 4-6
4-4 Receiver Enclosure 51A3 Controls ........................ . 4-8
5-1 8-Bi t Command Word ......................................... . 5-24

5-2 8-Bi t Response Word ........................................ . 5-24
5-3 Monitor and Control A3All, PROM U9 Program Data ...... . 5-33
5-4 Monitor and Control A2All, PROM U10 Program Data ..... . 5-34
5-5 Receive Beam Versus LNA Correlation ..................... . 5-36
5-6 LNA Swi tching Data ......................................... . 5-37
6-1 Faul t Symptom Index ........................................ . 6-4
7-1 Repair Decisions for Antenna Group ...................... . 7-3
xiii
SAFETY SUMMARY
The following safety precautions should be observed during the
operation and maintenance of any equipment. The following safety
precautions are general and are not related to specific procedures in
this manual.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS
High voltages, capable of causing death or serious injury to
personnel, are present in electronic equipment, cabinets, or racks in
which electronic equipment is installed. Care must be taken to avoid
contact with high voltage connections or IIS-Vac input connections
when installing, operating, or servicing any electronic equipment.
The following suggestions provide maintenance personnel with a guide
to a safer work place.
• Always remove equipment source-power unless procedures
specifically instruct maintenance personnel to do
otherwise.
• Be aware of dangerous voltage potentials that might be
present in equipment after power has been removed.
• Ground points of dangerous voltage potentials before
touching them.
• Remove all jewelry, especially watches, bracelets, and
rings before working on equipment.
• If possible, keep one hand away from equipment to
prevent conduction through body in the event of a
shock.
• Do not assume "Low Voltage" to be harmless. Any
voltage can cause injury or death.
DO NOT SERVICE ALONE
personnel should not service or adjust equipment unless another
person capable of administering first aid and resl_'scitation is
present.
RESUSCITATION
Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar
with modern methods of resuscitation.
xiv
SAFETY SUMMARY - Continued
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES
Any component board that contains ESDS components is considered

to be an ESDS device. Prior to handling the device, the use of silk,
rubber, or other materials prone to static accumulation should be
avoided. To handle an ESDS device, perform the following procedure in
an ESDS protected area:
CAUTION
ESDS devices are susceptible to damage

when an electrostatic discharge (ESD)
occurs across their terminals or
leads, or when these parts are exposed
to electrostatic fields.
NOTE
Numerous parts are susceptible to damage
when an electrostatic discharge (ESD)
occurs across their terminals. It is
standard practice to treat all devices and
the boards they are installed on as ESDS.
(1) Cover table surface with electrically conductive material such

as Velostat 1705.
(2) Ensure that rubber, silk, or other materials prone to static

accumulation are away from the work area.
(3) Place device onto protected surface (Velostat 1705 or

equivalent) and attach ground strap.
WARNING
Resistance in personnel ground straps

must be of sufficient value to limit
current to 5 milliamperes or less to
prevent injury to personnel.
(4) Cover wrist with a properly grounded wrist strap.
(5) Place device in an ESDS protective package.
Store devices in ESDS protective packaging or install shorting

mechanism. The device should remain packaged or attached to the
shorting mechanism as long as possible prior to use.
xv
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The following warnings and cautions appear in the text in this
manual, and are repeated here for emphasis. The warnings identify
hazards that may cause personal injury or death. The cautions
provide information that must be observed to prevent equipment damage
or to avoid troubleshooting errors.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury to personnel,

avoid contact with the rotating antenna
assembly. Be sure all personnel are outside
the area required for antenna rotation when
restarting the antenna.
(Pages 4-9 and 4-10)
WARNING
To prevent personnel injury to the drill

operator, use extreme caution with the
countertorque on the electric drill when the
screwjack limit is reached. Before the
array is completely lowered, handcrank (4)
should be used to finish the process.
(Page 7-14)
WARNING
To prevent personnel injury to the drill

countertorque on the electric drill when the
tusk assembly seats on the stop blocks.
Before the array is completely raised, the
handcrank (3) should be used to finish the
process. (Page 7--16 \
is.. NING
To prevent personal injury to personnel use

solvent P-D-680 in a well-ventilated area
away from open flame. (Page 7-20)
WARNING
To prevent bodily injury, two persons shall

be used to lift and handle the rotary joint
in the following steps since rotary joint
(6) weighs about 32 kilograms (70 pounds).
(Page 7-42)
xvi
SAFETY SUMMARY - continued
WARNING
To prevent bodily injury, two persons shall

be used to handle rotary joint in steps (b)
and (c) below since rotary joint (3) weighs
about 32 kilograms (70 pounds). (Page 7-44)
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, four assistants

are required to lift and handle radome (1)
since the radome (1) weighs about 55
~ilograms (120 pounds).
(Pages 7-100 and 7-101)
WARNING
Trichloroethane, MIL-T-8l533, is toxic to

skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. To
prevent personal injury from trichloro-
ethane, skin and eye protection is required.
Avoid repeated or prolonged contact. Good
general ventilation is normally required.
(pages 7-100 and 7-112)
WARNING
Adhesive, MIL-A-5092, type II, is toxic to

skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. To
prevent personal injury from adhesive, skin
and eye protection is required. Avoid
repeated or prolonged contact. Good general
ventilation is normally required.
(page 7-100)
WARNING
Sealant, MIL-S-8802, is toxic to skin, eyes,
and respiratory tract. To prevent personal
injury from sealant, skin and eye protection
is required. Avoid repeated or prolonged
contact. Good general ventilation is
normally required. (Page 7-101)
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, use two persons

to lift and handle IFF antenna since the IFF
antenna weighs about 36 kilograms (80
pounds). (Page 7-102)
xvii
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, two assistants
are required in step (e) below to assist in
handling the matrix assembly (5) during its
removal. (Page 7-123)
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, two assistants
are required in step (a) below to assist in
handling the matrix assembly (5) during its
installation. (page 7-125)
WARNING
To prevent personal injury from radioactive
material, do not attempt to disassemble or
repair receiver-protector. If the receiver
protector is tampered with, escaping
radiation could be hazardous to health.
(Page 7-126)
WARNING
To prevent personnel injury, an assistant is
required in steps (4) and (5) below to
support and handle the 11 x 6 matrix
assembly (2) during its removal. (Page 7-
128)
WARNING
required in step (1) below to handle and
support the 11 x 6 matrix assembly (2)
during its installation. (Page 7-128)
xviii
CAUTION
To prevent damage to sensitive adjacent

antenna components, do not operate two or
more identical radars within 1 mile of each
other unless sector blanking is used.
(Page 4-9)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to sensitive components,

do not operate two identical radars within 1
mile of each other unless sector blanking is
used. (Page 4-10)
CAUTION
To avoid damage to rotary joint components,

runout check must be done using extreme care
and preciseness. The following procedure
must be performed with complete accuracy.
(Page 7-48)
CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, do not turn
flexible coupling (6) to allow access to
screw (8). Instead, use handwheel on
antenna drive motor to turn flexible
coupling. (Page 7-60)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to flexible coupling (6),
if a downward load is applied while clamp
(7) is still tight on shaft of encoder (12),
be sure screw (8) is loose enough for easy
removal of encoder. (Page 7-60)
CAUTION
To avoid -damage to equipment, do not turn
flexible coupling (4) to allow access to
screw (8). Instead, use handwheel on
antenna drive motor to turn flexible
coupling. (Page 7-66)
xix
CAUTION
To prevent damage to flexible coupling (4),
be sure coupling clamp (6) is loosened
before removing synchro. If a downward load
is applied while coupling clamp (6) is tight
on shaft of synchro, damage can occur to
flexible coupling. (Page 7-66)
CAUTION
The radome (1) or supporting brackets can be
damaged if any extra weight is applied.
Therefore, do not stand or climb on radome
(1). (page 7-98)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to equipment, center of
diode holde: (1) must be held stationary
while loosening the knurled cap (2).
(Page 7-112)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to equipment, center of
diode holder (1) must be held stationary
while tightening the knurled cap (2).
(Page 7-112)
CAUTION
antenna components, do not operate two
identical radars within 1 mile of each other
unless sector blanking is used. (Pages
7-134, 7-135, 7-138, 7-139 and 7-145)
xx
INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the maintenance instructions required to

support organizational-level maintenance for Antenna Group TPS-70
manufactured by Westinghouse Electric Corporation.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1. General Information

Chapter 2. Installation
Chapter 3. Preparation for Use and Reshipment
Chapter 4. Operation
Chapter 5. Theory of Operation
Chapter 6. Troubleshooting
Chapter 7. Maintenance
Chapter 8. Circuit Diagrams
xxi
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter contains a description of the

equipment covered by this manual. This chapter also includes various
types of reference data for the deployment and support of the
equipment.
1-2. EQUIPMENT PURPOSE. The equipment covered by this manual is a

radar antenna group. The purpose of the radar antenna assembly is to
radiate S-band radio frequency (RF) pulses into space in a prescribed
pattern and to collect pulses reflected from aircraft. The radiate
pulses are supplied to the radar antenna assembly from the radar
transmitter located in an equipment shelter. Reflected pulses are
down-converted from S-band to 32 MHz before passing to the radar
intermediate frequency (IF) receiver. The purpose of the IFF antenna
is to radiate IFF interrogation pulses, at a frequency of 1030 MHz,
and to collect aircraft transponder pulses, transmitted at a
frequency of 1090 MHz. The interrogation pulses are supplied to the
IFF antenna from the IFF transceiver; the reply pulses are passed
from the same unit. The purpose of the omnidirectional antenna is to
continuously monitor the environment to detect jamming.
1-3. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION. Figure 1-1 shows the antenna group as

it appears when ready for operation.
a. The antenna group (see FO-l) consists of radar antennas mounted

on the rotating portion of a stationary pedestal. The radar antenna
assembly is mounted on a tower. The IFF antenna is mounted at the
top of the radar antenna assembly. An omnidirectional antenna is
mounted on top of the IFF antenna.
b. The electrical interface between the radar equipment shelter

and the radar antenna assembly is established by connecting lengths
of waveguide between the shelter transmitter output port and an input
port on the antenna pedestal, and by connecting power and signal
cables between shelter connectors and pedestal connectors.
c. When ac power is applied to the antenna pedestal drive motor,

the radar antenna assembly rotates at a speed of approximately 6 rpm.
Electrical continuity between the stationary and rotating portions of
the antenna pedestal is obtained through a rotary joint assembly that
extends up through the center of the pedestal.
d. The radar antenna assembly is a new and unconventional design

that provides a 0- to 20-degree elevation pattern of high gain and
narrow beam width with very low sidelobes in the azimuth plane. The
transmit/receive side of the radar antenna assembly is a flat,
rectangular surface formed by an array of 36 pieces of slotted
waveguide that are environmentally protected by an electrically
transparent cover. The microwave components, needed to distribute
transmit signals to the various pieces of waveguide, are located on
the back of the antenna assembly. The beam of transmitted energy is
1-1
formed by dividing the single high-level input from the radar set
transmitter into 22 low-level signals that have differing phases and
amplitudes. Each of these 22 signals is applied to one of 22 pieces
of slotted waveguide. The emissions from the slot openings in each
of the 22 pieces of waveguide result in a composite transmit beam,
narrow in the azimuth plane and fan-shaped in cross-section.
e. Reflected energy from aircraft is collected by all 36 pieces of

slotted waveguide in the radar antenna assembly. The 36 waveguide
outputs are partially combined and amplified in low noise RF
amplifiers. Their outputs are combined again. The result is that the
antenna reception pattern contains six distinct peaks, each at a
prescribed elevation angle. Peaks in the receive pattern, at known
elevation angles, enable the radar set to compute the height of an
aircraft after its range has been measured.
f. The six outputs that result from the successive combinations

are applied to a receiver on the back of the antenna assembly. In
the receiver, each of the six inputs are amplified and then mixed
with a local oscillator signal provided from the frequency generator.
As a result of mixing, the signals in each of the six channels are
downconverted from the S-band transmit frequency to an intermediate
frequency of 32-MHz which is compatible with the input requirements
of the IF receiver.
g. The azimuth of the radar antenna transmit and receive beam

patterns are not perpendicular to the face of the antenna assembly.
The pattern directions are at an angle that varies with frequency and
has a maximum value of 16 degrees. The angle of departure from the
perpendicular is referred to as the squint angle. Because of the
squint angle, the IFF antenna is mounted so that its face is at an
angle with respect to the face of the radar antenna assembly. With
this mounting arrangement, both antennas are electrically pointed in
the same directi0n.
h. The IFF antenna is a linear array of dipoles with a reflector

behind them. A front cover protects the dipoles from the weather.
The dipoles are partitioned into two sections that can be excited
independently. This feature permits the IFF to operate in the
interrogator sidelobe suppression (ISLS) mode. The IFF antenna
system also includes a duplexer and an electronic switch. These
elements and a small backfill radiator mounted at the rear of the IFF
antenna permit a sum pattern to be formed when PI or P3 interrogation
pulses are radiated. A difference pattern is formed when P2
interrogation pulses are radiated. The difference pattern is
produced within +2.0 degrees of the sum pattern peak.
i. The round omnidirectional antenna has a doughnut-shaped

reception pattern for S-band frequencies. The reception gain of this
antenna exceeds the gain of the sidelobes produced by the radar
antenna. Signals received by the omnidirectional antenna are
amplified by a low noise RF amplifier located in the receiver
assembly at the back of the radar antenna assembly; the amplified
signals are then amplified again in a second amplifier and mixed with
1-2
a local oscillator signal from the frequency generator. The 32-MHz
output of this channel is the seventh input for the IF receiver and
it detects jamming signals.
1-4. REFERENCE DATA. Reference data for the antenna assembly is

discussed in the following paragraphs.
a. Leading Particulars. The leading particulars of the antenna

assembly cannot be considered apart from those of the parent radar
set. For radar set leading particulars, refer to the radar set
manual.
b. Capabilities and Limitations. The important capabilities and

limitations of the antenna assembly are listed in table 1-1.
c. Equipment Supplied. Table 1-2 lists the major assemblies and

components of the antenna group. The table includes the official
nomenclature, the common name and reference designation, the
quantity, and a brief description for each item. The common names
listed in table 1-2 will be used throughout the remaining chapters of
this manual. The location of the items listed in table 1-2 are shown
in FO-l.
d. Recommended Support Equipment and Consumable Materials. Table

1-3 lists the support equipment which is recommended for installa-
tion, operation, and maintenance of the antenna group. Table 1-4
lists the materials which are routinely consumed during operation and
maintenance of the antenna group. The table references a
Westinghouse specification, Government specification, and commercial
part number wherever possible. Although each reference recommends a
product that will adequately serve the purpose intended for the
antenna group, the products will not necessarily be identical or
interchangeable.
e. Related Publications. This manual is a second level manual

that supports a higher level radar set manual. Table 1-5 lists the
parent radar set manuals and all manuals provided for the antenna
group.
1-3
Table 1-1. Capabilities and Limitations
Item Characteristics
Radar antenna
Type Planar array; cosecant-squared

transmit pattern; 6-beam receive
pattern
Frequency 2.9 to 3.1 GHz
Power handling capacity
Peak 3 MW (nominal)
Average 5 kW
Polarization Horizontal
Gain
Transmit 35.0 dB
Receive (beam 1) 35.0 dB
3-dB beamwidth
Azimuth 1. 6 ±O. 2 degrees

Elevation (beam 1) 2.4 ±0.2 degrees
Elevation coverage o to 20 degrees
Side lobes
Azimuth -35.0 dB
Elevation -20.0 dB
IFF antenna
Type Linear dipole array; sum and

difference patterns
Frequency
Outgoing 1030 ±10 MHz

Incoming 1090 ±10 MHz
Power handling capacity 10 kW, at 1.0 percent duty cycle
Polarization Vertical
Gain 19-dB minimum
1-4
Table 1-1. Capabilities and Limitations - Continued
IFF antenna - Continued
3-dB sum beamwidth
Azimuth Less than 7.2 degrees

Elevation o to greater than 50 degrees
Difference pattern 9 dB down at +2.0 degrees of sum
beam peak; 0 dB down at 0 degrees
omnidirectional antenna
Type Broad band, slant-line bi-conical
Frequency 1. 0 to 4. 0 GHz
Polarization Linear
Gain o dB
Elevation coverage o to 45 degrees
Receiver
Type Solid-state; low-noise amplifiers

(LNAs), followed by RF amplifiers/
mixers
LNAs
Frequency 2.9 to 3.1 GHz

Gain 22 +1.5 dB
Noise figure 3.0 dB
RF amplifiers/mixers
Input frequency 2.9 to 3.1 GHz

Local oscillator frequency 2.87 to 3.07 GHz
Output frequency 32.0 MHz
Gain 12 +1.5 dB
Noise figure 6.0 dB maximum
Image rejection 20 dB minimum
Number of output channels
Radar 6
Omni 1
1-5
Table 1-1. Capabilities and Limitations - Continued
Other features
Antenna tilt provision -1.5 to +3.0 degrees, in 0.5-degree

increments
Rotation rate 6.4 rpm, ±10 percent
Position data outputs Azimuth reference pulse (ARP), once

per revolution; azimuth change
pulses (ACPs), 4096 per revolution
Environmental characteristics
Temperature limits
Operate -40 to +52°C

Non-operate -62 to +7!OC
Altitude limits
Operate 10,000 feet

Non-operate 50,000 feet
1-6
Table 1-2. Equipment Supplied
Ref Official
Des Nomenclature Common Name Qty Description and Purpose
51 Modified Antenna group 1 See text.

Antenna Group
OE-364
/TPS-70{V)
NOTE
The antenna group is comprised of the
following major assemblies and components:
51AIAI Antenna 1 Supports antennas. Has

pedestal motordriven rotating
platform. Has integral
rotary joint for signal and
power transmission.
51A2 Power supply 1 Houses two 15-volt power

enclosure supplies that provide
voltage for active receiver
components. One supply is
redundant.
51A3 Receiver 1 Houses all active receiver

enclosure components except primary
radar LNAs. Includes six
primary radar RF receivers,
one STALO amplifier and
power divider, one omni LNA
and RF receiver, one moni-
tor and control board, and
one ±12 volt power supply.
51A4 Array 1 Primary radar transmit/

assembly receive array, Consists of
36 pieces of slotted wave-
guide, protected from
weather by an electrically
transparent radome.
51A5 Antenna IFF antenna 1 Antenna for IFF radar.

AS-3719 Includes duplexer in
/TPS-70{V) conjunction with electronic
switch listed below.
Permits generation of sum
and difference patterns
during transmission.
1-7
Table 1-2. Equipment Supplied - Continued
Ref Official
Electronic Electronic 1 Controls two inputs to IFF

Switch switch antenna duplexer. One
SA-1868/UPX input causes a·ntenna to
radiate sum pattern. Other
input causes antenna to
radiate difference pattern.
SlA6 Antenna Backfill 1 Single dipole antenna used

AS-4008/T radiator to suppress IFF antenna
backlobe when difference
transmit pattern is gene-
rated. Fed from third port
of IFF antenna duplexer.
SlA7 Matrix 1 Contains two 18 x 18

combiner stripline matrices that
combine 36 primary radar
antenna receive inputs from
SlA9 into 18 beams, only 11
of which are used. Also
contains 11 LNAs that
amplify matrix outputs.
SlA9 Microwave 1 Assembly of microwave

assembly waveguide components that
distributes transmit energy
to 22 slotted waveguides of
primary radar antenna.
Also collects receive
energy, via 22 three-port
circulators and 22 receiver
protectors. Receive energy
collected from 14 other
slotted waveguides is
passed through waveguide to
coax transitions.
SlAIO Tusk assembly 1 Structure that supports

radar antenna assembly on
antenna pedestal. Includes
jack screw mechanism used
to raise and lower antenna
assembly.
1-8
Table 1-2. Equipment Supplied - Continued
Ref Official
51A12 11 x 6 Matrix 1 Contains two strip-line

matrices that combine 11
LNA outputs from 51A7 into
final six receive beam
inputs that enter 51A3
Omnidirectional 1 Printed circuit
antenna antenna with 360-degree
receive pattern
Dr ill motor 1 Portable electric
reversible drill, 24 volts
ac or dc. Used to raise or
lower antenna array
Y-cord 1 6-foot cord with battery

clamps. Used to provide
power to drill motor from a
battery source.
Extension cord 1 25-foot extension cord.
Used to provide power to
drill motor from
convenience outlet on
antenna pallet.
1-9
Table 1-3. Recommended Support Equipment
Equipment Description Part Number Manufacturer Quantity

(CAGE)
Attenuator, 20-dB fixed AB20N Microlab

2
coax, type "N" connector (00929)
Compass, survey, magnetic 8026-30 Lietz

1
north; use with tripod (73996)
(transit) 8026-33
Connector, adapter, "BNC" Gov't Spec.

UG274BjU 2
type tee (81349)
Coupler, directional, 20-dB, CB48N Microlab

2
type "N" connector (00929)
Detector, crystal, coaxial 423B Hewlett

2
Packard
(28480)
Extender board, printed 346D707GOl Westinghouse

1
circuit; use with GPS-13A or (97942) or
Interference Blanker Set 2177D28GOl (18323)
Eyeshield, protective; over GAC1495A Snap-on

3
eyeglasses type (goggles) (55719)
IFF Switch Test Set; use to 2D13141GOl Westinghouse

1
test the Electronic Switch (18323)
on Antenna
Indicator dial, manufactured 2417 MTI Corp.

1
by Mitutoyo; use to take (2E069)
precise measurements
Load, dummy, fixed coaxial 374BNM Narda

2
with "N" type plug connector Microwave
(99899)
Meter, multi (volt, ohm, and 260-8PRT Simpson

1
milliamp), ruggedized; (31713)
replaces Simpson multimeter
260-7PRT
1-10
Table 1-3. Recommended Support Equipment - Continued

(CAGE)
Meter, power, analog; use 435B-00l Hewlett

1
with 8482A power sensor Packard
(28480)
Oscilloscope, monitor, with 2445/2465 Tektronix

1
digital multimeter and Option 01 (80009)
probes; provided as part of
radar set
Pliers, lock wire, spring- WT11 Snap-on

1
loaded twist rod with knob, (55719)
tight quarters model; use on
0.032-inch wire max.
Signal generator, 2.3 - 6.5 8683B-OP003 Hewlett

1
GHz: use for fault isolation Packard
and test of various radar (28480)
components
Signal generator, mainframe; 8350B-400 Hewlett 1

use with 83525B-002 plug-in Packard
module (28480)
Signal generator, plug-in Hewlett

83525B-002 1
module; use with 8350B-400 Packard
mainframe (28480)
Solder iron electric cord, 6102 Eldon

1
ungrounded; use with solder Industries
iron handle 6100, heat (78976)
cartridge, and tip
Solder iron handle; use with Eldon

6100 Industries
1
electric cord 6102, heat
cartridge, and tip (78976)
Solder iron heat cartridge, 6203 Eldon

1
55W; use with solder iron Industries
handle 6100, electric cord (78976)
6102, and tip
1-11
Table 1-3. Recommended Support Equipment - Continued

(CAGE)
Solder iron tip, 1/8" 6313 Eldon

1
pencil; use with solder iron Industries
handle 6100, electric cord (78976)
6102, and heat cartridge
Termination, 0.5 watt load, 5B062-75 Automatic

3
"BNC" type connector Connector
(94375)
Tripod (transit), survey; 8026-33 Lietz

1
use with compass 8026-30 (73996)
Wrench Set, T-handle; use 2177D77GOl Westinghouse

3
for antenna rotary joint (18323)
removal
Wrench, torque, 50 foot- TE50FA Snap-on

1
pounds, 3/8-inch drive (55719)
Wrench, torque, preset by Maury

8799A 1
manufacturer to 8 inch-pound Microwave
setting; use on "SMA" and (13047)
"OSM" connectors on antenna
Wrench, torque; use to 10071 Semflex

1
tighten "N" connectors on (60637)
antenna to 14 inch-pounds
(preset by manufacturer)
1-12
Table 1-4. Consumable Materials
Specification or Part Number

(Contractor and Government Entity)
Gov't.
Westinghouse Spec.
Spec. (81348, Commercial
Consumable Description (97942) 81349) Part Number Quantity
Adhesive, rubber, M53314VZ MMM-A- SCOTCHGRIP 2 pints

general purpose; not 1617 2141
for critical load Type II 3M Co.
bearing (76381)
Adhesive/sealant kit, M53320DZ S-1009 5 kits
epoxy resin, abrasive; Raychem
use on waveguide (06090)
Bags, reclosable, 4- 07-5070R 5 pkg.
inch x 6-inch size, 9 Price-
bags per package; use Modern
to contain disassem- (No FMC)
bled small parts (Balt., MD)
Brush, sash, stiff Local As
bristle Purchase required
Caps, hose protection, MIL-C- As
various sizes 5501 [specify required
size]
Protective
Closures
(99017)
Cleaner/solvent, M55812FC P-D-680 2 gallons

general purpose; use Type II Convoy Oil
in shelter (6A438)
Cleaner/solvent, M51550FC MIL-T- 2 gallons
trichloroethane, 1-1-1 81533 or Dow
(methyl chloroform, O-T-620 Chemical
inhibited) Type I (96717)
Compound, SS-L-1682 4779A24 1
lapping/grinding McMaster
Carr
(39428)
Container, 10-liter Local As
capacity Purchase required
1-13
Table 1-4. Consumable Materials - Continued

Gov't.
Westinghouse Spec.
Gloves, rubber; use M76502AL ZZ-G-381 11-394-50E 12 pairs

when working with Fisher
chemicals Scientific
(22527)
Oil, hydraulic; used M55125GU MIL-L- ROYCO 363A 5 gallons

in antenna drive motor 7870 Royal
gearbox Lubricant
(07950)
Paper towels, 30 rolls UU-T-595 67496C 1 case

per case Type VI Ace
Hardware
(OAB50)
Plastic sheet, Local As

polyethylene Purchase required
Sealant, antenna, 6 M53841LQ MIL-S- PR-1422 2 tubes

ounce cartridge 8802 Class B~
requires caulking gun Type I, Products
Class B~ Research &
Chemical
Corp.
(92108)
Sealant, thread, low M53320UA MIL-S- 222 1

lock torque, 50-ml 46163 Locktite
container Type II (05972)
Grade M
Solder, 60% tin - 40% M17630AVOSJ SN60WRMAP 2 rolls

lead, rosin flux core, 3016 Alpha
0.016-inch, 1 pound Metals
roll (96613 )
Solder, 60% tin - 40% M17630AVOS2 SN60WRMAP 3 rolls

lead, rosin flux core, 3032 Alpha
0.032-inch, 1 pound Metals
roll (96613)
1-14
Table 1-4. Consumable Materials - Continued

Gov't.
Westinghouse Spec.
Stone, lapping 4507Al 1

McMaster
Carr
(39428)
Tags, danger, tie on:

"Electrical Hazard" 8314T19 as
"High Voltage" 5731T491 required
"Flammable Liquids" 5731Y921
"No Smoking" 5731T791
"Maintenance in
Progress"
McMaster
Carr
(39428)
Tape, duct, water- M41561JC- PPP-T-60 7906T13 8 rolls

proof, olive drab 01330030 Type IV McMaster
green color, 3 inches Class I Carr
x 60 yards (39428)
Wire, safety, 0.032- MS20995- 5P6028 2 spools

inch; use for antenna C32 or Caterpillar
drive motor gearbox QQ-W-461 (11083)
plug
1-15
Table 1-5. Related Publications
Equipment Publication Publication Title

Nomenclature Number
Radar set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-l Operation Instructions,

TPS-70(V)5 Maintenance Instructions,
Site Level Manual
Radar Set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-3 Circuit Diagrams

TPS-70(V)5 Site Level Manual
Radar Set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-4 Illustrated Parts

TPS-70(V)5 Breakdown Site Level
Manual
Radar Set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-6 Inspection and Maintenance

TPS-70(V)5 RequirementsSite Level
Manual
Radar Set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-7 Installation and

TPS-70(V)5 Reshipment Site Level
Manual
Radar Set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-8 Workcards Site Level

TPS-70 (V) 5 Manual
Radar Set CBRN-TPS70(V)5-RS-9 Alignment Site Level

TPS-70(V)5 Manual
Antenna Group CBRN-TPS70 (V) 5-AN-4 Illustrated Parts

Breakdown Site Level
Manual
±15V Power Supply SPS2779 Transistor Devices, InD.,

Model SPS2779, Power
Supply Instruction Manual
±12V Power Supply SPS2902 Transistor Devices, Inc.,

Model SPS2902, Power
Supply Instruction Manual
1-16
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
2-1. INTRODUCTION. Although the antenna group installation can be

considered as a separate task, it normally takes place at the same
time as the radar shelter is installed. Installation instructions
for the entire radar set are included in the Installation and
Reshipment Site Level radar set mannual.
2-1/(2-2 blank)
CHAPTER 3
PREPARATION FOR USE AND RESHIPMENT
3-1. INTRODUCTION. Preparation instructions for use and reshipment

for the antenna group are included in the Installation and Reshipment
Site Level radar set mannual.
3-1/(3-2 blank)
CHAPTER 4
OPERATION
4-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter contains descriptions of equipment

controls and indicators and equipment operating instructions. This
chapter is divided into three sections: section I, controls and
indicators; section II, operating instructions; and section III,
emergency operation.
Section I. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
4-2. GENERAL. This section illustrates and describes the antenna

assembly operating controls and indicators.
4-3. LOCATION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS. Figures 4-1 through 4-4

show the locations of all operating controls and indicators mentioned
in this chapter. Controls and indicators that are used only for
maintenance are also shown. Note that the equipment shown in figure
4-1 is not part of the antenna group; however, the equipment is shown
here to prevent needless reference to other manuals.
4-4. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND INDICATORS. Tables 4-1 through

4-4 briefly describe the function of each of the controls and
indicators shown in figures 4-1 through 4-4.
4-5. INTERLOCKS. The equipment contains safety interlock switches

to protect personnel when maintenance is being performed. The
switches are described in tables 4-2 and 4-3.
4-1
Og9 9 QQ Q
11
J1
-LJ---
ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR 2
I I ,,}?;,.
----!--@U(& ~1$\I- ~ I I
~ TI~1~~~!M 3
10
---r---- 17'"''
I ~ ""'"
®::-L-!--
I LINE MONITOR ,
.. EU <CCUS COIL
IlliillIlliillI
~-- S"EL TER - - - - - ,
.... ,T CO ....... "DI
... ,It COHO "'R CO"O COOIV o"S
IlliillIrillDI~~"~ '~ 4
I ANTENNA
~. CO~··
t
I
°i-L-
... T TILT
L-----~ "0" jj '0' -- 5
J
B---~~------~~ 6
~~0~"Z10AM~AX~
7 J10 J11
7647-BF-501A
Figure 4-1. Power Distribution Panel lAl Antenna Related

Controls and Indicators
4-2
Table 4-1. Power Distribution Panel lAl Antenna Related
Controls and Indicators Descriptions
Find Ref
No. Des Name Function
1 A5Ml ANTENNA TILT Provides vernier indication of

INDICATOR antenna pallet leveling. Has
relay meter adjustable limit contacts. that are
normally set at +0.5 and -0.5
degree.
2 A5DS2 ANTENNA TILT Sounds audible alarm if tilt

INDICATOR meter pointer touches either
buzzer limit contact.
3 A5S1 ANTENNA TILT Controls buzzer.

INDICATOR
TILT ALARM
ENABLE/DISABLE
toggle switch
4 CB19 ANTENNA TILT Controls ac power to antenna tilt

INDIC indicator lA5 and to vertical
circuit breaker sensor mounted in antenna
pedestal.
5 CB20 ANTENNA CONV Controls ac power to con-

OUTLETS venience outlets.
circuit breaker
6 CB18 ANTENNA RF AMP Controls ac power to receiver

circuit breaker dc supplies mounted on antenna.
7 CB17 ANTENNA SYNCHRO Controls ac power to synchros

circuit breaker mounted on antenna pedestal rotary
joint.
8 CB16 ANTENNA ANT Controls ac power to antenna

DRIVE pedestal drive motor. However,
circuit breaker power reaches motor only if
antenna assembly safety interlock
switch is in NORMAL position.
4-3
Table 4-1. Power Distribution Panel lAl Antenna Related
Controls and Indicators Descriptions - Continued
Find Ref
9 ANTENNA TILT Contains spare fuse for Fl

INDICATOR below.
PWR SUPPLY SPARE
.25A fuseholder
10 A5Fl ANTENNA TILT Protects ac input to antenna

INDICATOR tilt indicator lA5.
PWR SUPPLY
.25A fuse
11 A5DSI ANTENNA TILT Lights (red) if tilt meter

INDICATOR pointer touches either
TILT ALARM limi t contact.
indicator lamp
4-4
2
2920-BF-502A
Figure 4-2. Antenna Group 51 Controls
Table 4-2. Antenna Group 51 Controls
Find Ref
AllSl SAFETY INTERLOCK In STOP position, prevents

switch ac power from reaching
antenna drive motor and
opens radiate interlock
circuit.
1 Drive motor Secures antenna in fixed

lockpin position.
4-5
7647-BF-S03A
Figure 4-3. Power Supply Enclosure 51A2 Interlock Switch
Table 4-3. Power Supply Enclosure 51A2 Interlock
Find Ref
1 Sl Interlock switch Automatically disconnects ac

input when enclosure cover
is raised. Can be pulled
out to bypass position if ac
input must be reconnected to
accomplish maintenance.
4-6
Figure 4-4. Receiver Enclosure 5lA3 Controls
4-7
Table 4-4. Receiver Enclosure 51A3 Controls
Find Ref
1-3 51-53 LOCAL LNA When 55 is in NORMAL posi-

CONTROL tion and 54 is in the 1
1 and 0 switches position (up), switches are
nonfunctional. When 55 is
in LOCAL TE5T position and
54 is in 1 position, allows
LNAs to turn on in accord-
ance with input code to 3-
line to 8-line multiplexer
of monitor and control
board.
4 54 LOCAL LNA When in the 1 position,

CONTROL LNAs may be controlled
1 and 0 switches locally or remotely. When
in the 0 position, all LNAs
are turned on regardless of
switches 51-3, 55 positions.
5 55 LOCAL LNA When in NORMAL position

CONTROL TE5T and 54 is in the 1 position,
switch allows LNAs to be turned on
in accordance with PROM
program. When in LOCAL TE5T
position, allows LNAs to be
turned on in accordance with
toggle switches 51 through
54.
4-8
Section II. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4-6. GENERAL. This section contains the antenna group operating

instructions. It is assumed that the operator has read the material
in section I and is generally familiar with the various equipment
operating controls and indicators. The instructions in this section
describe initial turn-on, normal operation, and turn-off. The
instructions are limited to those required for normal operation in
the environment of intended use. Instructions applicable only to
certain maintenance tasks are provided as an integral part of the
maintenance instructions in chapter 7. Operation under abnormal
conditions is covered in section III of this chapter.
4-7. TURN-ON PROCEDURE. The instructions in this paragraph cover

the situation where the antenna group is to be turned on after an
extended shutdown period during which various controls may have been
left in unknown positions. Proceed as follows:
a. On power distribution panel, ensure that all ANTENNA circuit

breakers are down.
b. Check that SAFETY INTERLOCK switch is at STOP.
c. At back of antenna assembly, unfasten hinged cover on receiver

enclosure and check that TEST toggle switch is set to NORMAL.
Secure cover.
d. At antenna pedestal, check that lockpin has been removed from

drive motor handwheel.
e. Be sure that no tools or other possible obstructions have been

left behind in path of rotation.
f. On power distribution panel, set all ANTENNA circuit breakers,

except CONV OUTLET to up.
WARNING

CAUTION

antenna components, do not operate two or
more identical radars within I mile of each
other unless sector blanking is used.
g. Set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to NORMAL.
4-9
h. On power distribution panel, set antenna tilt indicator TILT
ALARM toggle switch to ENABLE. Note that there is no audible
alarm and that TILT ALARM indicator lamp is out.
i. Go into tower and observe that antenna assembly is rotating in

clockwise direction.
4-8. OPERATING PROCEDURE. Operation of the antenna assembly

involves no more than stopping and starting antenna rotation. To
stop rotation and then restart, proceed as follows:
WARNING

CAUTION
To prevent damage to sensitive components,

do not operate two identical radars within 1
mile of each other unless sector blanking is
used.
a. Set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to STOP. (This stops rotation.)
b. To resume rotation, set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to NORMAL.
4-9. TURN-OFF PROCEDURE. The instructions in this paragraph cover

the situation where the antenna group must be shutdown for an
extended period of time. Proceed as follows:
a. If the radar transmitter is not already off, shut it down to

standby state.
b. On power distribution panel, set all ANTENNA circuit breakers

down. If a maintenance task is to follow, hang DANGER tags on
all ANTENNA circuit breakers positioned to OFF.
NOTE
If power tools, test equipment, or

droplights are going to be used at the
antenna, leave the ANTENNA CONV OUTLET
circuit breaker on.
c. Set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to STOP.
4-10
CHAPTER 5
THEORY OF OPERATION
5-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter contains a functional description

of the antenna group. The purpose of the description is to provide
operating and maintenance personnel with sufficient background
information to effectively perform their duties. The level of
description is based on the assumption that the personnel have had
previous experience with similar or related equipment. This chapter
is divided into three sections: section I, functional system
operation; section II, functional operation of electronic circuits;
and section III, functional operation of mechanical assemblies.
Section I. FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM OPERATION
5-2. GENERAL. This section contains an overall description of the

equipment and detailed descriptions of each of the major equipment
functions.
5-3. OVERALL DESCRIPTION. The overall description of the equipment

is divided into two major topics: mechanical features and
electrical/electronic features.
a. Mechanical Features. The significant mechanical features of

the antenna group are shown in FO-l. Refer to that diagram during
the following discussion.
(1) Antenna Pedestal AIAll. The antenna pedestal supports the

tusk assembly which is the backbone of the antenna array. The
pedestal assembly consists of a stationary pedestal, a rotating
pedestal, and an adjustable tilt frame.
(a) Stationary Pedestal. The stationary pedestal is two sub-

assemblies bolted together: a top section called the stationary
inner cylinder, and a bottom section which is the base. The
stationary inner cylinder mounts two main bearings which support the
rotating pedestal. On top of the stationary cylinder, a bearing
plate with shims preloads to remove excessive play in the rotating
pedestal. Mounting pads in the stationary cylinder provide anchor
points for rotary joint Al and vertical sensor A3. The lower portion
of the stationary pedestal is anchored to the tower. Side cover on
the antenna pedestal allows access to waveguide and electrical
connections for rotary joint Al and vertical sensor A3 on one side,
and to synchro and encoder geartrain assembly AIA4 and junction box
AIA4A2 on the other side. The stationary pedestal also supports
antenna drive assembly A2 and the bottom of the bullgear shield.
(b) Rotating Pedestal. The rotating pedestal is supported by

two main bearings. For each bearing, a lube fitting and purge hole
is provided so that the bearings can be lubricated at lO-degree
intervals of rotation as indicated by the azimuth scale on the
bullgear shield. A top cover with a seal on the rotating pedestal is
5-1
accessible through the top access in the tilt frame. This rotating
pedestal cover allows access to the bearing plate and shims on the
stationary inner cylinder and to the anchor bolts for the rotary
joint and vertical sensor. The access cover is sealed with a neo-
prene O-ring to keep out water and debris.
(c) Tilt Frame. The tilt frame, which pivots on the rotating
pedestal, can be preset to a prescribed angle from -1.5 to +3
degrees, in 1/4-degree increments. This angle, controlled by a stack
of wedge-shaped shims on each side of the pedestal, is the tilt angle
of the array. Each stack of shims is retained by and pivots on a
shoulder bolt. On the pedestal, a keeper secures the shims that are
not in use. Once the holddown nuts are loosened, the required shims
are inserted or removed when the tilt frame is lifted on one end by a
tilt frame jack. On the tilt frame, the slotted lug for the tilt
frame jack is to the right of pedestal step as viewed from the center
of pedestal.
(2) Tusk Assembly. The tusk assembly supports the array assembly,
the IFF antenna, and the omnidirectional antenna. When lowered, the
tusk assembly is pivioted 20 degrees below the horizontal position.
The tusk assembly consists of a pedstal extension, left and right
tusks, and a screwjack assembly.
(a) Pedestal Extension. Attached to the pedestal tilt frame,

the pedestal extension supports the left and right tusks and the
screwjack assembly. The tusks also pivot on the pedestal extension.
Grease fittings are provided for the pivot bearings.
(b) Left and Right Tusks. The tusks pivot on the pedestal
extension when folding the antenna. When erected, each tusk is
bolted to a stop block on each pedestal extension. The tusks are
supported by struts attached to the tilt frame. Through the use of
quick-release pins, the struts are easily installed and removed.
(c) Screwjack Assembly. The screwjack assembly contains the

pivot angle of the left and right tusks, thereby raising or lowering
the array assembly. The jack is operated by a crank handle or by an
electric drill. The handcrank and the 24-Vdc electric drill are
provided with the antenna. A torque limiting device prevents the
application of excessive torque to the crank. Eight grease fittings
are provided on the jack assembly: two on the traverse shaft, two on
the jack support bracket, two on the traveling nut, and two at the
base of jack (one fitting under the wormgear boot). The wormgear is
periodically lubricated by brush.
b. Electrical/Electronic Features. An overall block diagram of

the antenna group is shown in FO-2. Refer to that diagram during the
following discussion.
(1) The radar antenna and the IFF and omnidirectional antennas
(FO-2, sheet 1) show the physical relationship between the fixed and
movable portions of the antenna pedestal. Observe that the IFF
antenna is mounted above the radar antenna and that the
5-2
omnidirectional antenna is mounted above the IFF antenna. Also, note
that the signals to and from the three antennas are transferred
through sliprings of the rotary joint. The energy from the radar
antenna and from the omnidirectional antenna is IF energy, whereas he
input and output energy of the IFF antenna is in RF form.
Additionally, the test pulse is in RF form.
(2) The antenna pedestal drive motor causes the antenna to

rotate at a speed of approximately 6 rpm and at the same time drives
the resolver, the two synchros, and the encoder within the rotary
joint. A tilt sensor, which is excited by a single-phase, 120-Vac,
400-Hz signal, is physically mounted on the antenna pedestal. Its
function is to sense when the antenna pedestal is not level as a
result of antenna rotation. This deviation from the level would
cause pointing errors, which would result in height determination
errors. The tilt sensor produces two outputs, one in the pitch axis
and one in the roll axis.
(a) Resolver. The resolver has two stators and a four-

element rotor. Basically, any resolver is used to determine a vector
quantity, which has been represented electrically as sine and cosine
components. The resolver is used to produce voltage outputs rather
than rotation. The inputs to the resolver stators are the roll com-
ponent and the pitch component from the tilt sensor and are applied
through the amplifier portion of the amplifier-demodulator. The
resolver outputs, which are taken from the rotor, are applied to the
demodulator portion of the amplifier-demodulator.
(b) Amplifier-demodulator. The amplifier-demodulator

contains two operational amplifiers, one for the pitch input and one
for the roll input. It also contains a demodulator circuit, which is
excited by a single-phase, 56-Vac, 400-Hz signal, whose output is the
tilt correction voltage needed to compensate for any deviation from
the level of the antenna as it rotates.
_j (c) synchros. The two synchros are not used in this radar
( installation. The synchros, which are excited by a single-phase,
120-Vac, 400-Hz signal, produce antenna position information, both
coarse and fine. The coarse data is IX data, the fine data is 36X
data. In a coarse data system, the synchro must turn one complete
revolution to transmit a full range of values. One revolution of the
input shaft produces one revolution of the synchro transmitter rotor,
which in turn, produces one revolution of the synchro receiver rotor.
This single-speed system is self-synchronous; however, it has the
disadvantage of being inaccurate. In a fine data system, one
rotation of the input shaft produces 36 rotations of the rotor in the
synchro and one rotation of the output shaft. This reduces the
system error by a factor of 36; however, the system has 36
correspondence points and as such, cannot be self-synchronous.
(~ Encoder. The encoder produces two outputs for each

antenna revolution: one output consists of 4096 azimuth change
pulses (ACP) and the other output is a single pulse (north mark).
5-3
(3) The remaining electrical portion of the antenna group is
shown on FO-2 sheet 2.
(a) IFF Antenna. The IFF/SIF radar antenna includes an AS-

3719/TPS-70(V) main antenna, an AS-4008/T backfill radiator, and a
hybrid duplexer assembly. The antenna group transmits and receives
the IFF signals. The electronic switch, although not a part of the
IFF antenna group, is described under this heading.
1 IFF Antenna AS-3719/TPS-70(V). This IFF antenna is

mounted in-front of the antenna feed. The IFF antenna is a separate
planar array of vertically polarized dipoles in front of a reflector.
The dipoles are on the inside of the front fiberglass surface and the
reflector is formed around the other surfaces. The combination is
filled with a closed-cell foam and covered with fiberglass to form a
light rigid package that is impervious to the weather. The overall
antenna is divided into separate identical electrical halves. Each
half of the dipole array is fed by a balanced RF line within the
confines of the package. The resulting assembly is completely rigid
and enclosed except for one RF connector on each half.
2 Backfill Radiator AS-4008/T. The backfill radiator is a

single dipole mounted on the support for the reflector at the back of
the IFF directional antenna, which utilizes construction techniques
similar to the IFF antenna. The backfill radiator covers the
backlobe of the sum pattern.
1 Hybrid Duplexer Assembly. The hybrid duplexer applies

signals to the two antenna halves of the IFF antenna. The duplexer
has two outputs, Pl and P2, which are either in-phase or 180 degrees
out-of-phase. The duplexer has two input ports, Jl and J2. The two
duplexer outputs provide the means of generating the sum pattern with
the two halves in-phase and the difference pattern with the two
antenna halves 180 degrees out-of-phase.
i Electronic Switch. The electronic switch separates the

RF signals from the pulsed video switching signals coupled into the
switch. The electronic switch consists of an RF switch, RF filter,
and a diplexer, all integrated into a common stripline package. In
operation, the diplexer receives the incoming signals and separates
the RF signals from the pulsed video switching signals. When the
incoming signal is a sum, or positive pulse, it causes the RF energy
to be propagated to the sum port of the electronic switch. When the
incoming signal is a difference or negative pulse, it causes the
RFenergy to be propagated to the difference port. An RF low-pass
filter with an operating frequency above 1200 MHz is located at each
port to filter and couple the signal of the present mode to the
hybrid duplexer of the radarantenna assembly. This duplexer can
alternately light each of the two linear arrays of the antenna in
either an in-phase or out-of-phase relationship, depending upon the
selected mode of operation. See figure 5-1 for radiation patterns.
The mode-of-operation is selected by the incoming signal to the dup-
lexer from the electronic switch. On initiation of the sum mode,
each of the two linear arrays are lit in-phase, thus forming a
5-4
SUM
PATT ERN
t
I DIFFERENCE
PATTERN
VERTICAL
_-r-
AXIS
7647-BF-5D5A
Figure 5-1. IFF/SIF Radiation Patterns
beam-pattern having low sidelobes. Initiation of the difference mode

casues the two linear arrays to be lit out-of-phase. In this mode,
the input signal to the duplexer is also coupled to the backfill
radiator. The difference beam-pattern thus covers most of the sum
pattern except in the backlobe null area, which is covered by the
backfill radiator pattern.
(b) Omnidirectional Antenna. The omnidirectional antenna,

also referred to as the sidelobe reference (SLR) antenna, is a
cylindrical structure mounted on top of the IFF antenna, which in
turn is mounted on top of the array assembly. The SLR antenna is a
solid-state stripline device designed to have an omnidirectional
receive pattern; that is, a gain of 0 dB in all directions.
1 The SLR receiver channel can provide a reference to

which energy from the main antenna can be compared. The similarity
of signal strength initiates a rejection process (sidelobe blanking)
prior to the plan position indicator (PPI) display. Sidelobe
blanking (SLB) circuits will be discussed further as part of the
theory of operation of receivers in the unit signal processor. The
relative receive pattern between the main antenna and the SLR antenna
is not critical; therefore, no adjustments are necessary to the
antenna group.
5-5
2 The SLR antenna has a broader bandwidth than the main
antenna. A filter mounted inside the SLR antenna assembly limits the
bandwidth of side lobe RF being sent to the beam forming network
enclosure assembly. The output signal of the SLR antenna is applied
to a low-noise amplifier (LNA) which establishes the noise figure.
The LNA output is applied to a circuit composed of an RF amplifier, a
mixer, and an IF amplifier. The mixer accepts an input from the
stable local oscillator (STALO) along with the amplified RF input to
produce a 32-MHz IF signal which is subsequently amplified by the IF
amplifier.
5-4. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. In the following paragraphs, each of

the major electrical/electronic subsystems of the antenna group is
discussed. Each description is referenced to a functional signal
flow diagram that shows the various features of interest in suffi-
cient detail to support organizational level operation and mainte-
nance activities. On the functional diagrams, electronic assemblies
although discussed in greater detail in section II of this chapter,
are generally shown only as simple blocks.
a. Rotation and Direction Monitoring. The antenna drive and

direction monitoring circuits are shown in simplified form in FO-3.
Refer to that diagram during the following discussion. The antenna
drive and direction monitoring components are comprised of the
antenna drive assembly A2, encoder AI, and synchros Bl and B2.
b. Level Monitoring. The level monitoring circuits are shown in

FO-3. Refer to that diagram during the following discussion.
(1) Introduction. The components associated with level monitor-

ing are vertical sensor A3, amplifier-demodulator AI, and sensor
resolver A3. Antenna tilt indicator lAlA5 is shown on the diagram
and described here; however, it is not a part of the antenna. These
components relate to the literal, physical movement of the antenna on
a horizontal axis (like a seesaw). Such movement alters the normal
elevation angle (causes the established vertical axis to tilt), and
must be compensated to prevent the height system from computing inac-
curate target altitudes. One type of tilt is intentional and
involves the leveling of the antenna at the time of installation. It
is sometimes called mechanical tilt, although all tilt is mechanical
in nature. Another type of tilt is any incidental deviation result-
ing from random disturbances such as wind, freezing earth (upheaval),
and ground faults.
(2) Intentional Mechanical Tilt. Wedge-shaped tilt plates allow

the level of the antenna to be mechanically changed (in 0.25-degree
increments) as much as 1.5 degrees negative or 3.0 degrees positive
from the horizontal. Such change will usually be made at the time of
site installation and will depend on the topography and purpose of a
particular site. At a mountaintop site with very little ground
clutter, the antenna could be tilted downward to improve low-level
surveillance. At a site surrounded by higher mountains, the antenna
can be tilted upward to reduce ground clutter. Regardless, mechani-
cal tilt is first set to zero. After the installation site is
5-6
prepared, the antenna is erected, accurately leveled to true horizon-
tal, and intentionally tilted using the mechanical adjustments
provided. This fixed tilt value is electronically supplied to the
height computer as a fixed reference.
(3) Dynamic Tilt Sensing. Incidental tilt is continuously

changing. The vertical sensor senses positive or negative pitch and
roll. pitch and roll in this case refers to the nonrotating pedes-
tal. If, for example, the pedestal had a constant pitch and/or roll
+1 degree due east, the elevation coverage pattern would be up 1
degree only when the rotating structure was also pointing due east.
When the antenna is rotating half way around (assuming the pedestal
does not change tilt), the elevation pattern would be pointing down
by 1 degree. As the antenna is rotating through north or south, the
elevation error would be 0 degrees. The sensor resolver and the
amplifier-demodulator translate those various interacting forces into
a single-error value for use by the height system.
(a) Vertical sensor A3, which is physically and rigidly

attached to the antenna pedestal, acts as an electrical generator,
whose output is a product of any deflection (tilt) of the antenna
from the normal vertical axis (horizontal plane) of rotation. The
sensor is mounted inside the fixed pedestal assembly, and is factory
calibrated (leveled). The sensor element is comprised of a single
primary coil and a multiple-tapped secondary. The upper secondary
winding is sensitive to pitch deviations and the lower secondary
winding is sensitive to roll deviations.
(b) The vertical sensor is excited by a 3-Vac rms signal from

transformer Tl in junction box A2, whose excitation is a single-
phase, 120-Vac, 400-Hz signal. As the antenna rotates, any deviation
from the level is noted by a voltage induced in the pitch axis or
roll axis or both. The amplitude of the signals is in direct propor-
tion to degree of tilt. These signals are taken from the vertical
sensor via Jl, pins E and B on cabling through the rotary joint box
to amplifiers Ul and U2 in the amplifier-demodulator. These high-
gain, stable amplifier outputs are applied to sensor resolver A3.
(c) The resolver has two stators and a four-element rotor.

The resolver inputs are applied to the stators, and the resolver
output is taken from the rotor. As such, it produces a voltage out-
put that is a vector quantity of the two inputs. This output, a
modulated tilt signal, is applied to the demodulator portion of the
amplifier-demodulator. The excitation for this circuit is a single-
phase, 56-Vac, 400-Hz signal applied to Jl, pins 1 and 14. This
excitation is derived from transformer Tl in the antenna tilt
indicator unit, which is excited by phase A of a three-phase input,
the same as the origin of excitation for the vertical sensor. The
demodulator removes the ac component from the signal and outputs the
demodulated tilt signal at Jl, pin 4, the demodulated tilt signal is
needed to compensate for any deviation from the level of the antenna
as it rotates. Note the number of test points within the amplifier
demodulator which are quite useful when testing or troubleshooting.
5-7
A detailed description of the amplifier-demodulator, including
waveforms, is included in section II of this chapter.
(4) Antenna Tilt Indicator lAlA5. The antenna tilt indicator,

though operational, is not applicable for this installation. The
demodulated tilt signal is sent from the amplifier-demodulator to the
antenna tilt indicator (lAIA5) on the power distribution panel where
it is divided onto a pair of error voltage outputs. One error
voltage output, a 600-mV per-degree tilt signal, is taken from R7 and
sent to the receiver for use in height computation. The other error
voltage output is sent through R6 to ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR (Ml),
which displays antenna tilt in angular degrees. Ml is a meter-relay.
When the antenna tilt exceeds the established limits of ±0.6 degree,
the meter pointer acts as a switch contact, providing a path to
energize K2. Relay K2 energizes and applies voltage to alarm
indicators DSI and DS2, and to the alarm timer, which consists of Ql,
CRl, a charging capacitor, and assorted resistors. The TILT ALARM
LAMP (DSl) lights, and the audible alarm (DS2) sounds if Sl is
closed. The alarm timing circuit causes DSI and DS2 to cycle off and
on. The alarm circuits can be set to operate at a value other than
0.6 degree of antenna tilt by adjusting the actuating contacts on MI.
The setting of each actuator (red indicator) is a screwdriver
adjustment on the face of MI.
(a) Alarm Timing Circuit. When K2 energizes due to excessive

tilt, voltage is sent to the alarm timing circuit. Current then
flows through the charging capacitor. When the voltage across it
reaches the firing potential of uni-junction Ql, the uni-junction
conducts heavily, creating a voltage drop across its load. The
voltage drop turns on CRl, allowing Kl to energize. In the meantime,
Cl is discharging through Ql. Relay Kl energizes and opens the
contacts in series with K2 and turns off the alarms. Relay K2 does
not deenergize instantly as capacitors (not shown) act as short-term
batteries, keeping K2 energized for a few hundred milliseconds. When
K2 deenergizes, it breaks the voltage path to the alarm timing
circuit, including relay Kl. With K2 deenergized, the voltage can
again reach K2. The alarms will turn on, and the timing cycle will
begin again. The result will be that the alarm lamp flashes off and
on (during the period of excess antenna tilt) and the solid state
transducer (DS2) emits a beeping sound.
(b) Alignment Information. The alignment procedure for the

level monitoring circuits is found in chapter 7. The controls Rl,
R6, and R7, are described there. However, the following information
should be helpful. On antenna tilt indicator lAlA5, Rl is tied
between + and -15 volts dc. Its variable arm is used to zero (with
power on) the ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR (Ml), when the antenna is
perfectly level. That balance adjustment (Rl) is made, however,
after the meter has been zeroed (with power off) using the mechanical
zero adjustment screw on the face of the meter. After balancing, the
amount of meter deflection is calibrated by R6. Likewise, the
amplitude of the tilt signal to the receiver is calibrated by R7,
which is adjusted so as to produce 600 mVdc (at TP7) for 1 degree (+
or -) of antenna tilt.
5-8
c. Radar Transmission. The radar transmission circuits are shown
in simplified form in functional diagram FO-4. Refer to that diagram
during the following discussion.
(1) Introduction. The transmit RF signal processing circuit

consists of the components shown in FO-IS.
(2) Antenna General Information. The antenna is a planar-phased

array composed of 36 edge-slotted waveguide elements, also referred
to as sticks. Each element has 98 slots and is 18 feet long. The
complete 36-element array is 11 feet wide; however, only 22 elements
are used for transmitting.
(a) Microwave energy is transmitted and received via the slots

in the elements, which are approximately 1/2 wavelength apart both
horizontally, slot-to-slot on an individual stick, and vertically,
slot-to-slot on adjacent sticks, and with adjacent slots cut in
opposing directions. This configuration causes the transmit beam
patterns to be a function of the phase relation between signals at
adjacent slots, and this characteristic causes the antenna to be
directional. Since the antenna's directivity depends upon the phase
relation of energy at adjacent slots, the particular direction of the
radiated beam is also a function of frequency. The antenna is
electronically scanned by varying the frequency of the transmitted
signal and is also mechanically scanned in azimuth as the antenna
rotates.
(b) Multiple beams are used for determining elevation, the

same as for a reflector antenna. The advantage of this antenna over
a reflector antenna (used in otner radar sets)is that a phased array
has substantially lower sidelobes and provides a more sharply defined
main beam, both for transmitting and receiving. The antenna beam
direction is a function of frequency. Over the full range of trans-
mission frequencies, the beam direction will vary approximately seven
degrees in azimuth and one degree in elevation. This variation in
beam direction is referred to as squint, and seriously degrades the
search function of the radar unless it is compensated for.
(3) Transmit Path. The high power transmit pulse leaves the
radar shelter and travels to the radar antenna assembly via flexible
and rigid waveguide. Various lengths of waveguide are provided to
vary the distance between the shelter and radar antenna assembly.
(a) Shelter to Antenna Waveguide. Three pieces of waveguide

(W4, WS, and W7) are required for any installation. Waveguide W7 is
rigid and oddly shaped. One end of W7 mates with the waveguide
flange on the outside of the pedestal assembly, SlAIAll. The other
end of W7 extends to the outer edge of the antenna. A 3.S-foot piece
of flexible waveguide (WS) connects to W7. Another 3.S-foot piece of
flexible waveguide (W4) connects to the waveguide flange on the
outside of the radar shelter. All pieces of waveguide are manufac-
tured so as to bolt together. One of the mating faces at each union
includes an RF choke cavity. As shown in FO-14, additional waveguide
elements (WI, W2, W3, and W6) may be inserted between W4 and WS to
S-9
increase the separation between shelter and pallet. The additional
waveguide elements may be inserted in any order and in any
combination.
(b) Stationary-to-Rotating Transition. The pedestal assembly

(frequently called the bell housing because of its peculiar shape)
contains the bullgear, the main bearing, the rotary joint, and
certain other electrical and mechanical devices such as cables and
sensors. The bullgear, driven by the antenna drive motor, causes the
antenna to rotate. The main (or thrust) bearing provides the
mechanical connection while the rotary joint permits electrical
connection between stationary and rotating portions of the antenna.
(c) Rotary Joint. The primary connection in the rotary joint

is for the transmitter RF output. The transmit pulse is brought into
the pedestal assembly from W7 through a section of rigid waveguide
(PN 337D780GOl), a short piece of stationary waveguide near the
bottom of the high power section of the rotary joint, which then
couples the transmit pulse to a rotating vertical coaxial member. The
stationary waveguide is impedance-matched to the vertical coaxial
member by a device which looks like a doorknob. Impedance matching
doorknobs are located at both the bottom and the top of the high
power (vertical coaxial) section of the rotary joint assembly. The
center coaxial member (inner conductor) has a rotary sliding joint.
The outer coaxial member (outer conductor) has a choke joint. The
vertical coaxial members pass upward through the center of the
slipring and S-band sections of the rotary joint. The upper doorknob
matches the coaxial line to the upper waveguide by which the transmit
pulse leaves the rotary joint. From there the energy flows into more
waveguide beneath the rotating platform of the antenna. This
waveguide is a short curved section (PN 336D901HOl) and waveguide
assembly W66. Then the RF energy is sent to the transmit manifold
via a flexible section of waveguide (PN ID1965HOl).
(d) Transmit Manifold. The transmit manifold is a dual-

manifold assembly designed to carry high power levels, and estab-
lishes the proper phase and amplitude of each of the 22 signals so
that the resultant transmit beam formed by the radiators has a
modified cosecant-squared pattern. The transmit manifold distributes
the transmit energy to the array via waveguide sections, phasing U-
caps, and circulators (see FO-15). The 22 identical ferrite circu-
lators receive energy from the transmit manifold and direct it to
sticks 9 through 30. The circulators perform a second function by
directing incoming target pulses to 18 x 18 matrices via the receiver
protectors. The circulators are symetrical three-port junction
devices; that is, the ports are spaced 120 degrees apart. A
permanent magnetic field permeates the ferrite material of each
circl .ator, causing RF energy to travel in a circulator direction
with_~ the circulator. The direction of rotation is counterclockwise
(see figure 5-2). Transmit energy, entering the upper right-hand
port, is forced to the left, where it escapes into the radiators.
Target echoes, entering the same port from the radiators, are forced
out of the bottom port to the receiver.
5-10
I-
I
TARGET ECHO
TO RECEIVER
7647-BF-506A
Figure 5-2. Waveguide Circulator Flow Diagram
(e) Radiators. Each of the 22 radiators, or sticks, is an

18-foot section of waveguide with small slots cut into the edge
(narrow wall) every. half-wavelength. The slots are cut at an angle
with adjacent slots at opposing angles. Cutting the slots with
alternate tilts causes phase reversal between slots which cancels the
180 degree phase shift caused by the half-wavelength spacing and pro-
duces an in-phase radiation pattern. The in-phase radiation pattern
forms a beam with specific direction, which determines the direction
in which the radiator will transmit and receive radiation. The 22
radiators are placed side-by-side in the same plane and with the
slots all in the same plane. They are arranged so that slots on
adjacent radiators are tilted in opposite directions with the spacing
between radiators constant. The resulting radiation pattern has an
elevation direction determined by the radiation phase relationship
between adjacent slots (on adjacent radiators).
d. Radar Reception. The radar reception circuits are shown in

simplified form in functional diagram FO-5. Refer to that diagram
during the following discussion.
5-11
(1) Introduction. The receive RF signal processing circuit
consists of the following components:
Item Qiy
Slotted waveguide elements 36
Circulators 22
2:1 Combiners 11
Low-noise amplifiers 12
18 x 18 matrices 2
11 x 6 matrix 1
Test monitor signal coupler 1
RF receivers 7
STALO power divider 1
(2) Antenna General Information. The antenna is a planar-

phased array of 36 edge-slotted waveguide elements, also referred to
as sticks. All 36 elements are used for reception. Each element has
98 slots and is 18 feet long. The complete 36-element array is 11
feet wide. Microwave energy is received via the slots in the
elements, which are approximately 1/2 wavelength apart both horizon-
tally, slot-to-slot on an individual stick, and vertically, slot-to-
slot on adjacent sticks, and with adjacent slots cut in opposing
directions. This configuration causes the transmit beam patterns to
be a function of the phase relation between signals at adjacent
slots, and this characteristic causes the antenna to be directional.
Multiple beams, which are referred to as sin x/x beams, are used to
determine elevation. The advantage of this antenna used in this
radar set over a reflector antenna (used in other radar sets) is that
a phased array has substantially lower sidelobes and provides a more
sharply defined main beam for reception. When receiving, the 36
individual waveguides are combined in two steps in the matrix
combiner assembly to form the six simultaneous receive beams. These
beams provide overlapping elevation coverage from the horizon to 20
degrees each with the same low azimuth sidelobes. Each of these six
simultaneous beams has a receiver for search detection and height
finding. After beam forming, the RF signal in each beam is amplified
and converted to the IF of 32 MHz. These six channels of data pass
through IF rotary couplers to coaxial cables connecting to the IF
receiver assembly in the shelter.
(3) Receive Overall Description. Refer to FO-16 during the

following discussion. Since the radar set is designed to gather
height data as well as range and azimuth data, the transmit and
receive patterns are not identical. The antenna contains 36
vertically-stacked, slotted waveguide elements of which 22 are used
to produce the transmit beam.
(a) These 22 slotted waveguide elements are fed in proper

phase and amplitude to form a modified cosecant-squared transmit beam
pattern. This beam pattern provides a radar range of 240 miles with
5-12
height coverage over 100,000 feet. The receiver, however, is
designed to look at beam returns as symmetrical and disregards the
limitation imposed by the modified cosecant-squared beam pattern on
height. Target return pulses are received by the antenna's 36
vertically-stacked slotted waveguide elements to form 36 receive
channels. The 14 receive channels not common to the transmit path
connect two 18 x 18 matrices via coaxial cables. The other 22
receive channels are directed by 22 ferrite circulators to 22
receiver protectors used to prevent damage to the matrices and
subsequent stages of the receiver due to the power leakage and
reflected antenna power.
(b) The receiver protectors connect to the two 18 x 18

matrices. The matrices are 18 x 18 stripline couplers connected in
parallel; and perform the first step in forming the elevation beams.
The signals from the sticks are connected to the matrices in such a
fashion that every second stick is connected to the same matrix. The
resultant output signals from the matrices are such that the signals
from corresponding ports on both matrices represent adjacent beams
(in elevation) from the 36 element array. Each of these sets of
signals is applied to a 2:1 combiner to form one signal representing
a single beam that is wider in elevation. The upper and lower
signals from each matrix are not used, so 11 sets of signals are
applied to 2:1 combiners. The 11 outputs from the 2:1 combiners each
represents signals received from a different elevation. Each output
is applied to a separate low noise amplifier, and then to the 11:6
beam-forming matrix. The beam-forming matrix subdivides and
recombines the 11 signals in such a way that six beams of varying
elevations and elevation width are formed. The six beam outputs from
the 11:6 beam-forming matrix and one from omnidirectional sidelobe
reference antenna are applied to the monitor signal coupler.
(c) An RF monitor pulse from the frequency generator is

applied to the monitor signal coupler. The phase-coded RF monitor
pulse is generated and coupler-injected equally into each of the
seven signal paths. This permits the receiver to establish a gain-
reference-level for adjacent channel pairs which might differ from
one pulse repetition time (PRT) to another due to the difference in
operating frequency. The seven beam outputs from the monitor signal
coupler are applied to seven low noise amplifiers, which are used to
limit the noise levels in the receiver signals to the upper bands
only. The STALO input from the frequency generator is fed to the
image reject mixer via STALO power divider, which divides the STALO
energy into eight equal parts. The image rejection mixer is a
microwave balanced mixer and performs superhetrodyne conversion by
beating the target return signals with the STALO frequency to obtain
the 32-MHz IF phase-coded signal. The seven channel 32-MHz phase-
coded IF target from the image rejection mixers is coupled through
sliprings in the rotary joint to the six height IF receivers and the
sidelobe receiver. STALO energy reaches the receivers on semirigid
coaxial cable from the lower S-band assembly of the rotary joint.
The RF monitor pulse arrives via the upper S-band assembly. Single-
phase, 400-Hz power for the RF receivers is supplied through the
slipring section of the rotary joint.
5-13
(4) Receive Path. Radar energy reflected from a target is
received by all 36 sticks in the array assembly and routed to the 18
x 18 matrix assemblies. Each array signal represents a different
elevation beam. The signal from sticks 9 through 30 pass through a
circulator and a receiver protector before being applied to the 18 x
18 matrices.
(a) Circulators. The circulators connect the transmit and

receive paths to the antenna and prevent transmit energy from
entering the receive path. The receiver protectors short out any RF
energy above a certain level that might enter the receive path in the
event of a circulator failure. The receiver protectors also provide
a waveguide-to-coaxial-cable transition. Signals from the remaining
sticks pass only through waveguide-to-coaxial-cable transition
couplers before being applied to the matrices.
(b) Receiver Protectors. Twenty-two receiver protectors are

in the antenna to protect the receiving system from high levels of RF
caused by circulator failure. Each protector contains an RF spark
gap inside a gas-filled cavity. The gas ionizes at a set level of RF
energy, creating an RF short that blocks RF energy to the receiver.
The gas is maintained near the ionization threshold by a radioactive
igniter so no keep-alive voltage is necessary. The receiver
protector is classified as a radioactive unit. However, it imposes
no radiation hazard during normal routine maintenance provided the
protector case is left intact. Under no circumstances should the
unit be disassembled. The receiver protectors will function with or
without radar primary power on. Leakage power to the 18 x 18
matrices is limited by each protector to an average of 0.4 watts per
channel. Each protector assembly also provides a waveguide-to-
coaxial transition having an insertion loss of 0.4 dB. Target echoes
are normally far below the firing threshold and pass through the
protectors unaffected except for insertion loss.
(c) 18 X 18 Matrix. Two 18 x 18 matrices (figures 5-3 and

5-4) perform the first step in forming the receive beams. Each
matrix is a passive low-loss RF network that uses 3-dB directional
couplers, or hybrid junctions, along with fixed phase shifters to
form 18 contiguous beams from the signals fed to it by 36 sticks.
The receive signal from each odd-numbered stick is applied to an
input port of matrix A12. Likewise, the receive signal form each
even-numbered stick is applied to an input port of matrix A13. A
matrix has the property that a signal introduced aL one input port
will be equally divided in power among all 18 output ports, but phase
differences will exist among the 18 output signals. The amount of
phase difference is determined by the amounts of phase shift
introduced by the fixed phase shifters and directional couplers
within the matrix. The signal from each output port thus represents
a summation of signal components from each input port. Signal phasing
is such that 18 independent receive beams are generated, each for a
difference elevation angle. Each of these sets of signals is applied
to a 2:1 combiner to form one signal representing a single beam that
is wider in elevation.
5-14
INPUT PORT
NUMBERS
,
r.J ....
'"
MA.TRlX
,,
,,,
,,,
,,,
I ,,
I
I
I
I
---'
NOTE:
."
*THESE COUPLERS -4.77 dB
ALL OTHERS - 3.01 dB
" . 7 12 3 9 Ie 15 tI t4 5 17
•" 2 ~ BEAM NUMBERS 7647·BF·S07B
Figure 5-3. 18 X 18 Matrix Schematic Diagram
5-15
OUTPUT
I 2
3 9 9 240. LONGER THAN

0,L
------+I------il------l
I :
I
L____ ,
I r-pORTI FROM@
II I
SHIFFMAN~_f------I
Ii! SHIFTER ______ ~iol. _ - - - - 30. LONGER THAN
PORT I FROM@
L _____ ~ r
I I
~---- ---~---@
I I
I I
II -3.01 dB I
I I
I I
II I
f---- - - - ,
8-------I-_-J__,--0 L________~'"_"''' "

-4.77d B OTHER LAYER
-3.01 dB
PORT TO PORT 0
o
-120· ~.
INPUT
7647-BF-50BA
Figure 5-4. 3 x 3 Matrix Schematic Diagram
5-16
(d) 2:1 Combiners. The 11 2:1 combiners receive two sets of
18 signals each from the two 18 x 18 matrices and combine them to
form one set of 11 signals. The connections between the matrices and
the combiners are such that corresponding ports from both matrices
are connected to the same combiner. Each of the combiners forms one
of 11 beams used to form the final six receive beams. The 11 outputs
from the 2:1 combiners each represent signals received from a
different elevation. They are each applied to a separate low noise
amplifier (LNA), and then to the 11:6 beam-forming matrix. The beam-
forming matrix subdivides and recombines the 11 signals in such a way
that six beams of varying elevation and elevation width are formed.
The 2:1 combiners are unique in that each must be in its designed
place. They are not interchangeable.
(e) Low Noise Amplifier. The output of each 2:1 combiner

assembly is applied to one of 11 LNAs which provide a gain of
approximately 22 dB. The amplifier signal output from each LNA is
applied to the 11:6 beam-forming matrix. Each LNA also accepts a
built-in-test RF signal input from the antenna BITE circuits. This
signal is coupled into the input, and the amplified signal is coupled
from the amplifier output to the monitor control board for testing
the operation of the amplifier.
(f) 11:6 Beam Forming Matrix. This is a stripline coupler

array that forms six receive beams from 11 inputs from the 2:1
combiners. Directional couplers within the matrix subdivide and
recombine RF energy from 11 inputs to form six beams of varying
elevation angle and width. The six beams are routed through the
monitor signal injector and applied to the RF receivers.
(g) Monitor Signal Injector. This is a stripline device that

receives the six output beam signals from the beam forming matrix,
and the sidelobe reference signal. An eighth signal, the RF monitor
pulse, is received from the frequency generator during system monitor
time. It is that eighth input which gives the monitor signal
injector its name. During receiver monitor time, a controlled-
amplitude RF test target (the RF monitor pulse) is injected equally
into the seven channels (six elevation-related beams and one sidelobe
path) of the radar receiver. That test target travels through the RF
receivers to the IF receiver area in the shelter. The injection and
utilization of the RF monitor pulse is not operator initiated. It is
a built-in, self-monitoring action which occurs during each PRT.
Another test, the operator initiated (MDS) test, also enters through
the signal injector. -In that case, a variable-amplitude, operator-
controlled RF pulse is sent to the signal injector on the same cable
as the RF monitor pulse. The MDS test pulse is applied only during
off-line testing.
(h) STALO Power Divider. The STALO power divider is a

passive device which subdivides the single STALO input into eight
equalamplitude outputs. Because there are only seven mixers (one in
each RF receiver), the eighth output port is terminated. The other
seven outputs are applied to the mixers in each of the RF receivers.
5-17
(~)~RF Receiver. The seven RF receivers are identical and
interchangeable modules. As shown on the block diagram (figure 5-5)
each module consists of an input miniature circulator, three high-
frequency amplifiers, and an image-reject mixer. Despite the label
ATl, the circulator should be considered as a directional isolator,
not an input attenuator. The RF receivers contain RF amplifiers,
mixers, and IF amplifiers. Amplified target returns are mixed with a
high-frequency clockwise signal from the STALO power divider. The
STALO power divider receives its input from frequency generator (unit
2) in the shelter. The STALO signal is always exactly 32 MHz above
the frequency of the preceding transmit pulse. Since the same
frequency generator is responsible for producing the transmit
frequency, it is exactly correlated with a similar change in STALO.
The mixing of STALO and echo produces a 32-MHz target pulse at the
output of the RF receivers. Other frequency components of the mixing
action are blocked by circuits prior to the output from each RF
receiver. The energy from the six receive channels and one sidelobe
reference channel is coupled out of the beam forming network
enclosure into the seven RF receivers and onto seven coaxial
conductors, which carry the IF signals to the slipring section of the
rotary joint. Upon leaving the rotary joint, the IF signals are then
carried by a short cable assembly to J5 on the side of the pedestal.
From there they are carried by cable WIO to the shelter (J32).
e. IFF Transmission/Reception. The IFF system transmits and
receives the IFF signals. The IFF/SIF antf na assembly includes an
AS-4007/T main antenna A5, an AS-400B/T bacKfill radiator A6, and a
hybrid duplexer assembly Al (see FO-l, sheet 3). The electronic
switch, although not a part of the IFF antenna, is described here.
The IFF transmission/reception diagram is shown in FO-6.
STALOINPUT
J3
r----------------------,
I I
I I
I I
I I
An I RF AMP I I-F OUTPUT
RF INPUT I I
I n
J1 >---( LIM
I
I
AMP I
MIXER
I
I I
L-- - - -- -J~! -P~W;R -- - - - - - ___ J

Figure 5-5. RF Amplifier Block Diagram
5-lB
(1) General. The radiating structure is quite visible, being
the short, wide fixture mounted on top of the main antenna. The
duplexer is the small assembly mounted behind the radiating struc-
ture. The radiating structure (containing many dipole radiators
protectively covered) has a dual-shaped radiation pattern. Depending
upon the port (jack) through which a transmit pulse enters the
antenna, the device can radiate in narrow beam or broad fan. The two
patterns are shown in figure 5-1. The electronic switch is mounted
on the antenna structure (see figure 7-50).
(2) Transmit Path. The IFF system transmits three interrogate

pulses (PI, P2, and P3) every PRT. These signals are routed to the
electronic switch via J6 of the pedestal, Jl of the rotary joint,
through the sliprings, out of the rotary joint via J9/P9, and through
cable WI061 to J3 of the electronic switch. The PI and P3 pulses are
routed out Jl of the electronic switch to the duplexer via cable
WI091 (this is the sum channel). The P2 pulse leaves the electronic
switch at J2 (difference channel) and is routed to the duplexer via
cable WI092. The three transmit pulses travel between the radar
shelter and electronic switch on the same coaxial path. The
electronic switch consists of an RF switch, an RF filter, and a
diplexer, all integrated into a common stripline package.
(a) In operation, the diplexer receives the incoming signals

and separates the RF signals from the pulsed video switching signals.
When the incoming signal is a sum, or positive pulse, it causes the
RF energy to be propagated to the sum port of the electronic switch.
When the incoming signal is a difference or negative pulse, it causes
the RF energy to be propagated to the difference port.
(b) An RF low-pass filter with an operating frequency above

1120 MHz is located at each port to filter and couple the signal to
the hybrid duplexer of the antenna assembly. Switching between sum
and difference modes is performed by pin diodes in the electronic
switch. Switching voltage (sometimes referred to as video and dc
bias) is normally a dc level of 1.5 volts which arrives on the same
cable as the interrogate pulses. RF is routed along the sum path
(during PI, P3, and receive time) by that 1.5 Vdc. However, a -80
volt, l-usec control pulse arriving at the input to the electronic
switch causes the P2 RF pulse to take the difference cable to the
duplexer. This duplexer can alternately light each of the two linear
arrays of the antenna in either an in-phase (sum) or out-of-phase
(difference) relationship, depending upon the mode of operation
selected by the incoming signal.
(c) The hybrid duplexer applies signals to the two antenna

halves of the IFF antenna. The duplexer has two input ports, Jl and
J2, and has two outputs, PI and P2, which are either in-phase or 180
degrees out-of-phase. On initiation of the sum mode, each of the two
linear arrays are lit in-phase, thus forming a beam pattern having
low sidelobes. Initiation of the difference mode causes the two
linear arrays to be lit out-of-phase. In this difference mode, a
portion of the input signal to the duplexer is also coupled via J3
through cable W301 to Jl of the backfill radiator. The backfill
5-19
radiator is a single dipole mounted on the support for the reflector
at the back of the IFF antenna, and is necessary to round out the
back of the difference pattern. The difference beam pattern thus
covers most of the sum pattern except in the back lobe null area,
which is covered by the backfill radiator pattern.
(3) Receive Path. The receive path is the sum path only.
Section II. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
5-5. GENERAL. This section contains circuit descriptions of some of

the electronic assemblies of the equipment.
5-6. ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS. In the following paragraphs,

each electronic assembly is discussed. Assemblies generally not con-
sidered repairable, or assemblies considered simple enough to have
been adequately covered by the functional description in section I of
this chapter are not discussed further here. The items in this
category are:
Assembly Ref Des
RF receiver A3Al-7
Low-noise amplifier A3A8 through A7Al-ll
S-band RF amplifier A3AIOA3
Electronic switch
Separate manuals have been provided for the two power supply
assemblies. For descriptions of these assemblies, refer to the
manuals listed in table 1-5. The power supplies in question are:
Assembly Ref Des
+15 volt power supply A2Al-2
+12 volt power supply A3A9
a. Amplifier-Demodulator AIAIIAIA4A2Al. Figure FO-7 is a sche-

matic diagram of the amplifier demodulator assembly. Refer to that
diagram during the following discussion.
(1) Introduction. Incidental deviation of the antenna struc

ture causes an imbalance in vertical sensor A3, which results in a
single output or two outputs .to the amplifier-demodulator. The
output (pitch or roll or both) is a 400-Hz signal whose amplitude is
proportional to tilt (unbalance). The pitch input is applied to pin
18 and the roll input is applied to pin 20.
(2) Pitch Processing. The pitch signal is processed by opera-

tional amplifier Ul. Operational am~iifier Ul consists of Ul, input-
resistors Rl and R3, filter capacitors C3 and C4, and parallel-
connected, feedback network Cl and R2. Ul is a high-gain, frequency-
compensated, operational amplifier (see figure 8-15). Input resis-
tors Rl and R3 are selected to provide the proper gain for Ul.
5-20
Filter capacitors C3 and C4 smooth the +lS vdc and the -IS Vdc inputs
at pins 23 and 22, respectively. Feedback network Cl and R2 provides
a smooth transition of output signal to input signal for stable
operation. The amplified pitch signal is supplied to sensor resolver
A4A3 by way of pin 19.
(3) Roll Processing. The roll signal is processed by opera-

tional amplifier U2. Operational amplifier U2 consists of U2, input
resistors RS and R6, filter capacitors CS and C6, and parallel-
connected, feedback network C2 and R4. U2 is a high-gain, frequency-
compensated, operational amplifier (see figure 8-lS). Input resis-
tors RS and R6 are selected to provide the proper gain for U2.
Filter capacitors CS and C6 smooth the +lS Vdc and the -IS Vdc inputs
at pins 23 and 22, respectively. Feedback network C2 and R4 provides
a smooth transition of output signal to input signal for stable
operation. The amplified pitch signal is supplied to sensor resolver
A4A3 by way of pin 21.
(4) Resolver Action on Pitch and Roll Signals. Sensor resolver

A4A3 is not part of the amplifier-demodulator; however, the pitch and
roll signals are acted upon by the sensor resolver. Therefore, a
brief explanation is presented. The resolver is part of the data
drive gear train; its rotor rotates at the same rate as (and in a
constant relative position to) the antenna. The two stators are
electrically 90 degrees apart (at right angles to one another), as
are true pitch and roll. Rotor RI-R2 is aligned in the same vertical
plane as the antenna radiation beam. Therefore, the output voltage
is the vector product of the sensor pitch and roll components rela-
tive to the instantaneous position of the radiation beam. The
amplified outputs of Ul and U2 are connected to stators in sensor
resolver A3. The output of the resolver is a varying amplitude 400-
Hz carrier signal, whose amplitude is modulated by the sensor pitch
or roll. The amplitude is then remodified by the resolver position.
The tilt signal (the voltage between Rl and R2) is returned to U3 in
the amplifier-demodulator by way of pin 2.
(S) Demodulator. The demodulator removes the 400-Hz carrier

from the tilt signal. The result is a varying dc whose amplitude and
polarity represents the amount and direction (respectively) of
antenna tilt. The demodulator portion of the amplifier-demodulator
consists of operational amplifier U3, input resistors R8 and RIS
through R17, filter capacitors C7 and C8, parallel-connected,
feedback network CRl, CR2, and R7, along with Ql, Q2, a bridge
circuit consisting of CRS through CR8, biasing resistors R9 through
R12, zener diodes CR3 and CR4, and voltage reference resistors R13
and R14.
(a) U3 is a unity-gain, frequency-compensated operational

amplifier (see figure 8-lS). Input resistors R8 and RIS through R17
are selected to provide the proper gain for U3. Filter capacitors C7
and C8 smooth the +lS Vdc and -IS Vdc inputs at pins 23 and 22,
respectively. Feedback network CRl, CR2, and R7 acts as a limiter
circuit (back-to-back, 10-volt zeners).
S-21
(b) Two 28-volt rms, 400-Hz reference signals control the
conduction of Ql and Q2. The two signals are of opposite phase (180
degrees apart). During the positive half cycle of the 400-Hz refer-
ence into pin 14 of AI, diode CR8 is reversed biased, while CR6 is
forward biased. With CR6 forward biased, the base of Q2 is tied
(through Rll and CR6) to the positive voltage on the cathode of CR4.
(CR4 is a zener rated at 5.1 Vdc.) That will turn off Q2, allowing
the resolver signal (TP5) to enter pin 3 of U3. At the same time,
the inverted 400-Hz reference on pin 1 of Al is backward biasing CR5
and forward biasing CR7. That will tie the base of Ql to the
negative voltage on the anode of CR3. Ql will conduct heavily and
short-out or inhibit any resolver signal from entering pin 2 of U3.
Pin 3 is the noninverting input to U3.
(c) The signal at TP4, in the example just given, will be the
same as the first half-cycle of the resolver tilt signal at TP5. As
the 400-Hz tilt signal carrier from the resolver changes to the next
half-cycle, the 400-Hz reference signals on pins 1 and 14 also change
phase. Q2 is turned off, enabling the resolver tilt signal (TP5) to
be inverted (input pin 2 of U3) by U3. All of the preceding actions
will result in the output signal at TP4 being a full-wave rectified
version of the input tilt signal at TP5. (Example waveforms are given
in figure 5-6.) The demodulated tilt signal is sent from the
amplifier-demodulator to the antenna tilt indicator circuit lA7A5 on
the power distribution panel by way of pin 4.
b. Monitor and Control A3All. Refer to FO-8, schematic diagram of

the monitor and control board, during the following discussion.
(1) Introduction. The monitor and control board monitors and

sends feedback data on the status of the on-line and off-line power
supplies, the pass/fail status of the four receiver protector groups,
the load/unload status of the first-in-first-out (FIFO) memories, and
the pass/fail status of the parity check. Serial data from the sig-
nal processor is transmitted on 75-ohm coaxial cable to differential
line driver Ul. This line is half duplex shared with the monitor
status word sent from the monitor and control board by line driver
U2. A second 75-ohm coaxial line carries the execute signal to line
receiver U28. This is an active signal that controls the timing of
all tests and initiates transmission of the data response word. The
execute signal is a pulse of 2 usec in duration. All signals are
non-return to zero with +5V = 1 definea as the inactive state and -5V
= 0 defined as the active state. The following data is significant:
Loading of commands is accomplished upon receipt of an execute
pulse for each word loaded into the monitor and control board.
For each word loaded, a corresponding execute pulse must be sent
to unload the command.
The first word loaded will be the first word unloaded and the
first test to be performed.
When the last word is unloaded, the monitor and control board
will return to the load state and can accept new commands.
5-22
56VRMS
(BOPK)
400HZ
REF 0
PIN I
+5V
(REF)
01
0
BASE
TP6
-5V
(REF)
+5V
(REF)
02 0
BASE
-5V
(REF)
RESOLVER
R2
TP5
01
EMITTER
02
EMITTER
TP4(OUTPUT
OF 01 a '02)
7647-BF - Sl08
Figure 5-6. Amplifier-Demodulator Waveforms
5-23
(a) Command Word. The 8-bit command word is defined in
table 5-1. Bits A through E are used to control low noise amplifi-
ers. Bit F is used to control the receiver protector test. Bit G
(when it is a 1) signifies the last word to be loaded in a sequence
after which no additional words can be loaded. Bit H is the master
reset that resets the monitor and control board to initi.al loading
conditions. This bit must be a 0 when loading or unloading commands.
Table 5-1. 8-Bit Command Word
Code Bit
H G F E D C B A
Master Receiver
Reset Protector
Bit Last Word Test LNA switching
0= Normal 0 = Normal 0= Disabled The 1 and the 0 is a function

of a unique PROM address
1= Reset 1= Last 1= Test
word enabled
(b) Response Word. The 8-bit response word is defined in

table 5-2. Bits A and B indicate the status of the on-line power
supply (PSI) and the off-line power supply (PS2). Bits C through F
indicate the status of the four receiver protector groups: bit C for
group 1, bit D for group 2, bit E for group 3, and bit F for group 4.
Bit G indicates whether the FIFO is loading or unloading. Bit H
indicates the pass/fail status of the parity check.
Table 5-2. 8-Bit Response Word
Code Bit
H G F E D C B A
FIFO
Parity Infor- Receiver Protection Power Supply
Check mation Monitor Status Monitor
0= Pass 0= FIFO 0= Pass 0= Pass

1= Fail Unloading 1= Fail 1= Fail
1= FIFO GP4 GP3 GP2 GPI PS2 PSI
A response word is transmitted each time an execute

pulse is sent; that is, every time command is loaded or
unloaded.
5-24
U23 -2 EXECUTE
U3-18 ORR
U3-23 TBRL
U3-24 TRE
U2-4 X-MIT EN
UI-4 RECEIVE EN
U3-25 TRO
U2-15~~~IALOATA 1------., WOR~'-O
7647-BF-51IB
Figure 5-7. UART U3 Transmit Timing Diagram
5-25
(c) Data Reception. Serial data from Ul is applied to the
heart of monitor and control board U3, a universal asynchronous
receiver transmitter (UART). The UART receives data serially on pin
20 and outputs data in parallel on pins 5 through 12. The timing
diagram for the UART is shown on figure 5-7. The UART receiver
converts serial data to 8-bit parallel data. The UART transmitter
converts parallel data into serial form and automatically adds start,
parity, and stop bits. The character format used is a start bit, 8
data bits, a parity bit that is always odd, and a stop bit. The data
rate is 9600 bits per second. No other character format is possible
as the UART control word is hardwired as follows:
1 Pin 38, CLSl, is a 1
2 Pin 37, CLS2, is a 1
3 Pin 35, PL, is a 0
i Pin 39, EPE, is a 0

~ Pin 36, SBS, is a 0
(d) Initialization. To ensure proper turn-on conditions, the

master reset bit is set and sent to the monitor and control board
enabling NAND gate U25B for the X signal passing through. The X
pulse then passes through U25B to the monostable U27B. The mono-
stable U27B sends a reset pulse to the UART, FIFO memories, J-K flip
flop, and the piP la "h. This reset places the board in the initial
load condition and loading in of data can start. This master reset
bit is also used if the processor and monitor control board get out
of synchronization on the load/unload cycle. The FIFO information
bit in the response word indicates to the processor whether the
system is out of synchronization. These are the only two times the
master reset bit is used, during initialization of the monitor board
and when the system is out of synchronization.
(2) General. The monitor and control board performs several

independent unrelated functions. For ease of explanation, they will
be explained functionally in terms of voltage regulation, develop-
ment, and monitoring; timing; receiver protection monitoring; and LNA
control.
(a) Voltage Regulation, Development, and Monitoring.
1 Voltage Regulation and Development. The voltage regulation

and development circuitry consists of U29, U30, and capacitors C41
through C44 (see FO-8, sheet 3.) The inputs, +12 Vdc and -12 Vdc,
are from ±12 Vdc regulated power supply A3A9 which is filtered by C44
and C43, respectively. Voltage regulator U29 provides a regulated +5
Vdc output that is filtered by C41. Voltage regulator U30 provides a
regulated -5 Vdc output that is filtered by C42.
5-26
~ Monitoring. The monitoring circuitry for the on-line and
off-line +lS-volt power supplies consists of VRl, VR2, resistors RS9
and R60, and inverters U23B and U23C (see FO-8, sheet 2). Each
voltage is monitored by tapping of these voltages and dropping it
through a 12-volt zener diode (VRI or VR2). The voltage is then
filtered (R60, C40 or RS9, and C39) and applied to inverter U23B or
U23C. When a power supply output is normal, a high is present at the
input to the inverter. The output will be a low, which signifies a
pass condition. When the supply voltage drops to 13 volts or below,
a zero will be present at the input of the inverter and cause a high
(failure) to be sent to the UART (U3) for transmission.
(b) Timing. The timing circuitry of the monitor and control

board is shown in FO-8, sheet 2. Under timing, the material is
presented in terms of general, communication errors, data
transmission, and execution of commands.
1 General. The UART detects the data start bit when the
serial input lines goes from high to low. The UART separates the
start and stop bits, clocks the data bits into a parallel-out
register, and checks the parity of the command word. Timing for the
UART is done by crystal clock oscillator U4. The speed of this clock
is lS3.6 kHz (see FO-17 for timing diagram of monitor and control
board). The command word comes out of the UART in parallel and is
applied to the inputs of FIFO memories U6 and U7. The data will be
clocked into the FIFO memories on the execute (X) pulse trailing edge
through AND gate U26A. A second input to this gate is from the UART
communications fault outputs. These outputs flag parity, framing,
and overrun errors (U3, pins 13, 14, and IS) that occur in the
command word sent by the processor. When any of these errors occur,
a high appears at the respective pin output and becomes a zero at the
output of NOR gate U24A. This disables U26A so that if a communi-
cation error exists, the corresponding command word cannot be clocked
into the FIFO.
~ Whenever an execute pulse is received by the monitor and

control board, the response word is sent back to the processor. The
processor then checks the response word for correct parity. If there
has been a communication error, the processor will find this and re-
read the same command word back to the monitor and control board.
When correct parity has been received, AND gate U26A will be enabled
and the data can be clocked into the FIFOs. The third input to U26A
is from flip-flop US, which functions as a controller for the FIFO.
When the Q output is high, U26A is enabled and words can be loaded
into the FIFO.
b A sequence of commands is sent by the processor and

loaded into the FIFO. The last word in the sequence is designated by
bit G in the command word being high. When this word appears on the
parallel output of the UART, the high from bit G will appear at pin 9
of NAND gate U2SC. The other input to U2SC (pin 10) will also be
high due to the low on Q- passing through NAND gate U2SA. These high
signals create a low on the J input and a high on the K input of
flip-flop US. The flip-flop is triggered on the negative edge of the
S-27
execute pulse and the flip-flop changes states with Q- going high
enabling AND gate U22B. When U26A is disabled (Q going low), no more
commands can be entered into the FIFO.
£ Note that the command word is entered into the FIFO on

the negative edge of the execute pulse and flip-flop U5 changes
states on the negative edge.
2 Communications Errors. Communications errors that occur

when the processor reads a word to the monitor and control board are
also monitored. Communications errors include parity, framing, and
overrun errors. These three signals are combined in NOR gate U24A to
form a single communication error. When any of these errors occur, a
high appears on the output of the corresponding pin of the UART.
Fault (high) signals will become a low once passed through U24A.
This low signal disables AND gate U26A so that the command word
cannot be loaded. Erroneous command words can then be read over as
previously described. The low from U24A also passes through hex
inverter U23D to become a high (failure) signal going to the UART for
transmission to the processor. with no communication errors, all
inputs to U24A are low putting a high signal input, low (pass) output
of inverter U23D. Note that this bit only has significance when the
processor has sent data and is irrelevant when the monitor and
control board is executing commands out of "the FIFO.
3 Data Transmission. The format for the response word sent

back tothe processor is shown in table 5-2. A timing diagram for a
one word load/unload cycle is shown in figure 5-8. Immediately after
every execute pulse, the monitor and control board sends the response
word to the processor. On the trailing edge of the execute pulse,
monostable U27A fires a low pulse (approximately 10 usec long) to the
UART transmit holding register load TBRL-. When TBRL- is low, data is
loaded for transmission on UART pins 26 through 33. After U27A times
out and TBRL goes high, 0 to 1 clock period later the transmit
enable, TRE goes low, and data trans-mission begins. As TRE goes
low, line receiver Ul is turned off and line driver U2 is enabled.
The UART then transmits the start bit, 8 data bits, parity (odd), and
stop bit. Halfway through the stop bit, TRE goes high disabling line
driver U2 and enabling line receiver Ul, thus ending data trans-
mission. The monitor and control board is now ready to accept a new
command (load) or execute signal (unload).
4 Execution of Commands. When U22B is enabled (Q- high),

both the-FIFO unloading clocks and the parallel latch U8 clock are
activated with the execute signal. The first word entered into the
FIFO will be present at its output, and will be passed through the
latch on the leading edge of the execute signal. On the trailing
edge of the execute pulse, the FIFO is clocked and the second word is
loaded at the FIFO outputs. For each word loaded into the FIFO, an
execute pulse must be used to unload each word. When a command word
is clocked through the latch, bits A through E go to programmable
read-only memories (PROMs) U9 and UIO. These bits are used for the
control of the LNAs. When the last word (code bit 7Q = 1) is clocked
5-28
U23-2 EXECUTE
U3-23 TBRL
START STOP
BIT BIT
U3-25 TRO
U2-15 SERIAL DATA OUT __ J=:=: =: ~ATA :=: WO~D #t=."_ 0
I
H !I2CLOCK
I I
U3-24 TRE
I I
I
I
U2-4 X-MIT-EN
I I
UI-4 RECEIVE EN I I
"~-
7647 -BF-512B
Figure 5-8. Data Transmission Timing Cycle, One Word
5-29
through the parallel latch on the leading edge of the execute pulse
(X), the output of NAND gate U25A will be a low. This is due to both
inputs, code bit G and Q- being high. This creates a high at input J
and a low at input K of flip-flop US. The flip-flop triggers on the
negative edge of X setting Q high and Q- low. Now AND gate U26A is
enabled and U22B is disabled corresponding to a new load cycle where
the FIFO is empty and can be loaded with new commands from the
processor.
(c) Receiver Protector Monitoring. The receiver protector

monitoring circuitry has two basic functions: to monitor excess love
leakage through the receiver protector and to monitor the detector
diode, which measures the RF leakage through the receiver protector,
for an open circuit or equivalently a broken or disconnected cable.
These two functions are discussed independently (see FO-B, sheet 1).
l Open Detector Circuitry. The open detector circuitry

consists of diodes CRI through CRIO, transistors Ql and Q2, and
resistors R25 through R30. CRIO through R25 clamp the bottom of R26
and the emitter of Ql to approximately 0.6 volt. Each detector diode
circuit has a small forward bias applied to it from resistors R31,
R3B, R45, and R52. The detector diodes have a very low impedance RF
choke to ground, which normally cause the voltage through diodes CRl,
CR3, CR5, and CR7 to be insufficient to turn transistor Ql on.
However, if a diode should open or if an interconnecting cable should
break or is disconnected, transistor Ql will turn on. This causes
transistor Q2 to also turn on, which feeds +5V through diodes CR2,
CR4, CR6, and CRB to the voltage comparators. This voltage at the
comparator will exceed the reference level causing a high (fail)
condition at the output of all the comparators.
~ Excessive Leakage Monitoring. There are four identical

groups that monitor excessive leakage through the receiver
protectors. Since each of the four circuits are identical only one
group, GPl, will be discussed. Each voltage comparator has a
reference voltage of 320 ±5 mV at its negative (-) input, which is
adjustable by lK potentiometer, R35. Under normal operations the
leakage pulse will not exceed the reference level and the output of
the comparator will be a low (pass). When a pulse of sufficient
magnitude is detected, the detector pulse voltage exceeds the
reference voltage and a high (fail) signal appears at the output of
the comparator. In the remainder of this description, see figure
5-9 for the necessary timing data. When a failure signal appears at
the output of the comparator, it will be sent through the three-input
NAND, U32A, on the execute pulse. Note that the third input, TRE, is
always high when the execute pulse is high. This places a low on the
set input (51-) of latch U17C/D. This results in a high (fail)
condition sent to the UART. On the trailing edge of the execute
pulse, the TBRL signal goes low and the monitor information is
entered into the UART for transmission. Once the TBRL signal goes
high, (monostable U27A timing out) the TRE signal goes low and
monitoring data is transmitted to the processor. Coincidentally, the
TRE signal being low resets the latch by placing a high at the 5-
input and a low at the R-input. This resets the output of the latch
5-30
to a low (pass) condition for the next test. Note that since an
excessive leakage pulse appears only during RF transmission, the X
pulse must be framed inside the transmit pulse period.
(d) LNA Control.
1 The complete LNA control circuit is shown in FO-8, sheet 3.

The circuit does not include U29, U30, and capacitors C41 through
C44, since they were described in paragraph b(2)(a). The inputs at
P2-43, P2-7, P2-8, P2-9, and P2-26 are from 85, 81, 82, 83, and 84,
respectively, of the LOCAL LNA CONTROL panel. In normal operation,
85 is set to NORMAL causing the input at P2-43 to be open; therefore,
U24B, pin 5 and Ull, pins 4 and 5 are pulled high. Pin 6 of U24B will
be driven low, enabling U9 and UIO (3-state PROMs); therefore, the
PROM outputs vary in accordance with the PROM inputs. (Refer to
tables 5-3 and 5-4.) As such, the inputs at pins 1, 3, and 9 of U18,
U19, U20, and U21 will also vary. Pins 4 and 5 of Ull, when high,
disable Ull (the 3-line to 8-line decoder multiplexer); therefore,
all outputs are high. Also, in normal operation, 84 is set to 1
causing the input at P2-26 to be open,; therefore, pins 2, 4, and 10
of U18, U19, U20, and U21 are all high. In normal operation, the LNAs
are turned on in accordance with the PROM program. The PROM address
inputs are the outputs of register U8 (see FO-8, sheet 2). The
switch position for 81 through 83 is irrelevant when 85 is set to
NORMAL and 84 is set to 1.
2 When local testing is required, 85 is set to the LOCAL TE8T

position. In this position, the input to U24B pin 5 and to Ull pins
4 and 5 is a zero. Pin 6 of U24B will then be high, disabling PROMs
U9 and UIO. All PROM outputs will be a high impedance. When pins 4
and 5 of Ull are low, the decoder demultiplexer outputs vary in
accordance with the switch setting on the LOCAL LNA control panel as
shown in table 5-6.
5-31
n TEST PERIOD
--------------rL:~~------
r-'--j
REFERENCE ------f-----
!
:1\
LEVEL r
I I
TRANSMIT
PULSE
i
FAILURE
i - pASS
TC
!o-oI
F
U23-1 EXECUTE L--1
I
I
F
U3-23 TBRL I
I
LJ
I
r
U3-24TRE I I 1
I
I
F
UI7C-9S
U17D-13 R -, j • I I
I
START 8 OATA BITS PARITY, STOP
DATA OUT
j ~---fF----c.u
~ U ~s-;;,~s~-
,I
.
RESPONSE WORD
1.15 MSEC
I
I
WORD
7647-BF-513B
Figure 5-9. Receiver-Protector Test Timing Diagram
5-32
Table 5-3. Monitor and Control A3All, PROM U9 Program Data
Address Address Pin Output Pin

LNA
Decimal A4 A3 A2 Al Ao 07 06 Os 04 03 02 01 00
14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON
o o o o o o o 0 000 0 o 0 All
1 o o o o 1 1 1 III 1 1 0 1
2 o o o 1 o 1 1 1 1 1 1 o 2
3 o o o 1 1 1 1 III 0 1 1 3
4 o o 1 o o 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 4
5 o o 1 o 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 5
6 o o 1 1 o 1 1 011 1 1 1 6
7 o o 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
8 o 1 o o o o 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
9 o 1 o o 1 1 1 III 1 1 1 9
10 o 1 o 1 o 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10
11 o 1 o 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11
12 o 1 1 o o 1 1 III 1 1 1 SLR
13 o 1 1 o 1 1 1 III 0 o 0 1, 2, and
3
14 o 1 1 1 o 1 1 110 0 o 1 2, 3, and
4
15 o 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 0 1 1 3, 4, and
5
16 1 o o o o 1 1 o 0 0 1 1 1 4, 5, and
6
17 1 o o o 1 o 0 o 0 1 1 1 1 5 through
11
18 1 o o 1 o o 0 o III 1 1 6 through
11
19 1 o o 1 1 o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
20 1 o 1 o o o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
21 1 o 1 o 1 o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
22 1 o 1 1 o o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
23 1 o 1 1 1 o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
24 1 1 o o o o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
25 1 1 o o 1 o 0 o 0 0 0 o 0 All
5-33
Table 5-3. Monitor and Control A3All, PROM U9 Program Data -
Continued

LNA
Decimal A4 A3 A2 Al Ao 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON
26 1 1 o 1 o 000 0 0 000 All

27 1 1 o 1 1 000 0 0 0 0 0 All
28 1 1 1 o o 000 0 0 000 All
29 1 1 1 o 1 o 000 0 000 All
30 1 1 1 1 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
31 1 1 1 1 1 1111111 1 None
Refer to table 5-5 for receive beam versus LNA correlation.
Table 5-4. Monitor and Control A2All, PROM UI0 Program Data

LNA
Decimal A4 A3 A2 Al Ao 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON
o o o o o o o 000 0 0 o 0 All
1 o o o o 1 000 0 1 1 1 1 1
2 o o o 1 o o 000 1 1 1 1 2
o o o 1 1 000 0 1 1 1 1 3
4 o o 1 o o o 000 1 1 1 1 4
5 o o 1 o 1 000 0 1 1 1 1 5
6 o o 1 1 o 000 0 1 1 1 1 6
7 o o 1 1 1 000 0 1 1 1 1 7
8 o 1 o o o 000 0 1 1 1 1 8
9 o 1 o o 1 000 0 1 1 1 0 9
o 1 o 1 o 000 0 1 1 o 1 10
o 1 o 1 1 00001 0 1 1 11
12 o 1 1 o o o 000 0 1 1 1 SLR
5-34
Table 5-4. Monitor and Control A2All, PROM UI0 Program Data -
Continued

LNA
Decimal A4 A3 A2 Al Ao 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON
13 o 1 1 o 1 o 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 I, 2, and
3
14 o 1 1 1 o o 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2, 3, and
4
15 o 1 1 1 1 o 0 0 0 1 III 3, 4, and
5
16 1 o o o o o 0 0 0 III 1 4, 5, and
6
17 1 o o o 1 o 0 0 0 100 0 5 through
11
18 1 o o 1 o o 0 0 0 100 0 6 through
11
19 1 o o 1 1 o 0 0 0 000 0 All
20 1 o 1 o o 000 0 o 0 0 0 All
21 1 o 1 o 1 o 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 All
22 1 o 1 1 o o 0 0 0 000 0 All
23 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
24 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
25 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
26 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
27 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
28 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
29 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
30 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 All
31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 None
Refer to table 5-5 for receive beam versus LNA correlation.
5-35
Table 5-5. Receive Beam Versus LNA Correlation
SLR
Receive Beam No. Channel
LNA No. I 2 3 4 5 6 51A3-
5lA7 5lA3JI J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 A8J2
-AI X
-A2 X X
-A3 X X X
-A4 X X X
-A5 X X X
-A6 X X X
-A7 X X
-A8 X X
-A9 X X
-AID X X
-All X X
SLR LNA X
5lA3A8
5-36
Table 5-6. LNA Switching Data
Local LNA Control Panel

Switch Position Output Monitored At "LNA Turned On
So So Se SB SA A3All 51A3 S
S5 S4 S3 S2 Sl Test Point Jack 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 llL
R
LOCAL TEST 1 0 0 0 48 and 45 J23 and J33 X X
LOCAL TEST 1 1 0 0 44 J27 X
LOCAL TEST 1 1 1 1 48,47,46, J23 through X

52,44,42, J33 and A8J3
49,51,50, (W36)
41,45, and 43
LOCAL TEST 0 X X X 48,47,46, J23 through X X X X X X X X X X X

52,44,42, J33 and A8J3
49,51,50, (W36)
41,44, and 42
Note:
X = Irrelevant
"Logic Level = X = LNA On
"Logic Level = "blank" = LNA Off
VI
I
w
.....
Section III. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF MECHANICAL ASSEMBLIES
5-7. GENERAL. This section contains descriptions of significant

mechanical assemblies of the equipment.
5-8. MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS. A general description of the

mechanical features of the equipment is provided in section I of this
chapter. The following paragraphs describe in greater detail the
operation of two complex mechanical assemblies: the antenna drive
assembly and the synchro and encoder geartrain assembly.
a. Antenna Drive Assembly AIAIIA2. The antenna drive assembly

consists of an electric motor with a handwheel, a gearbox assembly,
and a matched ring gear and pinion set. The ring gear (bullgear) is
attached to the rotating pedestal, and the pinion gear is part of the
gearbox assembly. A simplified diagram of the assembly is shown in
figure 5-10. See the diagram during the following discussion.
(1) Drive Motor Bl. The motor is rated 5-hp, 3600-rpm,

208-Vac, three-phase, 400-Hz. Facing the handwheel end, the motor
rotates clockwise. Attached to the motor shaft is a handwheel that
provides a means for rotating the antenna to a predetermined setting
as indicated by the degree graduations on an azimuth ring. Combined
with a quick-release lockpin and anchor block the handwheel also
provides a means of securing the antenna.
(2) Gearbox Assembly. The gearbox assembly contains reduction

gearing to reduce rpm. The final speed at the antenna is 6 rpm. A
self-contained oil system using the splash method lubricates the
gears and bearings. Through the use of horizontal and vertical
shims, the gearbox assembly is precisely fitted to the pedestal
assembly, namely the ring gear and pinion. To maintain the proper
fit, dowel pins are installed in the gearbox assembly mounting
flanges during the initial installation at the factory.
(3) Ring Gear (Bull Gear) and Pinion. The ring gear and pinion
are a matched set, and neither component is interchangeable with a
comparable component of another matched set. When the gears are on
the testing machine at the factory, a flush surface is ground on a
group of three gear teeth: one on the pinion gear, two on the ring
gear. These teeth are marked so that the matched relationship can be
maintained during reassembly. The ring gear and pinion are com-
pletely enclosed by a shield that contains a 360-degree azimut~
scale. In the bottom part of the shield, an opening with cover plate
allows access to the ring gear for lubrication.
b. Synchro and Encoder Geartrain Assembly AIAIIAIA4. A simpli-

fied diagram of the synchro and encoder geartrain assembly is shown
in figure 5-10. See the diagram during the following discussion.
(1) The main drive gear on this geartrain assembly engages with
the rotary joint gear that turns with the rotating pedestal assembly.
Through various gearing arrangements and flexible couplings,
5-38
ROTATING
PEDESTAL
,
I
I UPPER
WAVEGUIDE
(ROTATING)
PEDESTAL
EXTENSION
(REF) ROTARY
JOINT MOUNT
(STATIONARY)
HANDWHEEl DRIVE BULL GEAR

MOTOR
DRIVE GEAR
ON SLIP RING
ASSY (ROTATING)
ANTENNA
DRIVE ASSY
(DRIVE TRAIN)
7647-BF-514A
Figure 5-10. Antenna Drive and Data Drive Geartrain Simplified

Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
5-39
ANTENNA DRIVE
ASSY, 51A2
13ST
DRIVE
MOTOR 240T
51A1A11A2Bl
3600 RPM
ROTARY JOINT
S1A1Al1Al
(SLIP RING ASSY GEAR)
32T
8 32T
FLEX
~
OUPLING
64T
SENSOR RESOLVER
SlA1AllA4A3
6 RPM
48T
FLEX
COUPLING
36-SPEED
SYNCHRO
S1A1Al1A4Bl
216 RPM
CLUTCH
CQ",ITROL
C_AMP
SYNCHRO & ENCODER

GEAR TRAIN ASSY.
S1A1Al1A1A4
SHAFT
ENCODER
SlA1A11A4A1
6 RPM
FLEX
COUPLING
7647·BF·515A
Figure 5-10. Antenna Drive and Data Drive Geartrain Simplified

Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-40
the main drive in the geartrain assembly is coupled to synchros Bl
and B2, encoder AI, and sensor resolver A3. The shaft in synchro Bl
rotates 36 times for each antenna rotation, while the other data
sending units have a 1:1 ratio with the antenna.
(2) For the purpose of aligning synchros Bl and B2 and encoder

AI, the associated drive can be disconnected from the main drive link
by a clutch mechanism. The clutch amounts to a shaft that is
concentric to another shaft, and a clamp that binds the two together.
When the clamp is losened, the associated drive train can be turned
independently by an ADJ knob. Since the clutch mechanism does not
influence the sensor resolver drivetrain, the antenna is manually
rotated by the drive motor handwheel for alignment coordination of
sensor resolver A3. Also, for alignment purposes, all of the data
sending units are adjustable at the mounting flanges and at the
coupling/shaft connections.
5-41/(5-42 blank)
CHAPTER 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter contains detailed troubleshooting

information to enable the technician to find faults associated with
the antenna group of the Radar Set.
6-2. TROUBLESHOOTING PHILOSOPHY. The corrective maintenance concept

for the antenna group is generally limited to the "black-box level".
This means that the equipment has been designed so that a detected
fault can be rapidly isolated to an easily removed and installed line
replaceable unit (LRU) using test equipment and special tools author-
ized for organizational maintenance activities. The defective LRU is
removed and replaced using the procedures contained in chapter 7 of
this manual. The removed defective LRU is subsequently returned to
the depot for repair and returned to service. Faults associated with
the antenna are usually detected during the following operations:
a. Periodic Inspections. Most faults associated with the

mechanical equipment of the antenna group are discovered from visual
inspections conducted during the preventive maintenance routine. The
majority of mechanical faults are obvious and do not require
extensive fault isolation to correct the trouble. Damaged equipment
must be replaced or repaired upon initial detection to prevent
further damage which could contribute to total system failure.
b. System operation. Faults occurring during radar set operation

are detected by system degradation or by the absence of system output
data from the external operations/monitor centers. When a fault
situation occurs, the technician must be able to identify the cause
of trouble to a subsystem/group, and then isolate trouble to a
functional area within the suspected subsystem/group. Finally, the
technician must isolate the trouble to a specific LRU. Troubles
within the active electronic component group which includes the LNAs,
receiver protectors, and the low-voltage power supplies are detected
by the monitoring and fault isolation (MFI) feature of the signal
processor. (Refer to paragraph 6-3 below for details regarding use
of MFI.) In the case where MFI is not provided, the technician must
use conventional troubleshooting practices aided by functional
schematic diagrams in this manual and standard-type test equipment.
6-3. ANTENNA MONITORING AND FAULT ISOLATION (MFI). The signal

processor performs MFI on the following antenna components: LNAs,
receiver protectors, and the power supply monitor. In addition, the
MFI board interfaces with the IF receivers. The MFI checks the
following antenna functions:
• Tests LNA/receiver sensitivity
• Monitors receiver protectors to detect excessive RF leakage
• Monitors and switches dual low-voltage power supplies, if faults

occur.
6-1
When power is initially applied, the MFI self-checks itself and
monitors the antenna dc supply voltages. The MFI results are
indicated on the fault summary indicator panel by status lamps, on
the control panel MFI menus, and on the RF monitor oscilloscope.
a. Power Supply Voltages. The following is a list of voltages and

tolerances supplied to the IF receiver.
Voltage Tolerance
+5.00 ±0.25
+15.0 ±1.5
-15.0 ±1.5
+100 ±5
If the power supply is out of tolerance, the DEGRADED and MAINTENANCE

NEEDED lamps on the radar status summary indicator panel will be on.
b. Test Targets. Selecting TEST TARGET CONTROL on the processor

monitor menu results in the test target control menu being displayed
on the control panel. The test targets are used as a signal source
for testing and fault isolation of the receiver channels.
c. Use of RF Monitor Oscilloscope (Unit 3). Selecting

OSCILLOSCOPE VIDEO on the radar control panel calls up the
oscilloscope monitor video menu. The oscilloscope monitor video menu
consists of 11 different menus. Menus are used to select various
receiver video signals from one of seven receiver channels for
display on the RF monitor oscilloscope. (Refer to the signal
processor technical manual for waveforms and additional information
concerning the video displays on the oscilloscope.)
d. Control Status Indicators. The fault summary indicator panel

contains four system status lamps. The lamps and their purposes arE
as follows:
OPERATIONAL. lamp (Green) - All units are functioning normally.
DEGRADED lamp (Yellow) - Unit is operating below minimum

specifications.
FAULT lamp (red) - Component failure. A replacement is required.
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED lamp (blue) - An adjustment is required.
e. Isolation and Detection of Antenna Problems. To isolate and

detect antenna receiver problems, perform the following steps:
(1) On radar control panel, select RADAR OPERATION (top menu).
(2) On radar control panel, select CHANNEL CONTROL (radar

operation menu).
6-2
(3) On radar control panel, select ENABLED CHANNEL 1 (channel
control menu). Disable all other channels.
(4) On radar control panel, select TEST TARGET control

(processor monitor menu).
(5) On PPI and RF monitor oscilloscope, observe 12 range test

targets. If all 12 range targets are present and are
approximately the same amplitude, that receiver channel is
performing properly.
(6) Select each channel, one at a time, disabling all other

channels, and observe 12 test targets on PPI.
(7) If any channel indicates less than operational status,

perform the following steps:
(a) On fault summary indicator panel, observe status lamps

for the following indications:
1 If all lamps are green, the LNAs, the receiver

protectors, and the power supplies are operational.
2 If a yellow, red, or blue lamp is lit, a replacement

procedure is required.
(b) On radar control panel, select MFI STATUS (top menu).
(c) On radar control panel, select ANTENNA (MFI status menu).
(d) Observe subunit MFI status menu.
(e) Read message on subunit MFI status menu.
(f) Take appropriate indicated action to correct the fault.
(g) If the fault is not corrected, repeat steps (c) through

(e), selecting RECEIVER on the MFI status menu.
(h) If the fault is still not corrected, the problem is not

in the antenna. (Refer to the system manual (operation
and maintenance instruciions) for more diagnostic and
troubleshooting procedures).
6-4. TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS. Proceed as follows:
a. Fault Isolation Index. Table 6-1 lists the most common faults
associated with the antenna group that require manual troubleshoot-
ing.
b. Fault Isolation Procedures. Paragraphs 6-5 through 6-11

provide step-by-step instructions for correcting the faults
identified in table 6-1.
6-3
Table 6-1. Fault Symptom Index
Description of Fault Corrective Action
1. ANT DRIVE circuit breaker To fault isolate, see

lAlCB16 trips when actuated. paragraph 6-5.
2. ANT EMERGENCY STOP fault lamp To fault isolate, see

is lit (antenna fails to rotate). paragraph 6-6.
3. Antenna fails to get up to speed. To fault isolate, see

paragraph 6-7.
4. TILT INDIC circuit breaker To fault isolate, see

lAlCB19 trips when actuated. paragraph 6-8.
5. ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR PWR SUPPLY To fault isolate, see

fuse lAlA5Fl blows when power is paragraph 6-9.
turned on.
6. Excessive IFF/SIF returns To fault isolate, see

without primary radar returns. paragraph 6-10.
7. IFF Antenna VSWR is out-of- To fault isolate, see

tolerance. paragraph 6-11.
8. Oil leakage around pinion gear Replace damaged pinion

at inboard end of antenna gear oil seal.
drive gearcase.
9. Excessive noise and/or vibration 1. Check security of antenna

at antenna drive motor. drive motor mounting
screws. Tighten, if loose.
2. Replace antenna drive

motor.
10. Grinding noise is audible 1. Replace antenna drive

when antenna is rotating. motor and gearcase.
2. Replace rotary joint.
6-4
6-5. ANT DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER lA1CB16 TRIPS WHEN ACTUATED FAULT
ISOLATION. Proceed as follows:
a. Test Equipment Required. None.

b. Preliminary Conditions. AC power must be turned off.
c. Procedure. Perform the following steps:
(1) On antenna drive motor (3, figure 6-1), check status of

lockpin (1).
(a) If lockpin (1) is removed from handwheel (2), go to step

(2) •
(b) If lockpin (1) is not removed from handwheel (2), go to

step (6).
(2) Turn handwheel (2, figure 6-1) clockwise and observe

antenna rotation.
(a) If antenna rotates freely, go to step (3).
(b) If antenna does not rotates freely, go to step (7).

(3) Disconnect plug (4, figure 6-1) from receptacle (5). Turn
on ac power and set ANT DRIVE circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker trips, go to step (4).
(b) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker does not trip, replace

antenna drive motor. Fault is corrected.
(4) Replace ANT DRIVE circuit breaker. Reapply ac power and

set circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker continues to trip, go to

step (5).
(b) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker does not trip, the fault is
corrected.
(5) Check wiring between ANT DRIVE circuit breaker and drive
motor for shorts. Repair or replace shorted wire(s).
Fault corrected - resume normal operation.
(6 ) Remove lockpin (1, figure 6-1) and set ANT DRIVE circuit
breaker to ON. Fault is corrected - resume normal
operation.
(7) Check area around antenna pedestal.

(a) If area is clear of obstruction, go to step (8).
6-5
(b) If area is not clear of obstructions, clear area of
obstructions. Fault is corrected.
(8) Remove antenna drive assembly (6, figure 6-1) from antenna
pedestal. Turn handwheel (2) clockwise.
(a) If handwheel (2) rotates freely, go to step (9).
(b) If handwheel (2) does not rotate freely, replace antenna

drive assembly. Fault is corrected.
4 5
6
13066-BF-60IA
LEGEND
1. LOCKPIN
2. HANDWHEEL
3. ANTENNA DRIVE MOTOR
4. PLUG
5. RECEPTACLE
6. ANTENNA DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-1. Antenna Drive Motor Assembly
6-6
(9) Inspect drive mechanism between antenna pedestal and rotary
joint for evidence of damage. Repair or replace damaged
unites) as required. Fault is corrected.
6-6. ANTENNA EMERGENCY STOP FAULT LAMP IS LIT FAULT ISOLATION.
Proceed as follows:
a. Test Eguipment Reguired. Obtain a multimeter.
b. Preliminary Conditions. AC power must be turned on.

(1) On power distribution panel lAl, check status of ANT DRIVE
circuit breaker.
(a) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker is ON, go to step (3).
(b) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker is OFF, go to step (2).

(2) Attempt to reset ANT DRIVE circuit breaker. Observe
ANTENNA EMERGENCY STOP fault lamp.
(a) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker remains latched (on) and

ANTENNA EMERGENCY STOP fault lamp remains out (unlit),
the fault is corrected.
(b) If ANT DRIVE circuit breaker goes off, and ANTENNA

EMERGENCY STOP fault lamp stays lit, go to paragraph 6-5.
(3) On power distribution panel lAl, set AIR COND NO. 1 and 2
circuit breakers to ON.
(a) If both air conditioners are operating, go to step (5).
(b) If both air conditioners are not operating, go to step

(4) .
(4) Troubleshoot transmitter ac power distribution system.
(5) Perform a visual check to confirm antenna is not rotating.
(a) If antenna is rotating, replace relay lAlA3Kl. Fault is

corrected.
(b) If antenna is not rotating, go to step (6).
(6) Set ANT DRIVE circuit breaker to OFF. Hang DANGER tag on
circuit breaker. Proceed to step (7).
6-7
13066-BF-602A
LEGEND
.. -
1. SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH
Figure 6-2. Safety Interlock Switch
(7) On antenna pallet, check SAFETY INTERLOCK switch (1, figure

6-2) .
(a) If SAFETY INTERLOCK switch (1) is set to NORMAL, go to

step (8).
(b) If SAFETY INTERLOCK switch (1) is not set to NORMAL, set

switch (1) to NORMAL.
(8) On antenna SAFETY INTERLOCK switch (1, figure 6-2), check

for 28 Vdc between terminals C (+) and NO (-).
(a) If 28 Vdc is present between terminals C (+) and NO (-),

go to step (10).
(b) If 28 Vdc is not present between terminals C (+) and NO

(-), go to step (9).
(9) Repair or replace connector lAlJ2 or cable between power

distribution panel lAl and antenna pedestal. Fault is
corrected.
(10) On antenna SAFETY INTERLOCK switch (1, figure 6-2), check

for 28 Vdc between terminal NC (+) and NO (-).
(a) If 28 Vdc is present between terminals NC (+) and NO (-),

go to step (11).
6-8
(b) If 28 Vdc is not present between terminals NC (+) and NO
(-), replace SAFETY INTERLOCK switch.
(11) On antenna drive motor (3, figure 6-1), disconnect plug

(4). Set ANT DRIVE circuit breaker to ON. Check for 120
±10 Vac across the following pins of plug (4):
A-H (neutral)
B-H (neutral)
C-H (neutral)
(a) If 120 ±10 Vac is present across each set of pins,

replace antenna drive motor. Fault is corrected.
(b) If 120 ±10 Vac is not present across each set of pins, go
to step (12).
(12) On antenna soft start assembly (1, figure 6-3), check for
120 ±10 Vac across following terminals of TB2 (2):
1-4 (neutral)
2-4 (neutral)
3-4 (neutral)
(a) If 120 ±10 Vac is present across all sets of terminals,

go to step (13).
(b) If 120 ±10 Vac is not present across any or all sets of
terminals, go to step (14).
(13) Replace or repair cable lW6 running between cable entry

panel 1 (J12) and P2 of antenna drive.
120 ±10 Vac across the following terminals of TBI (5):
1-4 (neutral)
2-4 (neutral)
3-4 (neutral)
(a) If 120 ±10 Vac is present across all sets of terminals,

go to step (15).
(b) If 120 ±10 Vac is not present across any or all sets of
terminals, go to step (16).
(15) Troubleshoot antenna soft start assembly (1, figure 6-3).

Check lA29Kl, K2, Rl, R2, and R3. Replace defective
partes).
6-9
LEGEND
1. SOFT START ASSEMBLY
2. TERMINAL BLOCK TB2
3. RESISTOR 1A29R1, R2, OR R3
4. K2TIME DELAY RELAY 13066-BF-603B
5. TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
Figure 6-3. Antenna Soft Start Assembly
6-10
(16) At power distribution panel lAl (1, figure 6-4) connect
negative (-) end of multimeter to terminal 1 of TB2 (5).
Using plus (+) end of meter, check for 120 ±10 Vac at pins
A2, B2, and C2 of relay lAlK5 (6).
(a) If 120 ±10 Vac is present at pins A2, B2, and C2 of relay
lAlK5 (6), replace relay lAlK5. Fault is corrected.
(b) If 120 ±10 Vac is not present at pins A2, B2, and C2 of
relay lAlK5 (6), replace ANT DRIVE circuit breaker.
6-7. ANTENNA FAILS TO GET UP TO SPEED FAULT ISOLATION. Proceed as
follows:
a. Test Eguipment Reguired. Obtain a multimeter.
b. Preliminary Conditions. Power must be on. ANT DRIVE circuit
breaker must be set to ON.
(1) Listen for any unusual mechanical noise coming from antenna
drive assembly (6, figure 6-1). If an unusual noise is
coming from antenna drive assembly, replace antenna drive
assembly (6). Otherwise go to step (2).
120 ±10 Vac across pin 5 of K2 time delay relay (4) and
terminal No.4 of TBI (5).
(a) If 120 ±10 Vac is present across pin 5 of K2 time delay
relay (4) and terminal No.4 of TBI (5), go to step (3).
(b) If 120 ±10 Vac is not present across pin 5 of K2 time
delay relay (4) and terminal No.4 of TBI (5), replace K2
time delay relay (4).
(3) Set ANT DRIVE circuit breaker to OFF. On antenna soft
start assembly (1, figure 6-3), check continuity across
terminal 1, 2, and 3 of TBI (5) and TB2 (2).
(a) If there is continuity across terminal 1, 2, and 3 of TBI
(5) and TB2 (2), replace relay lA29Kl.
(b) If there is no continuity across terminal 1, 2, and 3 of
TBI (5) and TB2 (2), go to step (4).
(4) Replace defective (open) resistor lA29Rl, R2, or R3 (3,
figure 6-3) which connects across terminals of TBI (5) and
TB2 (2) that has no continuity. Fault is corrected.
6-11
2 3
TB2 I 2 3 4
LEGEND
1. POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL 1A1
2. PLUG A1P3
3. ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR C2 82 A2
4. VERTICAL SENSOR BOARD

13066-8F-604A
5. TERMINAL 1 OF TERMINAL BLOCK TB2
6. PINS A2, B2,AND C2 OF RELAY 1A1K5
Figure 6-4. Back View of Power Distribution Panel lAl
6-12
6-8. TILT INDIC CIRCUIT BREAKER lA1CB19 TRIPS WHEN ACTUATED FAULT
(1) Attempt to reset TILT INDIC circuit breaker.
(a) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker returns to trip condition,

go to step (2).
(b) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker does not trip, fault is

corrected.
(2) At cable entry panel No.2 (1, figure 6-5), disconnect

cable plug lW5Pl (2) from connector J6 (3). Reset TILT
INDIC circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker trips, go to step (3).

(b) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker does not trip, go to step
( 4) •
l I·!
t ~-~
LEGEND 3 2
1. CABLE ENTRY PANEL NO.2 13066 - BF-605A
2. CABLE PLUG 1W5P1
3. CONNECTOR J6
Figure 6-5. Cable Entry Panel No. 2
6-13
(3) On power distribution panel lAl (1, figure 6-4), disconnect
plug AIP3 (2) from connector Jl on rear of antenna tilt
indicator (3). Reset TILT INDIC circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker trips, replace circuit

breaker. Fault is corrected.
(b) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker does not trip, replace

antenna tilt indicator (3). Fault is corrected.
(4) Isolate short circuit in antenna group by disconnecting

electrical plugs from the following locations:
(a) Disconnect cable plug lW5P2 (3, figure 6-6) from

connector J2 (2).
13066- BF- 606 A
LEGEND
1. ANTENNA PEDESTAL
2. CONNECTOR J2
3. CABLE PLUG 1W5P2
Figure 6-6. Antenna Pedestal Connections
6-14
(b) On junction box (3, figure 6-7), disconnect plugs P22 (4)
and P23 (5) from connectors J2 and Jl, respectively.
(c) On vertical sensor (1), disconnect plug P25 (2).

(5) Reconnect cable plug lW5Pl (2, figure 6-5) to connector J6
(3). Reset TILT INDIC circuit breaker to ON.

(71 •
(6) Troubleshoot cable lW5 (2, figure 6-5) for short. Repair
or replace cable, as required. Fault is corrected.
(7) Reconnect cable lW5P2 (3, figure 6-6) to connector J2 (2).

Reset TILT INDIC circuit breaker to ON.

(9 ) •
(8) Check and repair wiring or plugs between J2 (2, figure 6-6)
and plug P22 (4, figure 6-7).
(9) Reconnect plug P22 (4, figure 6-7) to connector J2 on
junction box (2, figure 6-6). Reset TILT INDIC circuit
breaker to ON.
(a) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker trips, replace junction box

(3, figure 6-7). Fault is corrected.

(10).
(10) Reconnect plug P23 (5, figure 6-7) to connector Jl on
junction box (3). Reset TILT INDIC circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker trips, go to step.(ll).
(b) If TILT INDIC circuit breaker does not trip, replace

vertical sensor (1). Fault is corrected.
(11) Check and repair wiring or plugs from P23 (5, figure 6-7)
toP25 (2).
6-15
5
LEGEND
1. VERTICAL SENSOR
2. PLUG P25
3. JUNCTION BOX
4. PLUG P22 13066-BF-607A
5. PLUG P23
6. CONNECTORJ1
Figure 6-7. Junction Box and Vertical Sensor Locations
6-16
6-9. TILT INDICATOR PWR SUPPLY FUSE lA1A5Fl BLOWS WHEN POWER IS
TURNED ON FAULT ISOLATION. Proceed as follows:
( 1) Set ANTENNA-TILT INDIC circuit breaker to OFF. Proceed to

isolate the shorted component by performing the following
actions:
(a) At rear of power distribution panel (1, figure 6-4),

disconnect electrical plug A1P3 (2) from connector Jl on
antenna tilt indicator (3).
(b) Remove vertical sensor board (4, figure 6-4) from bottom
of antenna tilt indicator (3).
(c) At cable entry panel No.2 (1, figure 6-5), disconnect

cable plug lW5Pl (2) from connector J6 (3).
(d) At antenna pedestal (1, figure 6-6), disconnect cable

plug lW5P2 (3) from connector J2 (2).
(e) On junction box (3, figure 6-7), disconnect plug P22 (4)
from connector J2 (2, figure 6-6).
(f) On vertical sensor (1, figure 6-7), disconnect plug P25

( 2) •
(2) On antenna tilt indicator (1, figure 6-8), install a good

fuse into fuseholder (2).
(3) Reconnect electrical plug P3 (2, figure 6-4) to connector

Jl on rear antenna tilt indicator (3). Set ANTENNA-TILT
INDIC circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If fuse lA1A5Fl blows, replace antenna tilt indicator

(3). Fault is corrected.
(b) If fuse lA1A5Fl does not blow, go to step (4).
(4) Set ANTENNA-TILT INDIC circuit breaker to OFF. Reinstall

vertical sensor board (4, figure 6-4). Reset circuit
breaker to ON.
(a) If fuse lA1A5Fl blows, replace vertical sensor board (4).
(b) If fuse lA1A5Fl does not blow, go to step (5).
6-17
LEGEND
1. ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR
2. FUSEHOLDER
c
•
13066-BF-60B A
Figure 6-8. Antenna Tilt Indicator (Outer Panel)
(5) Set ANTENNA-TILT INDIC circuit breaker to OFF. Reconnect

cable plug lWSPl (2, figure 6-5) to connector J6. Reset
circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If fuse lAlASFl blows, go to step (6).
(b) If fuse lAlASFl does not blow, go to step (7).
(6) Check cable lWS for short circuit. Replace or repair cable
as required. Fault is corrected.

plug lWSP2 (3, figure 6-6) to connector J2 (2). Reset
circuit,breaker to ON.

(b) If fuse lAlASFl does not blow, go to step (9).
(8) Check and repair cabling from connector J2 (2, figure 6-6)
to plug P22 (4, figure 6-7).

plug P22 (4, figure 6-7) to connector J2 on junction box
(3). Reset circuit breaker to ON.
6-18
(b) If fuse lAlASFl does not blow, replace vertical sensor

(1, figure 6-7). Fault is corrected.
(10) Set ANTENNA-TILT INDIC circuit breaker to OFF. Remove
amplifier-demodulator Al (3, figure 6-9) from junction box
(2). Reset circuit breaker to ON.
(a) If fuse lAlASFl blows, repair or replace junction box (2,

figure 6-9). Fault is corrected.
(b) If fuse lAlASFl does not blow, replace amplifier-

demodulator Al (3, figure 6-9). Fault is corrected.
6-10. EXCESSIVE IFF/SIF RETURNS WITHOUT PRIMARY RADAR RETURNS FAULT

a. Test Equipment Required. Obtain the following items:

• Mul t imeter
• Backfill radiator, PN 349D822GOI (spare)
b. Preliminary Conditions. All electrical power must be turned

off.
(1) Substitute backfill radiator (1, figure 6-10) with an

operational spare.
(a) If fault is corrected, go to step (2).
(b) If fault is not corrected, go to step (3)
(2) Fault caused by defective backfill radiator (1, figure 6-

10). Tag and return bad unit to supply for disposition.
(3) Check cable assembly W301 (2, figure 6-10) for damage.
Perform a continuity check to determine if cable and
connectors are shorted or open. Check connections Jl-to-P2
and J3-to-Pl for corrosion and moisture.
(a) If cable W301 (2) is damaged, replace cable W301 (2).

Fault is corrected.
(b) If cable W301 (2) is not damaged, replace duplexer SlASAl

6-19
4----1
(ROTATED 1ao·)
LEGEND
1. SUPPORT BRACKETS
2. JUNCTION BOX (3066-BF-609A
3. AMPLIFIER-DEMODULATOR BOARD A1
4. COVER PLATE
Figure 6-9. Junction Box and Support Brackets
6-20
LEGEND
1. BACKFILL RADIATOR
2. CABLE ASSEMBLY W301 13066-BF-612A
3. DUPLEXER 51A5A1
Figure 6-10. IFF Radar and Backfill Radiator
6-21
6-11. IFF ANTENNA VSWR IS OUT-OF-TOLERANCE FAULT ISOLATION. Proceed
as follows:
a. Test Eguipment Reguired. Obtain the following items:

• Termination, coax (dummy load), PN 138C514H03 (2 required)
• Adapter, coax UG-29
b. Preliminary Conditions. IFF antenna undergoing VSWR test

(power on).
(1 ) Disconnect P2 end of cable W13 (2, figure 6-11) from

antenna connector J6 (1). Connect dummy load (4) to cable
(2) using adapter ( 3 ) •
(a) If VSWR is within tolerance, go to step (2).
(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace cable W13 (2).
(2) Disconnect dummy load (4, figure 6-11) with adapter (3)
from cable W13 (2). Reconnect cable (2) to connector J6
(1). Disconnect cable (5) from jack AICPl (6) at base of
rotary joint (7). Connect dummy load (4) to cable (5)
using adapter (3).
(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace cable (5).
from cable (5). Reconnect cable (5) to jack (6).
Disconnect cable WI061 (8) from jack J9 (9) of rotary joint
(7). Connect dummy load (4) to jack J9 (9).
(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace rotary joint (7).

(4) Disconnect dummy load (4, figure 6-11) from jack J9 (9).
Reconnect cable (8) to jack J9 (9). Disconnect other end
of cable WI061 (8) from jack J3 (10) of electronic switch
(11). Connect dummy load (4) with adapter (3) to cable
(8) •
(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace cable WI061 (8).
6-22
from jack (10). Reconnect cable (8) to jack (10).
Disconnect cables WI091 and WI092 from jacks Jl (12) and J2
(13) of electronic switch (11). Connect dummy loads (4) to
jacks (12 and 13).

(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace electronic switch
(6) Disconnect dummy loads (4, figure 6-11) from jacks (12 and
13). Reconnect cables WI091 and WI092 to jacks Jl (12) and
J2 (13) respectively on electronic switch (11). Disconnect
cables WI091 and WI092 from jacks Jl and J2 of duplexer (3,
figure 6-12). Connect dummy loads with adapters to cables
(1 and 2).
(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace cable (lor 2,

figure 6-12). Fault is corrected.
(7) Disconnect dummy loads with adapters from duplexer (3,

figure 6-12). Reconnect cables (1 and 2) to jacks Jl and
J2, respectively. Remove duplexer (3) from its mounting on
antenna structure. Connect dummy loads with adapters to
plugs PI (4) and P2 (5) of duplexer (3).
(a) If VSWR is within tolerance, replace IFF antenna.
(b) If VSWR is out of tolerance, replace duplexer (3). Fault

is corrected.
6-23
:r~~))J}
2 3 4
5
LEGEND
1. ANTENNA CONNECTOR J6
2. CABLE W13 13066 - 8F - GI3A
3. ADAPTER
4. DUMMY LOAD
5. CABLE
6. JACK A1CP1
7. ROTARY JOINT
Figure 6-11. Antenna Pedestal (Sheet 1 of 2)
6-24
9
12
LEGEND
B. CABLE W1061
9. JACKJ9
10. JACKJ3 13066- BF-614B
11. ELECTRONIC SWITCH
12. JACK J1
13. JACK J2
Figure 6-11. Antenna Pedestal (Sheet 2 of 2)
6-25
LEGEND
1. CABLE W1091
2. CABLE W1092 13066 _ BF-615A
3. DUPLEXER
4. PLUG P1
5. PLUG P2
Figure 6-12. Dup1exer
6-26
6-12. ROTARY JOINT TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubleshooting procedures
presented below are based on the premise that the rotary joint has
been determined to be faulty as a result of abnormal indications
encountered during radar set operation, or by scheduled preventive
maintenance performance check procedures.
a. Introduction. The rotary joint is a reliable piece of

equipment, but like all mechanical equipment, it is subject to wear.
The areas of wear in the rotary joint are the RF waveguide rotating
connections and the 16 RF signal and electrical power slip ring
connections.
b. Detection of Problem. To detect and isolate problems, perform

certain tests and monitor status conditions daily as described below.
c. Waveguide Leaks. To detect waveguide air pressure leaks

(and/or) RF arcing, perform the following steps:
(1) Monitor compressor on/off time ratio. If compressor

operating time is greater than three times the 10:1
(on/off) specification (down to 3:1), a leak is present.
(2) Listen for an RF energy leak in area around antenna

pedestal.
(a) If audible arcing sounds are present, a leak is probably

present.
(b) If all three above conditions are present, a leak is

present.
d. Isolation of Air Pressure Leaks. To isolate air pressure

leaks, perform the following steps:
(1) Manufacture a waveguide baffle by tracing around a

waveguide flange gasket (PN 138C882) on a piece of sheet
metal.
(2) Cut out baffle.
(3) Open waveguide path at last flange prior to rotary joint.
(4) Fasten baffle to end of open waveguide, after installing a

new gasket, using two C-clamps.
(5) Operate compressor-dehydrator lA26 and time the off/on

interval.
(6) If compressor interval is out of specification, the leak is

between compressor-dehydrator and the baffle.
(7) Use soap/water/bubble leak detection method with

compressor-dehydrator operating to find source of leak.
6-27
(8) If compressor interval is in specification, the leak is
after the baffle.
(9) Return waveguide system to original condition using a new

gasket.
(10) Move baffle to first flange connection after rotary joint.
(11) Perform compressor interval test again. [Refer to

step (5).J
(12) If waveguide system is out of specification, leak is in
rotary joint.
(13) Replace rotary joint (refer to paragraph 7-15) and return

it to the depot for repair.
(14) If waveguide system is in specification, the leak is beyond

the baffle.
(15) Return the waveguide system to the original condition using

a new gasket.
(16) Use the soap/water/bubble leak detection method with

compressor operating to locate source of leak.
(17) When leak is detected, repair flange connection and install

new gasket.
(18) Tighten flange screws.
e. Slip Ring Problems. Each IF signal slip ring has four parallel
contacts per ring for reliability. Very few problems arise as a
result of defective slip rings.
f. Detection of Problem. When the PPI indicates a loss of video

signals, the slip rings, along with other components in the signa:
path, are a possible cause. To detect the open or shorted component
in the signal path, perform the following steps:
(1 ) On radar control panel, perform the following steps:
(a) Return to processor monitor menu (menu II-77).
(b) Select TEST TARGET CONTROL.
(c) Select TARGET SELECT (menu II-81).
(d) Select 576 TGT/SCN : MOVING PHASE (menu II-82) .
(e) Return to processor monitor menu (menu II-77).
(f) Select OSCILLOSCOPE VIDEO.
6-28
(g) Select NEXT + until menu II-90 is displayed.
(h) Select CHANNEL 1; channell will highlight, deselect all

other channels.
(i) Select CI I OUTPUT.
(j) Select OSCILLOSCOPE VIDEO A-.
(2) Set oscilloscope to 500 usec per centimeter. Synchronize

oscilloscope positively on channel 4, use the 50-ohm dc
function for channell and channel 2.
(3) On oscilloscope channell, check that the channel interface

output is showing 12 test targets in range. Waveform
should appear as in figure 6-13.
(4) The 12 range marks will also appear on the PPI. Monitor
the PPI or oscilloscope for at least 10 seconds (one
antenna revolution).
1
I I
!,
! I
!
, I I, I
I I I I I I I I I I I I 1
- .
i -I ~I I
. ---=>-- .. ~
.......:-:.::.....-.
-'.
I I i. II i
, i TIT
;
I ! I
i i i
I ,1
I
,I
I 1 ,i
2V 500 us
1 1
7647·SF-570A
Figure 6-13. Channel Interface I Output Waveform
6-29
(5) While monitoring the oscilloscope, select all other
channels, one at a time, deselecting all unused channels.
(6) If all seven channels show 12 range marks, then the system
loop is intact. If any channel is missing or considerably
lower than the other channels, the loop is open, shorted,
or degraded.
g. Isolation of Problem. Perform the following steps:
(1) To isolate the problem, switch RF receiver output cable of

the suspect receiver with the next RF receiver cable. If
the problem still exists, the RF receiver (or prior
component such as the LNA) is defective and must be
replaced.
(2) If the problem is corrected with the cable swap, then the
problem is after the RF receiver.
(3) To further isolate the problem, in the shelter, switch

input cables (to 32-MHz IF receiver) from known good
channel to suspect channel receiver input. If the suspect
channel now operates, the IF receiver and every component
after it is good.
(4) You have now isolated the problem to either the RF receiver
output cable, the slip ring, or the four segments cable
from the slip ring to the IF receiver input. An cr.: ..meter
check will indicate which unit is defective.
h. Repair. To repair slip ring problems, remove rotary joint and

return it to the depot for repair.
6-30
CHAPTER 7
MAINTENANCE
Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION
7-1. INTRODUCTION. This chapter contains site maintenance

instructions covering the antenna group of the radar set. The
maintenance data is divided into nine major sections listed below:
• Section I. General Information

• Section II. General Maintenance Practices
• Section III. Maintenance Support Information
• Section IV. Removal and Replacement
• Section V. Repair
• Section VI. Alignment
• Section VII. Service
• Section VIII. Special Maintenance
• Section IX. Performance Tests and Checks
7-2. MAINTENANCE CONCEPT. The maintenance concept for the equipment

consist of two general categories of maintenance: scheduled mainte-
nance and corrective maintenance. Scheduled maintenance is mainte-
nance that must be done at regular intervals to ensure the equipment
will continue to function satisfactorily. Corrective maintenance is
that maintenance that must be performed only when unsatisfactory
operation is detected. The goal of corrective maintenance is to re-
establish satisfactory operation as quickly as possible.
a. Scheduled Maintenance. Scheduled maintenance consists of two

major categories of tasks: performance checks and equipment service.
Certain overall performance checks must be made at regular intervals
to verify that the equipment is still functioning within its
specified design limits. Also, certain housekeeping tasks (cleaning,
lubricating, replenishing fluids, etc.) must be performed at regular
intervals to ensure that unforeseen interruptions in operation will
not occur because of equipment neglect. For ready visibility and
convenience of use, the procedures are repeated in summary form in
the Scheduled Periodic Inspection Workcards manual which covers the
scheduled tasks for this equipment, and all other radar set
equipment. The recommended schedule for the scheduled tasks appears
in the workcards.
b. Corrective Maintenance. The corrective maintenance concept

for the equipment is generally one of "remove and replace". This
simply means that the equipment has been designed so that detected
faults can be rapidly isolated to an easily removable assembly that
can be replaced with a working spare. The removed, defective
assembly is subsequently returned to the depot for disposition.
7-1
(1) Defective assemblies are removed and sent to the depot
facility. Many of the assemblies can be repaired at the depot using
the available resources. Some assemblies must be returned to the
manufacturer for repair, and a few assemblies must be discarded
because it is not worthwhile to attempt to repair them.
(2) Table 7-1 contains a listing of the major assemblies and

components of the equipment, in reference designation order. The
purpose of the table is to indicate repair dispositions, thus
providing maintenance technicians with a quick reference guide to the
corrective maintenance concept. Repair instructions for all items
listed as depot repairable can be found in the parent radar set depot
level maintenance manual.
c. Reference Designation. The antenna group itself has an overall

unit number, number 51. All significant mechanical assemblies,
electronic assemblies, and electrical components of the group are
identified as being a part of the group by the prefix 51. Thus a
power connector might have the reference designation 51Jl, where J
identifies the device as a connector jack. Single components
generally have a single class identification letter such as J for
jack, C for capacitor, R for resistor, etc. Complex assemblies
generally have the class identification letter A. Thus the receiver
enclosure assembly has the reference designation 51A3. A complex
assembly will often contain lower level complex assemblies. The
reference designations for lower level assemblies are constructed by
adding to the applicable higher level reference designation. Thus
the monitor and control board, located in receiver enclosure 51A3,
has the reference designation 51A3All.
Section II. GENERAL MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
7-3. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. This manual is intended to provide safe

procedures and processes for accomplishing maintenance described
herein. It is, therefore, important that all the WARNINGs of
possible personnel injury be understood and observed by the users of
this manual. Changes or additions deemed necessary for safety
improvements should be submitted through channels to the prime AFLC
in accordance with T.O. 00-5-1. The users of this manual should also
be knowledgeable with the safety requirements cited in AFM 1271.01,
Ground Safety & Accident Prevention Manual, especially as it applies
to safe maintenance practices.
7-4. GENERAL. The general practices described in the following

paragraphs apply to all chapters and sections of this manual.
Maintenance personnel shall familiarize themselves with these general
practices before attempting any maintenance task on the antenna group
of the radar set.
7-2
Table 7-1. Repair Decisions for Antenna Group
Ref Assembly/Component Part No. Maintenance

Des Name Concept
51AIAll Antenna Pedestal 611J792GOl Remove/replace

faulty assemblies
listed below at
site. Remove/
replace turntable
bearings at depot.
51AIAllAl Rotary Joint 353D582GOl Remove/replace

faulty assemblies
listed below at
site. For other
faults, return
entire assembly to
manufacturer.
51AIAllAlA4Al Encoder 636A046HOl Discard.
51AIAllAlA4A2Al Amplifier- 150B475GOl Discard.
Demodulator
51AIAllAlA4Bl-2 Synchro 636A045HOl Discard.

51AIAllAlA4B3 Sensor Resolver 128C967HOl Discard.
51AIAllA2 Antenna Drive 615J037GOl Remove/replace

Assembly faulty drive motor
at site.
Remove/repair/
replace drive
gears at depot.
51AIAllA2Bl Drive Motor 342D902HOl Repair at depot.
51AIAllA3 Vertical Sensor ID19963GOl Remove/replace

sensor element at
site.
51AIAllA3Al Sensor 128C873HOl Discard.
51A2 Power Supply 611J769GOl Remove/replace

Enclosure faulty assemblies
listed below at
si te.
7-3
Table 7-1. Repair Decisions for Antenna Group - Continued

Des Name Concept
SlA2Al +lS Volt Power 64SASOSG02 Discard.

Supply (on line)
SlA2A2 +lS Volt Power 64SASOSG02 Discard.
Supply (s'Candby)
SlA3 Receiver Enclosure 612J647GOI Remove/replace
faulty assemblies/
components listed
below at site.
SlA3Al-7 RF Receiver 64SAS70AOI Return to
Westinghouse.
SlA3A8 Low-Noise Amplifier 64SAS89A07 Return to
Westinghouse.
SlA3A9 ±12 Volt Power ID19426HOl Discard.
Supply
SlA3AIOAl-2 Variable Coaxial lS2COOIHOl Discard.
Attenuator
SlA3AIOA3 S-Band RF Amplifier 64SA8S2HOI Discard.
t; 1 A3All Monitor and Control ID27174GOI Repair at depot.
3A12 STALO Power Divider 332D88SGOI Discard.
.3ATl-12 6-dB Attenuator M3933/2S-32 Discard.
SIM Array Assembly 612J668GOI Repair at site.
SlMAl Radome ID1663SHOl Minor repairs at
site.
SIAS IFF Antenna ID19S96GOl Remove/replace
faulty assemblies/
components listed
below at site.
SlASAl Duplexer 344D742GOI Discard.
SlAS- IFF Antenna 349D821GOI Discard.
Subassembly
7-4
Table 7-1. Repair Decisions for Antenna Group - continued

Des Name Concept
51A6 Backfill Radiator 349D822GOI Discard.

51A7 Matrix Combiner 612J648GOI Remove/replace
faulty assemblies
listed below at
site.
51A7Al-ll Low-Noise Amplifier 645A589A07 Return to
Westinghouse.
51A7A12-13 18 x 18 Matrix 611J860GOI Return to
Westinghouse.
51A7A15-25 2:1 Matrix 611J781GOl- Return to
Combiner 11 Westinghouse.
51A8 Not used
51A9 Microwave Assembly 611J803GOI Remove/replace

faulty components
listed below at
site.
51A9- 3-Port Circulator 335D527H04 Discard.
51AIO Tusk Assembly 611J786GOI Repair at site.
51All Mobile Pallet 6llJ636GOl Repair at site.
51A12 11 x 6 Matrix 611J870GOI Return to
Westinghouse.
51- Electronic Switch 344D996GOI Replace faulty
diodes at site; if
still defective,
discard (save
diodes).
51- Omnidirectional 155C303HOI Discard.
Antenna
51- Receiver Protector 618A130GOl Discard.
7-5
7-5. COMPONENT REPLACEMENT. The following rules apply when removing
and replacing components of the antenna group:
a. Tools. Before using tools, be sure that they are clean and
free from nicks, burrs, dents, etc. that could damage attaching
partes) and/or component part.
b. Electrical Connections. Use extreme care when disconnecting

electrical leads or connectors. Do not use metal-jaw pliers or
visegrips on electrical connectors. Use electrical connector pliers
to loosen or tighten screw-on type electrical plugs. Tighten
electrical plug(s) handtight; then, apply an additional 1/8-turn
using electrical connector pliers. (Do not overtighten.) Before
disconnecting electrical leads, tag each lead to identify it with its
connecting point (terminal). Cover all disconnected electrical plugs
and receptacles to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, etc. Use only
recommended protector caps (MIL-C-5501). Never cover electrical
connectors with plastic bags.
c. Identification of Removed Parts. Record critical measurements

and orientation requirements taken during removal or disassembly.
Tag parts for identification purposes. Keep attaching hardware
(screws, bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) separated according to their
placement. It is recommended that removed reusable parts be stored
in resealable plastic bags (Ziploc) and each bag identified with the
associated installation step.
d. Inspection of Removed Parts. During disassembly, inspect all

parts for serviceability. Discard all damaged parts in accordance
with current regulations.
e. Packings, Gaskets, and Seals. Discard all preformed packings

(O-rings), gaskets, and seals removed during disassembly. It is
recommended that old packings and gaskets be cut into pieces to
prevent their inadvertent reuse.
f. Dropped Hardware. Exercise extreme care not to drop nuts,

washers, or hardware in the subassembly. If an object is dropped, do
not proceed further until it is located and retrieved. A magnetic
retrieval tool (NSN 5120-00-545-4268) is a handy device for removing
small ferrous metal parts dropped into inaccessible places.
g. Lifting. Lift all heavy parts with the proper lifting device
to prevent damage to the equipment or injury to personnel. If
lifting devices are not available, have assistant(s) help in the
lifting and handling of the part. Do not attempt to lift any part
weighing over 11 kilograms (about 25 pounds) without assistance.
h. Installation of Attaching Hardware. When installing attaching

hardware, position lockwasher against head of screw or bolt. The
flat washer is installed between the lockwasher and the contact
surface of the part being installed. Be sure to use the correct bolt
and nut at installation. The bolt (or screw) when assembled and
properly torqued will protrude at least two threads beyond the nut.
7-6
7-6. TORQUE-TIGHTENING PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES. Throughout the
installation instructions contained in this manual, the technician is
instructed to tighten certain attaching hardware to specified torque
values. Proper torque limits are an important part of good
maintenance and must not be neglected. The following paragraphs
provide important rules and practices regarding torquing that should
be observed by maintenance personnel.
a. Torgue Wrenches. To tighten a threaded fastener, coaxial

connector, or hose connector (B-nut) to the proper torque value, use
the correct torque wrench for the desired torque range as follows:
Torgue Between: Torgue Wrench Tolerance

o- 25 in/lb 30 in/lb ±l in/lb
25 - 140 in/lb 150 in/lb ±5 in/lb
140 - 550 in/lb 600 in/lb ±5 ft/lb
30 - 140 ft/lb 150 ft/lb ±5 ft/lb
140 - 240 ft/lb 250 ft/lb ±10 ft/lb
240 - 1000 ft/lb 1000 ft/lb ±20 ft/lb
Note 1. To convert in/lb to N/m, multiply by 0.113.

To convert ft/lb to N/m, multiply by 1. 356.
Note 2. Check calibration sticker affixed to torque wrench to see

if it has been calibrated within the prescribed time
period. Normally, torque wrenches are calibrated every 6
months.
b. Use of Extensions, Adapters, or Crowfoot Wrenches. Use

extensions and/or universals only if necessary. When using a dial
indicator or preset type torque wrench, apply the load gradually
until the desired torque is reached. When an offset extension or
crowfoot wrench is used with a torque wrench, the effective length of
the wrench is changed. The wrench is calibrated such that the
indicated torque will be different from the actual amount of torque
applied when an extension is used. Therefore, when using an
extension, the wrench must be set to compensate for the increase or
decrease in actual torque as compared to indicated torque. Use the
correction formula in figure 7-1 to compute the proper setting.
c. Torgue Correction for Lubricated Fasteners. When thread

lubricants are used, the "dry" torque value used for that fastener
should be multiplied by a correction factor of 0.90. High stress
lubricants, such as antiseize compound, graphite and oil, molybdenum
disulphite, etc. are generally recommended for torque applications
because they tend to eliminate many of the variables associated with
torque to tension relationships.
7-7
QUADRANT DESIGNATIONS FOR RADIAL EXTENSION
1/6u RADIAL
• WHEN USING A TOlQUE WRENCH
lAD1.A.L EXT'ENSLON "-NHICH " ,EXTENSION
QtANGES THE DISTANCE FItOM AXIS OF ROTATIO/>:f'
THE TOIQuE wtENCH DItIV'E TO
THE AXIS OF ROTATION, APPLY
THE FOI.LOW'ING p:OItMULA TO - _::J \ TORQUE MlENCH
OITAIN THE CORlEerED TOiOUE , ,," ,
' ' A
lEADING: / / QUADRANT IV
• LINEAl DIMENSION Of lAND E
A
, --
E~~~~~~~ ~~;~t=~7-
QUADRANT I
MUST BE MlEASUREO AND EXPRESSED
IN THE SAME UNITS FOR FORMULA
APPLICATION.
1
QUADRANT 11 __
A
",,~~:U~:ANT III HANDGRIP

CENTER
1, ..t~
~
T; :. fNSTAlLA"I"ON TORQUE
ic '" CORRECTED INSTALLATION TORQUE
AXIS OF TORQUE
WRENCH DRIVE
I
~--------~L----------~
l z eFFECTIVE LENGTH OF TOlOUE WRENCH I
E .. EFFECTI'IE LENGTH OF EXT'ENSION
C '" CORlECTION FACTOR
FORMULA APPLICATION COR RECTI ON FACTOR FOR

RADIAL ORIENTATION EXTENSION
Tc: '" Tj ~. (~ x ~ APPLICAIU WHEN u..OIAl EXTENSION
IS IN QUADRANT I Olt II AS SHOWf'..l.
0
1c:=T;
, l
~-(EXC) J APPLlCA5LE WHEN lAOIAl E)(T'ENSION
IS IN QUADUNT [/I OR IV AS SHOWN.
ANGLE A
(DEGREES)
0
C (CORRECTION
FACTOR)
1.000
5 0 ....
)0 0.985
EXAMPLE (5 0.966
Ti = 265INCH.PDUNOS 20
25
0,940
0.906
Tc= ?
L = 6.30 30 0 ....
E = 2.70
35 0.819
C = 0.50
." 0.766
'5 0.707
STEP 1 50 0.b<3
55 0.574
Tc = 265 ~.30+ (~:~g X 0.50D 60 i 0.500
65 0 . .423
70 0.3.012
STEP 2 75 0.259
80 O.17A
T : 265 16'.301
c l2
.6~
85
90
0.087
0.000
STEP 3
Tc = 265 x 0.824
o ANGLE BEflN'EEN CENTERliNE OF TliE TORQUE
WRENCH AND A LINE PASSING THRU &OTH THE
T c = 218.360 INCH-POUNDS AXIS OF ROTATION AND TliE AXIS OF THE TORQUE
WRENCH DRIVE MEASURED IN PLANE OF ROTATION
TO THE NEAREST MUl TlPlE OF .5 DEGREES.
TORQUE CORRECTION ME1l-iOD USING TORQUE WRENCH RADIAL EXTENSION

7647·BF-571A
Figure 7-1. Torque Wrench and Extension Usage
7-8
d. Application of Torgue to Fasteners. The following general
rules apply when torquing fasteners:
(1) Prior to installation, be sure all threads are clean and

free of nicks and burrs.
(2) To obtain proper seating of parts, tighten the threaded

fasteners in a crisscross pattern similar to that shown in
figure 7-2.
(3) Do not tighten to the final torque value during the first
drawdown; uneven tension can cause distortion and
overstressing of parts. Seat and torque parts by
tightening the fasteners gradually until the parts are
firmly seated. Then loosen each one separately and apply
final tightening. Do not exceed the maximum torque value.
(4) Allow time for compression of gasketed surfaces by holding

torque for several moments.
(5) Apply torque to the nut rather than the bolt (or screw)
head. Discard any fastening device having rounded-off
wrench flats or torquing surfaces.
TIGHTEN FASTENERS IN NUMERICAL

SEQUENCE AS SHOWN.
(7)
7634- BM -189A
Figure 7-2. Sequence of Tightening Threaded Fasteners
7-9
(6) Use only torque wrenches recommended for use within the
indicated ranges listed under paragraph 7-6a. Larger
wrench tolerances are too great and result in inaccuracies.
(7) Use thread lubricant only when the installation procedure

calls for its use.
(8) For hose connections, tighten coupling nut to required

torque, then back-off 1/4-turn. Retighten to recommended
torque. Do not torque hose when it is under pressure.
e. Application of Torgue to RF Connectors. Each cable terminating

with SMA or N type connectors must be tightened to a specific
recommended torque value. The recommended torque value for the SMA
type connectors is 7 to 10 inch-pounds. The recommended torque value
for N type connectors is 13 to 15 inch-pounds. Refer to table 1-3
for the required torquing tools for SMA or N type connectors.
f. Torque Value Cross-Reference Chart. Figure 7-3 provides

recQmmended torque values to be used for tightening common-type
screws, bolts, nuts; and fittings.
7-10
TORQUE VALUES FOR CAPS, TUBES, AND HOSE FITTINGS
SIZE TUBE O.D. THREAD SIZE TORQUE VALUE* TORQUE VALUE**

(in.!lb) (ft/lb) (in.!lb) (ft/lb)
-2 0.125 0.3125-24 40-50

-3 0.1875 0.375-24 90-100 30-50
-4 0.250 0.4375-20 135-150 40-65
-5 0.3125 0.500-20 180-200 60-80

-6 0.375 0.5625-18 270-300 75-125
-8 0.500 0.750-16 450-550 150-250
-10 0.625 0.875-14 650-700 54-64 200-350

-12 0.750 1.0625-12 900-1100 75-91 200-350
-16 1.000 1.3125-12 1340-1540 112-128 300-490 25-41
<These values apply when flared tube brazed ferrule and connector are steel. Male end
fitting may be aluminum, nut may be either steel or aluminum.
«These values apply when female sealing surface is aluminum, male connector and nut
may be steel or aluminum.
TORQUE VALUES FOR SOCKET-HEAD CAPSCREWS
SIZE* TORQUE VALUE SIZE TORQUE VALUE

(in.!lb) (as indicated)
#4 16 - 18 1 14-in 175 - 205 (in.!1 b)

#5 22 - 25 5/16-in 360 - 405 (in.!lb)
#6 26 - 30 3/8-in 635 - 720 (in.!lb)
#8 51 - 60 7/16-in 84 - 90 (ft/lb)
# 10 75 - 84 1/2-in 133 - 150 (ft/lb)
* Includes both course (UNC) and fine (UNF) thread size.
TORQUE VALUES FOR STEEL NUTS AND BOLTS

UNC SERIES UNF SERIES
SIZE THREADS TORQUE VALUE THREADS TORQUE VALUE
PER INCH (in.!lb) PER INCH (in.!lb)
#8 32 13 - 16 36 16 - 19
#10 24 20 - 23 32 24- 27
1/4-in 20 40 - 60 28 55 -70
5/16-in 18 70 - 110 24 100-130
3/8-in 16 160 - 210 24 190 - 230
7/16-in 14 250 - 320 20 300 - 360
1/2-in 13 420 - 510 20 480 - 570
Note: Use 1/2 the value for bolts threaded into aluminum or magnesium.
Figure 7-3. Torque Value Cross-Reference Chart
7-11
Section III. MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION
7-7. GENERAL. The following paragraphs contain instructions

supporting specific maintenance tasks covered elsewhere within this
manual. This information involves maintenance routines considered
repetitious in nature and performed along with a primary maintenance
task.
7-8. PREPARING ANTENNA FOR MAINTENANCE. The follQwing procedure is

used whenever maintenance is to be performed on the antenna. Proceed
as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies.Required. Obtain six danger tags.
b. Procedure. See figure 7-4 and perform the following steps:
(1) Place transmitter in STANDBY mode.
(2) On power distribution panel lAl, set the following ANTENNA

circuit breakers to OFF (down):
• ANT DRIVE circuit breaker (1)

• SYNCHRO c i rcui t breaker (2)
• RF AMP circuit breaker (3)
• TILT INDIC circuit breaker (4)
• CONV OUTLETS circuit breaker (5)
(3) Hang danger tags on all ANTENNA circuit breakers (1 through

5) that were turned off in step (2).
(4) Set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to STOP (down). Hang danger
tag on switch.
(5) T~rn handwheel (6) until one hole lines up with hole in
drive motor (7), then, insert lockpin (8).
(6) Proceed with required antenna maintenance task.
7-9. LOWERING ANTENNA ARRAY. Certain maintenance tasks require the

lowering of the antenna array. If required, proceed as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. Obtain the following items

from the antenna pallet tool chest:
• 24-Vdc power source (truck battery) (not supplied)

• Drill motor, 24-Vdc, reversible
• Extension cord (Y cord)
• Handcrank
b. Maintenance Preparation. Prepare antenna for maintenance per
paragraph 7-8.
7-12
.... 111 COOOO .... 111 COOOO ::C-" 0"" n.
....
"0 ' "0 2 O\J'l(U lleW's lIG .. U
IGilDIGilD I [QJ [Q] [Q]

..,
~---- ANTENNA
[)OOIV!i $""C,..IIIO
.. ~
.......
-----,
.'~ ~
,,,ole
co....
,"~ .. \.(TS
ij [[j] ij [I
l...----'--,'-\4-
1 2 3 4
-~5
LEGEND
1. ANT DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER
7 2.
3.
SVNCHRQ CIRCUIT BREAKER
RF AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER
4. TILT INOtC CIRCUIT BREAKER
5. CON V OUTLETS CIRCUIT BREAKER
6. HANDWHEEl
7. DRIVE MOTOR
8. LOCKPIN
2920-BF-573B
Figure 7-4, Preparing Antenna for Maintenance
7-13
c. Procedure. See figure 7-5 and perform the following steps:
(1) At pedestal end of both struts (2), pullout quick-release

pin (3).
(2) At tusk end of both struts (2), pullout release pin (1).
then, remove strut (2).
(3) Loosen three spring-loaded captive screws (6) at each side

of pedestal extension.
(4) Connect drill motor (5) to 24-Vdc power source using an

extension cord.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury to the drill
counter torque on the electric drill when the
screwjack limit is reached. Before the array is
completely lowered, handcrank (4) should be used
to finish the process.
(5) Engage drill motor (5), or handcrank (4), with transverse

drive (7). Turn transverse drive (7) counterclockwise to
lower array (8).
(6) When array (8) is horizontal, use handcrank (4) to complete

lowering process.
7-14
4
,---
8 I
1. RElEASE PIN (2 PLACES)

2. STRUT(2 PLACES)
3. QUICK-RELEASE PIN (2 PLACES)
4. HANDCRANK
S. ELECTRIC DRILL MOTOR
6. SPRING-LOADED CAPTIVE SCREW (TYPICAL
BOTH SIDES, 3 PLACES)
7. TRANSVERSE DRIVE
8. ARRAY
7647-BF-574B
Figure 7-5. Lowering Antenna Array
7-15
7-10. RAISING ANTENNA ARRAY. Proceed as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. Obtain the following items

from the antenna pallet tool chest:
• 24-Vdc power source (truck battery) (not supplied)

• Drill motor, 24-Vdc reversible (with extension cord)
• Extension cord (Y cord)
• Handcrank
paragraph 7-8.
(1) Connect drill motor (4) to 24-Vdc power source using an

extension cord.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury to the drill
counter torque on the electric drill when the
tusk assembly seats on the stop blocks. Before
the array is completely raised, the handcrank
(3) should be used to finish the process.
(2) Engage drill motor (4), or handcrank (3), onto transverse

drive (2). Turn transverse drive (2), clockwise to raise
array (1).
(3) When left and right tusk stops (5) are approximately 1 inch
from contacting pedestal extension brackets (6), stop using
electrical drill motor (4).
(4) Use handcrank (3) to complete raising array (1).
(5) Engage and tighten three spring-loaded captive screws (7)

on each side of pedestal.
(6) Reinstall struts (9) to their original position, using

release pins (10) and quick-release pins (8).
7-16
1
.-
2
r
1. ARRAY
2. TRANSVERSE DRIVE
3. HANDCRANK
4. ELECTRIC DRILL MOTOR
5. TUSK STOP (2 PLACES)
6. PEDESTAL EXTENSION 8RACKET(2 PLACES)
7. SPRING-LOADED CAPTIVE SCREW (TYPICAL
BOTH SIOES.3 PLACES)
8. QUICK·RELEASE PIN (2 PLACES)
9. STRUT (2 PLACES)
10. RELEASE PIN (2 PLACES)
7647-BF-575B
Figure 7-6. Raising Antenna Array
7-17
7-11. PURGING WAVEGUIDE SYSTEM. The waveguide system is pressurized
with dry air. If maintenance requires the opening of the system, the
system must be purged after reassembly to remove moisture. Purge
waveguide system as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. Obtain an adjustable, 8-inch

wrench and a danger tag.

paragraph 7-8.
(1) Make sure SAFETY INTERLOCK switch is set to STOP and hang
danger tag on the SAFETY INTERLOCK switch.
(2) On microwave assembly (4), open purge valve (3) by turning

hex fitting (2) counterclockwise until fully extended.
(3) On power distribution panel lAl, set WG COMPRSR SF6 BLOWER

circuit breaker (1) to ON (up).
(4) After about 10 minutes, close purge valve (3) by turning

hex fitting (2) clockwise.
(5) Set WG COMPRSR SF6 BLOWER circuit breaker (1) to OFF

(down).
7-12. WAVEGUIDE MAINTENANCE. The various waveguide assemblies used
in the antenna group are considered precision equipment and must be
handled with great care. The waveguide maintenance procedures
necessary during installation are as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. Obtain the following items:
• Compound, lapping, Fed Spec SS-L-1682

• Oil, lubrication, general purpose, MIL-L-7870 (M55125GU)
• Soap and water solution (for leak detection)
• Solvent, P-D-680, type II
• Stone, lapping
• Towels, paper, Fed Spec UU-T-595
7-18
• LINE MONITOR ,
-Cf~
tSJ~ \ f~}
;0IlliillIuillJlI~I
TRANSMITTER •
I. WG COMPRSR SF6 BLOWER CIRCUIT

BREAKER
2.HEX FITTING
3. PURGE VALVE
4.MICROWAVE ASSEMBLY
2698 -BF -576A
Figure 7-7. Purging Waveguide System
7-19
b. Maintenance Preparation. Prepare antenna for waveguide
maintenance per paragraph 7 8.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury to personnel, use

solvent P-D-680 in a well-ventilated area away
from open flame.
(1) Inspect waveguide as follows:

(a) Before assembling waveguide, inspect mating flanges for
defects such as scratches, nicks, burrs, cracks, and burn
marks.
(b) Minor scratches, nicks, and burrs can be removed. [Refer
to step (2).]
(c) Burn marks indicate that an arcing problem exists. If

present, investigate and correct cause for arcing.
Replace waveguide.
(d) Replace waveguide if any signs of cracks, breaks, or

corrosion (pitting) are present. Also, replace waveguide
if warped flanges exist.
(2) Small defects, nicks, burrs, and scratches can be removed

from surface of flange using the following procedure:
(a) Using lapping stone and compound, blend protruding edges

of nick, burr, or scratch until flush with surrounding
surface.
(b) Thoroughly clean flange with solvent P-D-680 and wipe dry
with paper towel.
(c) Apply a very thin coat (film) of MIL-L-7870 oil around

surface of flange, as a corrosion preventive measure.
(Do not use excessive amount of oil.)
(3) Comply with the following rules when assembling the

waveguide:
(a) Al.ways use new gaskets between waveguide mating flanges.

(Gasket functions as an air pressure seal and provides
continuity between mating waveguide sections.) Faulty
gaskets are a major cause for arcing.
7-20
(b) When connecting two sections of waveguide, first tighten
flange screws fingertight to prevent cross-threading.
Then, tighten screws in the sequence shown in figure 7-8.
Using socket-head key (allen) or screwdriver, torque
screws to prescribed value as specified in procedure.
(c) After assembly, purge waveguide system per paragraph 7-11

and observe operation of radar set compressor-dehydrator.
If compressor-dehydrator runs continuously, or if its
duty cycle is longer than normal, check for air leaks
using soapy water solution.
7-13. CONVERSION CHARTS. The following conversion charts are

supplied for convenience and use as required:
a. Converting Inches to Millimeters. (See figure 7-9.)
b. Converting Millimeters to Inches. (See figure 7-10.)

c. Metric Conversions. (See figure 7-11.)
2 6 3 @ @
@ @ @ 3 6
@
7 @ @ 8
5 4
@ @ @
4 5 @
2 B
7647-BF-S77A
Figure 7-8. Sequence for Tightening Waveguide Flange Screws
7-21
Milli- Milli- Inches Milli- Inches MiIIi- Inches Milli-
Inches meters
Inches meters meters meters meters
1164 0.3969 13116 20.6375 2-7132 56.3564 3-13116 96.8377 5-13132 137.319
1132 0.7937 53164 21.0344 2-114 57.1501 3-27132 97.6314 5-7/16 138.113
3/64 1.1906 27132 21.4312 2-9132 57.9439 3-718 98.4252 5-15132 138.907
1116 1.5875 55164 21.8281 2-5116 58.7376 3-29132 99.2189 5-112 139.700
5164 1.9844 718 22.2250 2-11132 59.5314 3-15116 100,013 5-17132 140.494
3132 2.3812 57164 22.6219 2-3/8 60.3251 3-31132 100.806 5-9116 141.288
7164 2.7781 29132 23.0187 2-13132 61.1189 4 101.600 5-19132 142.082
118 3.1750 59/64 23.4156 2-7116 61.9126 4-1132 102.394 5-518 142.875
9164 3.5719 15116 23.8125 2-15132 62.7064 4-1116 103.188 5-21132 143.669
5132 3.9687 61164 24.2094 2-112 63.5001 4-3132 103.981 5-11116 144.463
11164 4.3656 31132 24.6062 2-17132 64.2939 4-1/8 104.775 5-23132 145.257
3116 4.7625 63164 25.0031 2-9116 65.0876 4-5132 105.569 5-314 146.050
13164 5.1594 1 25.4001 2-19/32 65.8814 4-3116 106.363 5-25132 146.844
7132 5.5562 1-1132 26.1938 2-518 66.6751 4-7132 107.156 5-13116 147.638
15164 5.9531 1-1116 26.9876 2-21132 67.4689 4-114 107.950 5-27/32 148.432
114 6.3500 1-3132 27.7813 2-11116 68.2626 4-9132 108.744 5-718 149.225
17164 6.7469 1-1/8 28.5751 2-23132 69.0564 4-5116 109.538 5-29132 150.019
9132 7.1437 1-5132 29.3688 2-314 69_8501 4-11132 110.331 5-15116 150.813
19164 7.5406 1-3/16 30.1626 2-25132 70.6439 4-3/8 111.125 5-31/32 151.607
5116 7.9375 1-7/32 30.9563 2-13116 71.4376 4-13132 111.919 6 152.400
21/64 8.3344 1-1/4 31.7501 2-27132 72.2314 4-7/16 112.713 6-1/16 153.988
11132 8.7312 1-9132 32.5438 2-718 73.0251 4-15/32 113.506 6-1/8 155.575
23164 9.1281 1-5/16 33.3376 2-29132 73.8189 4-112 114.300 6-3/16 157.163
318 9.5250 1-11/32 34.1313 2-15/16 74.6126 4-17132 115.094 6-114 158.750
25/64 9.9219 1-3/8 34.9251 2-31132 75.4064 4-9116 115.888 6-5116 160.338
13/32 10.3187 1-13/32 35.7188 3 76.2002 4-19/32 116.681 6-3/8 161.925
27164 10.7156 1-7116 36.5126 3-1/32 76.9939 4-5/8 117.475 6-7/16 163.513
7116 11.1125 1-15/32 37.3063 3-1/16 77.7877 4-21/32 118.269 6-1/2 165.100
29/64 11.5094 1-112 38.1001 3-3132 78.5814 4-11/16 119.063 6-9116 166.688
15/32 11.9062 1-17/32 38.8938 3-1/8 79.3752 4-23132 119.856 6-518 168.275
31164 12.3031 1-9/16 39.6876 3-5/32 80.1689 4-314 120.650 6-11/16 169.863
1/2 12.7000 1-19132 40.4813 3-3/16 80.9627 4-25/32 121.444 6-314 171.450
33/64 13.0969 1-518 412751 3-7132 81.7564 4-13/16 122.238 6-13116 173.038
17132 13.4937 1-21/32 ":.0688 3-114 82.5502 4-27132 123.031 6-718 174.625
35164 13.8906 1-11116 42.8626 3-9/32 83.3439 4-7/8 123.825 6-15116 176.213
9116 14.2875 1-23132 43.6563 3-5116 84.1377 4-29/32 124.619 7 177.800
37/64 14.6844 1-3/4 44.4501 3-11132 84.9314 4-15/16 125.413 7-1116 179.388
19132 15.0812 1-25/32 45.2438 3-318 85.7252 4-31132 126.206 7-118 180.975
39/64 15.4781 1-1311 6 46.0376 3- 13/32 86.5189 5 127.000 7-3116 182.563
5/8 15.8750 1-27132 46.8313 3-7116 87.3127 5-1131 127.794 7-1114 184.150
41164 16.2719 1-7/8 47.6251 3-15132 88.1064 5-1116 128.588 7-5/16 185.738
21/32 16.6687 1-29132 48.4188 3-112 88.9002 5-3/32 129.382 7-318 187.325
43/64 17.0656 1-15116 49.2126 3-17/32 89.6939 5-118 130.175 7-7/16 188.913
11116 17.4625 1-31132 50.0063 3-9/16 90.4877 5-5132 130.969 7-1/2 190.500
45/64 17.8594 2 50.8001 3-19132 91.2814 5-3/16 131.763 7-9/16 192.088
23/32 18.2562 2-1/32 51.5939 3-5/8 92.0752 5-7/32 132.557 7-5/8 193.675
47164 18.6531 2-1116 52.3876 3-21/32 92.8689 5-1/4 133.350 7-11116 195.263
314 19.0500 2-3/32 53.1814 3-11116 93.6627 5-9/32 134.144 7-314 196.850
49/64 19.4469 2-118 53.9751 3-23/32 94.4564 5-5/16 134.938 7-13116 198.438
25/32 19.8437 2-5132 54.7688 3-3/4 95.2502 5-11132 135.732 7-7/8 200.025
51164 20.2406 2-3/16 55.5626 3-25/32 96.0439 5-318 136.525 8 203.200
Figure 7-9. Converting Inches to Millimeters
7-22
Milli- MiIIi- MiIIi- Milli-
Inches meters
Inches meters
Inches meters
Inches
meters
1 0.0394 51 2.0079 101 3.9764 151 5.9449
2 _0,0787 52 _~472 102 ~,0157 152 6,9842
3 0.1181 53 2.0866 103 4.0551 153 6.0236
4 0.1575 54 2.1260 104 4.0945 154 6.0630
_5 0.1968 55 2.1653 105 4.1338 155 6.1023
6 0.2362 56 2.2047 106 4.1732 156 6.1417
7 0.2756 57 2.2441 107 4.2126 157 6.1811
~
8 0.3150 58 2.2835 108 4.2520 158
9 0.3543 59 2.3228 109 4.2913 159
10 0.3937 60 2.3622 110 4.3307 ~60_ 6.2992
11 0.4331 61 2.4016 111 4.3701 161 6.3386
12 0.4724 62 2.4409 112 4.4094 162 6.3779
13 0.5118 63 2.4803 113 4.4488 163 6~3
14 0.5512 64 2.5197 114 4.4882 164 6.4567
15 0.5905 65 2.5590 115 4.5275 165 6.4960
16 0.6299 66 2.5984 116 4.5669 166 6.5354
17 0.6693 67 2.6378 117 4.6063 167 6.5748
18 0.7087 68 2.6772 118 4.6457 168 6.6142
19 0.7480 69 2.7165 119 4.6850 169 6.6535
20 0.7874 70 2.7559 120 4.7244 170 6.6929
21 0.8268 71 2.7953 121 4.7638 171 6.7323
22 0.8661 72 2.8346 122 4.8031 172 6.7716
23 0.9055 73 2.8740 123 4.8425 173 6.8110
24 0.9449 74 2.9134 124 4.8819 174 6.8504
25 0.9842 75 2.9527 125 4.9212 175 6.8897
26 1.0236 76 2.9921 126 4.9606 176 6.9291
27 1.0630 77 3.0315 127 5.0000 177 6.9685
28 1.1024 78 3.0709 128 5.0394 178 7.0079
29 1.1417 79 3.1102 129 5.0787 179 7.0472
30 1.1811 80 3.1496 130 5.1181 180 7.0866
31 1.2205 81 3.1890 131 5.1575 181 7.1260
32 1.2598 82 3.2283 .132 ~~68 . 182 7 l§53 .
33 1.2992 83 3.2677 133 5.2362 183 7.2047
34 1.3386 84 3.3071 134 5.2756 184 7.2441
35 1.3779 85 3.3464 135 ~3149 .185 7,2834
36 1.4173 86 3.3858 136 5.3543 186 7.3228
37 1.4567 87 3.4252 137 5.3937 187 7.3622
38 1.4961 88 3.4646 138 5.4331 188 7.4016
39 1.5354 89 3.5039 139 5.4724 189 7.4409
40 1.5748 90 3.5433 140 5.5118 190 7.4803
41 1.6142 91 3.5827 141 5.5512 191 7.5197
42 1.6535 92 3.6220 142 5.5905 192 7.5590
43 1.6929 93 3.6614 143 5.6299 193 7.5984
44 1.7323 94 3.7008 144 5.6693 194 7.6378
45 1.7716 95 3.7401 145 5.7086 195 7.6771
46 1.8110 96 3.7795 146 5.7480 196 7.7165
47 1.8504 97 3.8189 147 5.7874 197 7.7559
48 1.8898 98 3.8583 148 5.8268 198 7.7953
49 1.9291 99 3.8976 149 5.8661 199 7.8346
50 1.9685 100 3.9370 150 5.9055 200 7.8740
Figure 7-10. Converting Millimeters to Inches
7-23
THE METRIC SYSTEM AND EQUiVALENTS
LINEAR MEASURE SQUARE MEASURE

1 Centimeter = 10 Millimeters::: 0.01 Meters::: 0.3937 Inches 1 Sq Centimeter = 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inches
1 Meter::: 100 Centimeters::: 1000 Millimeters::: 39.37 inches 1 Sq Meter = 10,000 Sq Centimeters = 10.76 Sq Feet
1 Kilometer = 1000 Meters = 0.621 Miles 1 Sq Kilometer = 1,000,000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Miles
WEIGHTS CUBIC MEASURE

1 Gram = 0.001 Kilograms = 1000 Miligrams = 0.035 Ounces 1 CuCentimeter = 1000 eu Millimeters::: 0.06 Culnches
1 Kilogram = 1000 Grams::: 2.2 Pounds 1 CuMeter = l,OOO.OOOCuCentimeters = 35.31 CuFeet
1 Metric Ton = 1000 Kilograms = 1 Megagram = 1.1 Short Tons
TEMPERATURE
LIQUiD MEASURE
0.556 ('F-32) ='C
1 Milliliter = 0.001 Liters = 0.0338 Fluid Ounces 212~ Fahrenheit is equivalent to 100 Celsius
0
1 Liter = 1000 Milliliters = 33.82 Fluid Ounces 90' Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2" Celsius
32" Fahrenheit is equivalent to D"Celsius
1.8('C + 17.78) ='F
APPROXIMATE CONVERSION FACTORS
TO CHANGE MultiplyEy TO CHANGE Multiply By

Inches ••••••••••• Centimeters 2.540 Centimeters •.••••• Inches •••.••••• 0.394
Feet •••••••••••• Meters •••••••• 0.305 Meters •••••••••• Feet •••••••••• 3.280
yards ••••••••••• Meters •••••••• 0.914 Meters •••••••••• yards ••••••••• 1.094
Miles ••••••••••• Kilometers •••••• 1.609 Kilometers •••••••• Miles •••.••••• 0.621
Square Inches •••••• Square Centimflters 6.451 Square Centimeters Square Inches •••• 0.155
Square Feet ••••••• Square Meters •••• 0.093 Square Meters •••••• Square Feet 10.76
Square Yards •••••• Square Meters •••• 0.836 Square Meters ••••.• Square Yards 1.196
Square Miles •••••• Square Kilometers • 2.590 Square Kilometers ••• Square Miles ••••• 0.386
Acres ••••••••••• Square Hectometers. 0.405 Square Hectometers •• Acres ••••••••• 2.471
Cubic Feet •••••••• Cubic Meters 0.028 Cubic Meters •••••• Cubic Feet •••••• 35.32
Cubic Yards ••••••• Cubic Meters 0.765 Cubic Meters •••••• Cubic Yards ••••• 1.308
Fluid Ounces •••••• Milliliters •••••• 29.57 Milliliters ••.••••• Fluid Ounces 0.034
Pints ••••••••••• Liters ••••••••• 0.473 Liters ••••••••••• Pints ••••••••• 2.113
Quarts •••••••••• Liters ••••••••• 0.946 Liters ••••••••••. Quarts ••••••.• 1.057
Gallons •••••••••• Liters ••••••••• 3.785 Liters •••••.••••• Gallons •••••••• 0.264
Ounces •••••••••• Grams •••••••• 28.35 Grams •••••••••• Ounces •••••••• 0.035
Pounds •.•••••••• Kilograms •••••• 0.454 Kilograms •••••••• Pounds •••••••• 2.205
Short Tons •••••••• Metric Tons 0.307 Metric Tons ••••••• Short Tons •••.•• 1.102
Foot-Pounds ••••••• Newton-Meters ••• 1.356 Newton-Meters ••••. Foot-Pounds ••••• 0.738
Inch-Pounds ••••••• Newton-Meters ••• 0.113 Newton-Meters •.••• Inch-Pounds ..••• 8.856
Pounds per Square Inch Kilopascals 6.595 Kilopascals ••••••. Pounds per Square Inch 0.145
Miles per Gallon Kilometers per Liter 0.425 Kilometers per Liter Miles per Gallon 2.354
Miles per Hour Kilometers per Hour 1.609 Kilometers per Hour •• Miles per Hour 0.621
CM
a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
i { I i I I I I I I I I1 I I
,,I' I'If/ilifl
I i
, , ,I, ' , 'I' (1,,,1,/
, I, , , , I, , , , II' , II,(I, , II,1'11(1 1
o 1 2 3 4 5 6
I INCHES I
Figure 7-11. Metric Conversions
7-24
Section IV. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
7-14. GENERAL. The following paragraphs provide step-by-step

procedures for removing and replacing various components and
assemblies of the antenna group. Only those items that are subject
to mechanical or electrical failure are covered. Furthermore, only
items in that class for which removal is not obvious, or for which
removal involves a risk of further equipment damage, are covered.
7-15. ROTARY JOINT AIAIIAI. The following procedure describes how

to remove and replace rotary joint AIAIIAI. Proceed as follows:
--- Bag, plastic (or plastic sheet 12-inch x 12-inch)

(commercially available)
- Caps, protective, MIL-C-5501
_- Compound, sealing, MIL-S-8802, Type I, Class B-l/2, 16-oz
~- Gasket, waveguide, PN 136C025HOI (4 required) [I)
--" Gas~et, wave9uide, PN 138C822HOI (3 required) (3)
~- Indl.cator, dl.al, PN 2417 L-", T'JC'V ~ 1< ¢ t" '" tiD I
__ Key set, socket-head screws ,'~ G " ':' ,
_ - Knife
- - - Screwdriver, Phillips, No.4
__ - Screwdriver, Phillips, offset, No. 3/4
_- Screwdriver, common, heavy-duty
- Tape, masking, PPP-T-60
"=- Tool, T-handle, PN 2177D77GOI (3 required)
~- Wrench, adjustable, 8-inch
b. Maintenance Preparation. Prepare antenna for maintenance as

described in paragraph 7 8.
7-25
c. Removal Procedure. Perform the following steps:
(1) Waveguide Depressurization. See figure 7-12 and proceed as

follows:
(a) On power distribution panel (1), set WG COMPRSR SF6

BLOWER circuit breaker (2) to OFF (down).
(b) On microwave assembly (3), open purge valve (5) by

turning hex fitting (4) counterclockwise until fully
extended. Allow compressed air to completely escape from
valve.
(c) Close purge valve (5) by turning hex fitting (4)
clockwise. Tighten fitting using light torque. (Do not
overtighten.)
7-26
OgQQQQQ
"
ANTENNA TILT IHOICATOtll
1"-..J
r - LINE NOHITOfl._
c8J~OI~.
, TftANSMtTTEI'I
,IUlliJIUlliJllml
2
1. POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL

2. WG COMPRSR SF6 BLOWER
3. MICRQWAVEASSEMBLY
4. HEX FITTING
5. PURGE VALVE
2698-BF-58IA
Figure 7-12. Waveguide Depressurization
7-27
(2) Waveguide W7 Removal. See figure 7-13 and perform the
following steps:
(a) At outboard flange (1) of waveguide W7 (3), loosen eight

captive screws (2).
(b) Remove clamp (5) from bracket (4).
NOTE
An assistant is required to support outboard end
of waveguide W7 (3) while captive screws (7) are
loosened in step (c) below.
(c) While assistant supports outboard end of waveguide

W7 (3), loosen eight captive screws (7) at inboard
flange (8).
(d) Install protective covers (6) over all disconnected

waveguide openings.
(e) Stow waveguide W7 (3) in a safe location until future

reinstallation.
7-28
4
2
1
6
1
6
@
o
o
\2I
0
OO
0
" 2.
1. OUTBOARD FLANGE
CAPTIVE SCREW (8 PLACES)
3. WAVEGUIDE W7
6
\L---------.l 4.
S.
6.
7.
BRACKET
CLAMP
PROTECTIVE COVER (S PLACES)
CAPTIVE SCREW (8 PLACES)
8. INBOARD FLANGE
7647-BF-S8ZB
Figure 7-13. Waveguide W7 Removal
7-29
(3 ) Access Cover Removal. See figure 7-14 and perform the
following steps:
(a) Remove access cover (1) from top of tilt frame.
(b) Remove access cover ( 2) from rotating pedestal.
(c) Remove access cover ( 3 ) from side of stationary pedestal.
(d) Remove access cover ( 4) (if installed) from side of

stationary pedestal.
7-30
3
LEGEND
1 THROUGH 3. ACCESS COVERS
7647-DF-583B
Figure 7-14. Access Cover Removal
7-31
(4) Waveguide W70 Removal. See figure 7-15 and perform the
following steps:
(a) Disconnect electrical cables (I) from receptacles J2

through J6 on outboard side of plate assembly (2).
Install protective caps on cable plugs and receptacles.
NOTE
step (b) below requires the removal of sealant
around mating surfaces of plate assembly (2) and
pedestal (lO). This sealant cannot be softened
or removed by chemical cleaning agents. The
only method for removal is to use a knife to cut
and peel away the sealant.
(b) Remove sealant from around areas shown in figure 7-15.
(c) Remove eight screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (II)

that hold plate assembly (2) to flange of pedestal (lO).
(d) Carefully push plate assembly (2) inward until screws (8

and 12) are accessible with a screwdriver.
(e) Remove screws, lockwashers and flat washers (8 and 12);

then, take off coverplate (7) and filler plate (13).
(f) Carefully fold both halves of plate assembly (2) inward

enough to allow access to inboard flange (4) and rotary
joint (3).
7-32
1
3
4
5
6
9
10
CTRICAL CABLES (5 PLACES)

1. ELE MBLY
2. PLATE ASSE T (WAVEGUIDE
ROTARY JOIN
13
3. CONN ECTING POINT)
4. INS CARD FLANGE
5. RETAINER REW(B PLACES)

CAPTIVE SC
6. COVERPLATE R FLAT WASHER

7.
B. SCREW, lOCKWA5HE •
(4 PLACES)
WAVEGUIDE W7Q
9. PEDESTAL R FLAT WASHER

10.
11. SCREW. LOCKWASHE •
(8 PLACES) R FLAT WASHER

12. SCREW, LOCKWASHE •
(2 PLACES)
13. FILLER PLA TE
Figure 7-15. Waveguide W70 Removal (Sheet 1 of 2)
7-33
9
16
LEGEND - Continued
14. SC~EW, LDCKWASHER, FLAT WASHER

(2 PLACES)
1 S. SUPPORT BRACKET
16. GASKET
7855-8M -5858
Figure 7-15. Waveguide W70 Removal (Sheet 2 of 2)
7-34
(g) Remove two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (14)
securing waveguide W70 (9) to support bracket (15).
NOTE
An assistant is required to support the inboard
flange (4) of waveguide W70 (9) when captive
screws (6) are loosened.
(h) with assistant supporting the inboard flange (4) of

waveguide W70 (9), loosen eight captive screws (6) and
slide retainer (5) away from inboard flange (4) of
waveguide W70 (9).
(i) Carefully remove waveguide (9) from pedestal opening.
(j) Remove and discard gasket (16) from inboard flange (4) of
waveguide W70 (9).
(k) Cover inboard flange opening with a plastic bag (or

sheet) to prevent entry of moisture and dirt. Use
masking tape or wire to secure bag or sheet to waveguide.
(1) Store waveguide W70 (9) in a clean/safe location.
7-35
(5) Disconnection of Electrical Cables. See figure 7-16 and
(a) Reach through top access opening (1) in pedestal and

disconnect and tag the five electrical cable plugs [P9
(4) from connector J9, Pll (6) from connector Jll, P12
(5) from connector J12, P13 (3) from connector J13, and
P14 (2) from connector J14).
(b) Reach through side access opening in pedestal and discon-

nect and tag the six electrical cable plugs [P3 (9) from
connector J3, P4 (14) from connector J4, P5 (13) from
connector J5, P6 (11) from connector J6, P7 (10) from
connector J7, and P24 (7) from connector Jl on sensor
resolver).
NOTE
Plug connections PI (12) and P2 (8) on bottom of
rotary joint are accessed through either side
access openings.
(c) Disconnect plug connections PI (12) and P2 (8) from

receptacles at bottom of rotary joint.
7-36
2
--- ..........~
. A(
1.
13
LEGEND
TOP ACCESS OPENING 6. PLUG P11 11. PLUGP6

9
;-8
2. PLUG P14 7. PLUG P24 12. PLUGP1
3. PLUG P13 8. PLUG P2 13. PLUG PS
4. PLUG P9 9. PLUG P3 14. PLUG P4
5. PLUG P12 10. PLUGP7
7647-BF-5968
Figure 7-16. DisconnectJ.on

. of Electrical Cables
7-37
(6) Waveguide WID!W66 Removal. See figure 7-17 and perform the
following steps:
NOTE
Due to a minimum amount of overhead clearance, a
shortened hex key wrench (allen) must be used to
remove allen-head screws (3) from waveguide.
(a) Remove eight allen-head screws (3) securing flexible

waveguide (2) to waveguide W66 (5).
(b) Carefully move flexible waveguide (2) free from flange on

waveguide W66 (5).
(c) Remove two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (9) and
two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (7) from clamp
(8); then remove clamp (8) from Z-bracket (13) and
L-bracket (6).
(d) Remove two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers -(7) and
remove L-bracket (6).
(e) Reach down through top access opening (1) and remove
eight allen-head screws (15) from bottom flange (16) of
waveguide WID (11).
NOTE
Step (f) below requires the removal of sealant
from around mating surfaces of rotating pedestal
assembly and waveguide W66 (5). This sealant
can not be softened or removed by chemical
cleaning agents. The only method for removal is
to use a knife to cut and peel away the sealant.
(f) Remove sealant (14) from around area shown in figure 7-17
so that waveguide W66 (5) slides freely through opening
in the rotating pedestal assembly.
(g) Slide waveguide W66 (5) [with waveguide WID (11)

attached] about 1 inch away from rotary joint waveguide
connector (18).
(h) Remove protective cover (19) from storage bracket and

install cover over opening in rotary joint waveguide
connector (18).
(i) Remove and discard gaskets (4 and 17).
7-38
LEGEND
1. TOP ACCESS OPENING

2. FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE
3. ALLEN HEAD SCREW (S PLACES)
4. GASKET
5. WAVEGUIDEW66
6. L-BRACKET
7. SCREW, LOCKWASHER,
FLATWASHER (2 PLACES)
S. CLAMP
FLATWASHER, (2 PLACES)
10. SCREW, LOCKWASH ER,
FLATWASHER, (2 PLACES)
11: WAVEGUIDE W10
12. SCREW (2 PLACES)
13. 2-BRACKET
14. SEALING COMPOUND
15. ALLEN HEAD SCREW
16. SOnOM FLANGE
(OF WAVEGUIDE W10)
17. GASKET
8
1S. ROTARY JOINT WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
19. PROTECTIVE COVER
4
18
13
14
15 16 17
2698-BM-!586A
Figure 7-17_ Waveguide WIO/W66 Removal
7-39
(7) Junction Box Removal. See figure 7-18 and perform the
following steps:
(a) Loosen two captive screws (1) and remove junction box (2)
along with attached electrical cables.
(b) Set junction box (2) aside, away from rotary joint.
(c) Dress all disconnected cables away from rotary joint to
avoid their damage during removal of rotary joint.
7-40
1. CAPTIVE SCREW (2 PLACES)
2. JUNCTION BOX
7647-BF-587B
Figure 7-18. Junction Box Removal
7-41
(8) Installation of T-Handles and Removal of Rotary Joint. See
figure 7-19 and perform the following steps:
(a) Working through top access opening (1), remove three

screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (2) at rotary joint
(6) attaching points.
(b) Screw three T-handles (3) into threaded holes (4) of the
two pedestal mounting flanges (5).
WARNING
To prevent bodily injury, two persons shall be
used to lift and handle the rotary joint in the
following steps since rotary joint (6) weighs
about 32 kilograms (70 pounds).
(c) Grasp T-handles (3) and carefully lift up rotary joint

(6) about 1 inch from pedestal mounting flanges (5).
Check all around rotary joint (6) to make sure that loose
cables are not caught and are clear from path of removal.
(d) Carefully lift out rotary joint (6) from top access
opening (1).
(e) Cap all waveguide openings and electrical. receptacles on

rotary joint (6) to prevent entry of moisture and dirt.
(f) Remove three T-handles (3) and retain them for use on
replacement rotary joint.
7-42
1 2

2. SCREW,LOCKWASHER,FlAT
WASHER (3 PLACES)
3. T·HANDLE (3 PLACES)
4. THREADEO HOLE (3 PLACES)
S. PEDESTAL MOUNTING FLANGE
(3 PLACES)
6. ROTARY JOINT
6
7647-BF-S90A
Figure 7-19. T-Handles Installation and Rotary Joint Removal
7-43
d. Replacement Procedure. Perform the following steps:
(1) Replacement Rotary Joint Installation. See figure 7-20 and

(a) Screw three T-handles (2) into threaded holes (1) on

mounting flanges of replacement rotary joint (3).
WARNING
To prevent bodily injury, two persons shall be
used to handle the rotary joint in steps (b) and
(c) below since rotary joint (3) weighs about 32
kilograms (70 pounds).
NOTE
During installation of rotary joint (3), some
maneuvering is necessary so that synchro and
encoder gear train and connectors clear the
pedestal mounting flanges (7).
(b) Using T-handles (2), carefully lower rotary joint (3)

through top access opening (4), making sure that loose
electrical cables are clear from path of installation.
(c) Orient rotary joint (3) with respect to waveguide

attaching points. Allow rotary joint to rest on pedestal
mounting flanges (7).
(d) Using T-handles (2), carefully turn rotary joint (3)

until mounting holes in flanges line up with holes in
rotary joint.
(e) Install, but do not tighten, three screws, lockwashers,

and flat washers (5).
(f) Remove three T-handles (2).
(g) Tighten the three bolts holding the rotary joint.
7-44
5
~
~
,
LINEUP
SCREWHOLES
(3 PLACES)
1. THREADED HOLE (3 PLACES)

2. T-HANDLE (3 PLACES)
3. ROTARY JOINT
5. SCREW,lOCKWASHER. FLAT
WASHER(3 PLACES)
6. WAVEGUIDE W66
7. PEDESTAL MOUNTING FLANGE 7
(3 PLACES)
3
7647-BF-591A
Figure 7-20. Rotary Joint Installation
7-45
(2) Waveguide W70 Installation. See figure 7-21 and perform
the following steps:
(a) Loosen, but do not remove, two screws (9) securing

support bracket (7) to rotating pedestal assembly.
(b) Install new gasket (3) into groove around inboard

flange (2).
NOTE
An assistant is required to help position and
support waveguide W70 (10) during its
installation in steps (c) and (d) below.
(c) Working with assistant, insert waveguide W70 (10) into

side opening of pedestal.
(d) Connect inboard flange (2) of waveguide W70 ( _0

waveguide flange on rotary joint (4). Sect:re ...• mection
with retainer (5). Tighten eight captive screws (6) in
accordance with tightening sequence described in
paragraph 7-12.
NOTE
The reason for performing steps (e) through (g)
is to minimize preloading of waveguide W70 (10).
(e) With two screws (9) still loose, secure block

assembly (1) (attached to waveguide W70) to support
bracket (7) with two screws, lockwashers, and flat
washers (8).
(f) Tighten two screws (9).
(g) Loosen two screws (8).
7-46
3
LEGEND
1. BLOCK ASSY
2. INBOARD FLANGE
3. GASKET (NEW)
4. ROTARY JOINT
5. RETAINER
6. CAPTIVE SCREWS (8 PLACES)
7. SUPPORT BRACKET
FLAT WASHER (2 PLACES)
9. SCREW
10. WAVEGUIDE W70
Figure 7-21. Waveguide W70 Installation
7-47
(3) Perform Runout Deflection Check. See figure 7-22 and
(a) Make sure two screws (7) are loose.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to rotary joint components,
runout check must be done using extreme care and
preciseness. The following procedure must be
performed with complete accuracy.
(b) Remove protective cover (1) from forward flange of
waveguide W70 (2).
(c) Mount dial indicator (3) on other flange of access
opening (6). position plunger (4) perpendicular to
forward flange of waveguide W70 (2).
(d) Apply light pressure on plunger (4) (about 180 degrees of
needle deflection), set bezel on dial indicator (3) to
zero reading. (This setup will allow for a plus and
minus reading during runout check.)
NOTE
An assistant is needed to rotate upper portion
of rotary joint from top pedestal access
opening.
NOTE
Steps (e) and (f) must be performed at the same
time. The assistant will begin step (e) upon
command by the technician.
(e) Manually turn upper waveguide (6) slowly through 360
degrees of rotation.
(f) Observe dial indicator (3) and record maximum and minimum
readings throughout 360-degree rotation.
(g) Request assistant to slowly turn upper waveguide (8) to a
position where dial indicator (3) reads halfway between
minimum and maximum readings, previously recorded in step
(e) above. (Record this reading.)
NOTE
If total runout deflection obtained in step (f)
above exceeds 2.54 mm (0.010 inch), replace
rotary joint.
(h) Tighten two screws (7) making sure that dial indication
does not change more than .002 inch. If dial indication
does change more than .002 inch, loosen two screws (5),
retighten two screws (5), and repeat runout procedure.
7-48
7
NOTES:
1. DENOTES ROTARY JOINT UPPER WAVEGUIDE
4 ROTATION (360) TO DETERMINE TOTAL
\1
RUNOUT AT FLANGE OF LOWER WAVEGUIDE
, W70.
2. AMOUNT OF SHIM WASHERS REQUIRED

DEPENDS ON THE AVERAGE RUNOUT SETTING
3 AT FLANGE OF WAVEGUIDE W70.
3. PEDESTAL EXTENSION NOT SHOWN FOR

2 CLARITY.
LEGEND
1. PROTECTIVE COVER
2. FORWARD FLANGE OF
WAVEGUIDE W70
3. DIAL INDICATOR (WITH
MOUNTING FIXTURE)
4. PLUNGER
S. SCREW (2 PLACES)
6. OTHER FLANGE OF
ACCESS OPENING
7. SCREW (2 PLACES)
8. UPPER WAVEGUIDE
(PART OF ROTARY)
Figure 7-22. Runout Deflection Check of Waveguide W70
7-49
(4) Waveguide WIO/W66 Installation. See figure 7-23 and
(a) Loosen two screws (7) holding Z-bracket (6).
(b) Remove protective cover (10) from rotary joint upper

waveguide (9). Stow protective cover (10) on stowage
bracket (14).
NOTE
Step (c) below requires the removal of sealant
from around mating surfaces of rotating pedestal
assembly and waveguide W66 (4). This sealant
can not be softened or removed by chemical
, cleaning agents. The only method for removal is
to use a knife to cut and peel away the sealant.
(c) Remove all sealant (15) so that waveguide W66 (4) slides
freely through hole in rotating pedestal assembly when
waveguide WID (13) is slid against the rotary joint upper
waveguide (9).
(d) Install new gasket (11) into groove around rotary joint
upper waveguide (9).
(e) position waveguide WID (13) against rotary joint upper

waveguide (9) and secure with eight Allen head screws
(12). (Tighten waveguide screws in sequence per
paragraph 7-12.)
(f) Mount dial indicator (17) on flange (19) of top access

opening (1).
(g) Apply light pressure on indicator plunger (16); then, set

indicator bezel to read zero.
(h) Adjust height of Z-bracket (6) so that it makes contact

with waveguide W66 (4), but without changing dial
indicator reading. (Indicator should read zero after
proper height adjustment of Z-bracket (6) is made.)
(i) Tighten two screws (7) making sure that the dial
indicator (17) reading does not change.
(j) position clamp (2) over waveguide W66 (4) and secure with
two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (3) making sure
that the dial indicator (17) reading does not change.
(k) Remove dial indicator (17).
(1) Apply sealing compound (15) around area shown in figure

7-23.
7-50
4
16
14
I~--t~
"""~;?
LEGEND

2. CLAMP 13. WAVEGUIDE W10
3. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, 14. STOWAGE BRACKET
FLATWASHER (2 PLACES) 1S. SEALING COMPOUND
4. WAVEGUIDEW66 16. INDICATOR PLUNGER
S. GASKET 17. DIALINDICATOR
6. Z-BRACKET (WITH MOUNTING FIXTURE)
7. SCREW (2 PLACES) 18. SCREW, LOCKWASHER,
8. FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE FLATWASHER(2 PLACES)
9. ROTARY JOINT UPPER WAVEGUIDE 19. FLANGE (OF TOP ACCESS OPENING)
10. PROTECTIVE COVER 20. L- BRACKET
11. GASKET (2 PLACES) 21. SCREW, LOCKWASHER,
12. ALLEN HEAD SCREW (8 PLACES) FLATWASHER (2 PLACES)
7855-BM-595A
Figure 7-23. Waveguide WIO/W66 Installation
7-51
(m) Install L-bracket (20) onto flange (19) and clamp (2)
with two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (18) and
two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (21).
(n) Reconnect flexible waveguide (8) to waveguide W66 (4)

using new gasket (5). (Tighten waveguide screws in
sequence per paragraph 7-12).
(5) Reconnect Electrical Cables to Rotary Joint. See figure

7-24 and perform the following steps:
(a) Reach through top access opening (1) in pedestal and

connect the following electrical cables:
1 Plug P9 ( 4) to connector J9.
2 Plug Pll (6) to connector Jll.
~ Plug P12 ( 5) to connector J12.
(b) Reach through side access opening and connect the

following electrical cables:
1 Plug P3 (9 ) to connector J3.
2 Plug P4 (14) to connector J4.
3 Plug P5 (13 ) to connector J5.
4 Plug P6 (ll ) to connector J6.
2 Plug P7 (10) to connector J7.
6 Plug P24 (7 ) to connector Jl on sensor resolver.
NOTE
Plug connections PI (12) and P2 (8) on bottom of
rotary joint are accessible through either side
access openings.
(c) Connect plug connections PI (12) and P2 (8) to

receptacles at bottom of rotary joint.
7-52
2
1
1.
.;A12
TOP ACCESS OPENING 6. PlUG P11 11. PlUGP6
PlUG P14 7. PLUG P24 12. PLUG P1
2.
PLUG P13 8. PLUG P2 13. PLUG PS
3.
".5. PLUG P9
~UGP12
9.
10.
PLUG P3
PLUG P7
14. PLUG P4
7641-Bf-S96B
Figure 7-24. Connecting Electrical Cables to Rotary Joint
7-53
(6) Plate Assembly Installation and External Cabling
Connection. See figure 7-25 and perform the following
steps:
(a) Assemble both halves of plate assembly (1).
(b) Install coverplate (2) and filler plate (6) with six
screws (3).
(c) Move plate assembly (1) against inboard surface of

flange (5).
(d) Install eight screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (4).

Tighten screws (4) until snug.
(e) Apply sealing compound around surfaces shown in

figure 7-25.
(f) Connect five external electrical cables (7) to their

respective receptacles on plate assembly (1).
7-54
SEALANT <::::.l,I,~!!';~~-l
AREAS
1. PLATE ASSEMBLY
2. COVERPLA TE
3. SCREW. LOCKWASHER. FLAT
WASHER (6 PLACES)
4. SCREW, LOCKWASHER. FLAT
WASHER (8 PLACES)
S. FLANGE (PART OF PEDESTAL)
6. FILLER ptA TE
7. EXTERNAL ELECTRICAL CABLE
(S PLACES)
Figure 7-25. Plate Assembly Installation and External Cabling

Connection
7-55
(7) Waveguide W7 Installation. See figure 7-26 and perform the
following steps:
(a) Remove protective covers (2 and 5).
(b) Install inboard flange (3) of waveguide W7 (6) to

waveguide W70 (1). Tighten eight captive screws (4) in
sequence per paragraph 7-12.
(c) Attach other end of waveguide W7 (6) to bracket (7) with

clamp (8).
(d) Remove protective cover (9).
(e) Connect flexible waveguide W5 (11) to outboard flange of

waveguide W7 (6). Tighten eight captive screws (10) in
sequence per paragraph 7-12.
7-56
11
4
10
P
o
o i2I 0
000
5
6
LEGEND
9
I, 1. WAVEGUIDE W70
,,~
2. PROTECTIVE coveR
!
~tJ
3. INBOARD FlANG;
WAVEGU (OF
IDEW7)
4. CAPTIVE SCR
PROTECTIV EW (8 PLACES)
5. E CeVER
6. WAVEGUIDE W7
8 7. BRACKET
8. CLAMP
9. PROTECTIVE CO
10. CAPTIVE SCREWVER
FLEXIBLE (8 PLACES)
11. WAVEGUIDE WS
7647-BF-59BB
Figure 7-26. Waveguide W7 Installat'J.on
7-57
(8) Juncti~n Box Reinstallation. See figure 7-27 and perform
the f~ iowing steps:
(a) Install junction box (3) on support brackets (2) and

tighten two captive screws (1).
(b) Remove the four bearing unloader jacks.

e. Follow-On Maintenance. Perform the following steps:
(1) Align encoder (Refer to paragraph 7-44.)
(2) Purge and pressurize waveguide network. (Refer to

paragraph 7-11.)
(3) Operate antenna and check for normal operation.
(4) Install access covers, as necessary.

(5) Tag and return defective rotary joint to supply for
disposition.
7-16. ENCODER AIAIIAIA4Al. The following instructions describe how
to remove and replace encoder AIAIIAIA4Al. Proceed as follows:

• Screwdriver, Phillips, No.3
• Screwdriver, common, normal-duty

paragraph 7-8.
7-58
3
,. CAPTIVE SCREW (2 PLACES)

2. SUPPORT BRACKET (2 PLACES)
3. JUNCTION BOX
7647-8F-S998
Figure 7-27. Junction Box Reinstallation
7-59
c. Removal Procedure. See figure 7-28 and perform the following
steps:
(1) Remove side access cover (1).
(2) Loosen two captive screws (2). Remove junction box (4)
and attached electrical cables from support brackets (3).
(3) Set junction box (4) aside, inside pedestal assembly.
(4) Remove electrical plug (5).

CAUTION
flexible coupling (6) to allow access to screw
(8). Instead, use handwheel on antenna drive
motor to turn flexible coupling.
NOTE
Key (9) used to loosen screw (8) in step below
is clipped to support bracket (3).
(5) Using key (allen wrench) (9), loosen screw (8).
CAUTION
To prevent damage to flexible coupling (6), if a
downward load is applied while clamp (7) is
still tight on shaft of encoder (12), be sure
screw (8) is loose enough for easy removal of
encoder.
(6) Loosen, but do not remove, four screws (10).
(7) While holding encoder (12), turn four cleats (11) until
rounded edge clears groove around encoder (12); then remove
encoder (12).
d. Replacement Procedure. See figure 7-28 and perform the
following steps:
(1) Slide replacement encoder (12) into its installed position.

Be sure shaft of encoder (12) engages into clamp (7).
(2) While holdinS encoder (12), turn four cleats (11) until
their rounded edge engages into groove around encoder (12).
(3) Tighten four screws (10).
(4) Using key (9), tighten screw (8). Clip key (9) to support
bracket (3) after use.
7-60
LEGEND
1. SIDE ACCESS COVER

2. CAPTIVE SCREW{2 PLACES)
••
4.
SUPPORT BRACKET (2 PLACES)
JUNCTION BOX
,. ELECTRICAL PLUG
6. FLEXIBLE COUPLING
~llyll
7. CLAMP
'"
••
9.
SCREW
KEY (ALLEN WRENCH)
. 10 : "'-"'-10
11. CLEAT (3 PLACES)
.
". ENCODER
7647-BF-600B
Figure 7-28. Encoder Removal and Replacement
7-61
(5) Connect electrical plug (5) to receptacle on bottom of
encoder (12).
(6) Perform the north mark alignment procedure located in the

alignment manual.
(7) Install junction box (4) onto support brackets (3) and
tighten two captive screws (2).
(8) Install side access cover (1), if required.
(2) Tag and return defective encoder to supply for disposition.
7-17. AMPLIFIER-DEMODULATOR AIAIIAIA4A2Al. The following
instructions describe how to remove and replace amplifier-demodulator
AIAIIAIA4A2Al. Proceed as follows:
• Pliers, electrical connector
• Tags, wire identification (2 required)
steps:
(2) Loosen two captive screws (2) and remove junction box (5).
(3) Tag and disconnect electrical plugs P22 (3) and P23 (4)
from junction box (5).
(4) Remove two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (8) and
carefully remove amplifier-demodulator (9) from junction
box (5).
(5) Remove six screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (6); then,
remove cover (7) from junction box (5).
following steps:
(1) Carefully install replacement amplifier-demodulator (9) in
junction box (5) until connectors mate. Push board firmly
into mating connector (10).
(2) Install two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (8).
7-62
~

2. CAPTIVE SCREW(2 PLACES)
3. ElECTRICAL PLUG, P22
4. ELECTRICAL PLUG, P23
/
S. JUNCTION BOX
FLAT WASHER (6 PLACES)
£ 7. COVER
B. SCREW, LOCKWASHER.
8 FLAT WASHER {2 PLACES}
9. AMPLIFIER-DEMODULATOR
10. CONNECTOR
7647-BF-601B
Figure 7-29. Amplifier-Demodulator Removal and Replacement
7-63/(7-64 blank)
(3) Install cover (7) with six screws, lockwashers, and flat
washer (6).
(4) Connect two electrical plugs P22 (3) and P23 (4) to their
respective receptacles, as tagged.
(5) Reinstall junction box (5) and tighten two captive

screws (6).
(6) Reinstall side access cover (1).
(2) Tag and return defective amplifier-demodulator to supply

for disposition.
7-18. SYNCHRO AIAIIAIA4A2Bl and B2. The following instructions

describe how to remove and replace synchro AIAIIAIA4A2Bl and B2.
Proceed as follows:
NOTE
Synchros Bl and B2 are mounted in identical
fashion. This procedure shows removal/
replacement of synchro Bl; however, the same
instructions apply to synchro B2.
a. Eguipment and Supplies Reguired. Obtain the following items:

• screwdriver, common, normal-duty

described in paragraph 7-8.
7-65
steps:
(2) Loosen two captive screws (2) and remove junction box (3)
along with attached cables. Set junction box (3) aside,
inside pedestal assembly.
CAUTION
flexible coupling (4) to allow access to screw
(8). Instead, use handwheel on antenna drive
motor to turn flexible coupling.
(3) Using key (allen wrench) (7), that is clipped to side of

support bracket (5), loosen screw (8).
CAUTION
To prevent damage to flexible coupling (4), be
sure coupling clamp (6) is loosened before
removing synchro. If a downward load is applied
while coupling clamp (6) is tight on shaft of
synchro, damage can occur to flexible coupling.
(4) Loosen (do not remove) three screws (10).
(5) While holding synchro (II), turn three cleats (9) so

rounded edges clear groove around synchro (11). Remove
synchro (11).

following steps:
(1) Slide replacement synchro (11) up through mounting bracket

(12) so shaft of synchro engages coupling clamp (6).
(2) While holding synchro (11) in place, turn cleats (9) until
their rounded edge engages into groove around synchro (11).
(3) Tighten three screws (10). Tighten screw (8).
(4) Reinstall junction box (3). Tighten two captive

screws (2).
(5) Reinstall side access cover (I), if required.
(2) Tag and return defective synchro(s) to supply for

disposition.
7-66
Voi,
(})
I (})
F
(})

3. JUNCTION BOX
4. FLEXIBLE COUPLING
s. SUPPORT BRACKET (2
PLACES)
6. COUPLING CLAMP
7. KEY (ALLEN WRENCH)
8. SCREW
9. CLEAT (3 PLACES)
11. SYNCHRO (B1 SHOWN ,B2
lD
ENTI(AL)
12. MOUNTING BRACKET
7647-BF-602B
Figure 7-30. Synchros Bl and B2 Removal and Replacement
7-67
7-19. SENSOR RESOLVER AIAIIAIA4B3. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace sensor resolver AIAIIAIA4B3.
Proceed as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Reguired. Obtain the following items:
• Key, socket head screw, 0.050 inch x 4 inches long

• Pliers, diagonal cutting
• Solder, resin core, SN60
• Soldering iron (or gun), 45 to 60 watts
• Tag, wire identification
• Ties, wire (2 required)
• Wire trimmer
c. Removal Procedure. See figure 7-31 and proceed as follows:
(2) Disconnect electrical plug P24 (3) from sensor

resol ver (2).
(3) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (5) from
base of cover (4).
(4) Remove four screws and washers (6) from receptacle end of
cover (4); then, remove cover.
NOTE
An assistant is required in steps (5) and (7)

below to turn handwheel on antenna drive motor
upon command from technician.
(5) Have assistant turn handwheel (on drive motor) until one of
the setscrews (9) lines up with access hole (8) in mounting
bracket (10). Signal assistant to stop further turning.
(6) Using key (allen wrench) (12), loosen (do not remove)
setscrew (9).
(7) Repeat above steps (5) and (6) for other setscrew (9).
(8) Loosen (do not remove) three screws (14) holding sensor
resolver (2) to mounting plate (11).
(9) While holding sensor resolver (2), turn each of three

cleats (15) until its rounded edge clears groove around
sensor resolver (2).
7-68
LEGEND
I. SIDE ACCESS COVER 8. ACCESS HOLE (2 PLACES)
2. SENSOR RESOLVER 9. SETSCREW (2 PLACES)
3. ELECTRICAL PLUG P24 10. MOUNTiNG BRACKET
4. COVER II. MOUNTiNG PLATE
5. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, 12. KEY (ALLEN WRENCH)
FLATWASHER (4 PLACES) 13. DRIVE SHAFT
6. SCREW, WASHER (4 PLACES) 14. SCREW (3 PLACE)
7. RECEPTACLE 15. CLEAT (3 PLACES)
7647- BM-6038
Figure 7-31. Sensor Resolver Removal and Replacement
7-69
(10) Carefully slide sensor resolver (2) out of drive
shaft (13).
(11) Tag and unsolder wires from pins on electrical

receptacle (7).
d. Replacement Procedure. See figure 7-31 and proceed as follows:
(1) On replacement sensor resolver (2), trim wires to 15

centimeters (about 6 inches). Solder wires to their
respective pins on receptacle (7), as tagged.
(2) Tie wires together at two points as shown in figure 7-31.
(3) Insert shaft on sensor resolver (2) into hole in drive

shaft (13); then, push sensor resolver firmly against
mounting plate (11).
(4) While holding sensor resolver (2) in place, turn each of

three cleats (15) so their rounded edge fits into groove
around resolver. Tighten screw (14) as each cleat (15) is
positioned.
NOTE
An assistant is required in step (5) below to
turn handwheel on antenna drive motor upon
command from technician.
(5) Have assistant turn handwheel (on drive motor) until one of
two setscrews (9) line up with access hole (8) in mounting
bracket (10). Signal assistant to stop further turning.
(6) Using key (allen wrench) (12), tighten setscrew (9).
(7) Repeat steps (5) and (6) above for other setscrew (9).
(8) Temporarily install cover (4) and receptacle (7) with

screws 5 and 6).
(9) Connec: :lectric plug P24 (3) to receptacle (7).
(10) Secure cover (4) with screws, lockwashers, and flat washers
(5 and 6 .•
(2) Tag and return defective sensor resolver to supply for

disposition. Reinstall side access cover (I), if required.
7-70
7-20. ANTENNA DRIVE MOTOR AIAIIA2Bl. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace antenna drive motor AIAIIA2Bl.
Proceed as follows:
• Extension, socket wrench, 5-inch, 3/8-inch drive

• Gasket, motor, PN 145C033HOI
• Handle, socket wrench ratchet, 3/8-inch drive
• Socket, 1/2-inch, 3/8-inch drive
• Wrench, torque, 0 to 68 newton-meters
b. Maintenance Preparation. Proceed as follows:
(1) Prepare antenna for maintenance as described in paragraph

7-8.
(2) Lower antenna array as described in paragraph 7-9.
7-71
steps:
(1) Disconnect electrical plug (6) from receptacle Jl on
antenna drive motor (1).
NOTE
support antenna drive motor (1) while technician
removes mounting bolts.
(2) While assistant supports antenna drive motor (1), remove

four bolts and washers (5). Remove antenna drive
motor (1).
(3) Remove and discard gasket (3).

following steps:
(1) Install new gasket (3) on mounting flange of gear case (4).
(2) Place antenna drive motor (1) into its installed position
on mounting flange of gearcase (4). [Be sure breather
vent (2) is pointing upward as shown in figure 7-32.]
NOTE
hold antenna drive motor (1) in position while
technician installs mounting bolts.
(3) While assistant holds antenna drive motor (1) in position,

install four bolts and washers (5).
(4) Using torque wrench, tighten bolts (5) between 54 and 64

newton-meters (40-48 foot-pounds).
(5) Connect electrical plug (6).

(1) Raise antenna array as described in paragraph 7-10.
(3) Tag and return defective antenna drive motor to supply for
disposition.
7-72
1. ANTENNA DRIVE MOTOR
2. BREATHER VENT
3. GASKET
4. GEARCASE
5. BOLT AND WASHER
(4 PLACES)
6. ELECTRICAL PLUG
2 3 4
/
~(j)
~ CD
1 10 ~~
@I
0
~
1) ----..;;:
"==-=.
~,
~\I
-_.,
--,.'.e @-----(l)
-~
gp:
~
7647-BF-604B
Figure 7-32. Antenna Drive Motor Removal and Replacement
7-73
7-21. VERTICAL SENSOR AIAIIA3Al. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace sensor AIAIIA3Al. Proceed as
follows:

• screwdriver, common, normal-duty
• Solder, rosin core, SN60
• Tags, wire identification (5 required)
steps:
( 1) Remove the following covers: top pedestal outer access

cover (1), top pedestal inner access cover (2), and side
pedestal access cover (3).
(2) Reach through side pedestal access opening and disconnect
electrical plug (5) from vertical sensor (4).
NOTE
When removing vertical sensor (4), exercise care
not to lose springs (9) recessed in bottom of
mounting plate (8).
(3) Reach through pedestal, loosen locking screw (6) and remove
three screws (7). Carefully remove vertical sensor (4)
along with three springs (9) from mounting pad (10).
NOTE
The remaining steps are to be performed in an
unobstructed work area. (See figure 7-33,
sheet 2.)
(4) Remove four screws and washers (16) from receptacle end of
cover (15).
(5) Remove four screws and washers (17) from base of
cover (15), and carefully separate cover (15) from mounting
plate (8).
(6) Tag and unsolder five wires from lugs on sensor body (12).
[Retain receptacle (14) with attached wires for
reinstallation on replacement vertical sensor (4).]
(7) Remove four screws and washers (13), and ground lug (18);
remove sensor body (12) from sensor cover (11).
7-74
5
LEGEND
I. TOP PEDESTAL OUTER ACCESS
COVER
2. TOP PEDESTAL INNER ACCESS
COVER
3. SIDE PEDESTAL ACCESS COVER
4. VERTICAL SENSOR
5. ELECTRIC PLUG
6. LOCKING SCREW
7. SCREW (3 PLACES)
9
S. MOUNTING PLATE
9. SPRING (3 PLACES)
10. MOUNTING PAD
4
7647-BF-60!5 C
Figure 7-33. Vertical Sensor Removal and Replacement (Sheet 1 of 2)
7-75
11
18 _ _ _ 13
o
0,,- ---14
14
LEGEND - ContinueG
15
II. SENSOR COVER
12. SENSQRBOOY
13. SCREW. WASHER (4 PLACES)
14. RECEPTACLE
15. COVER
16. SCREW, WASHER (4 PLACES)
17. SCREW, WASHER (4 PLACES)
)8. GROUNOLUG
7S47-BF-SOSB
Figure 7-33. Vertical Sensor Removal and Replacement (Sheet 2 of 2)
7-76
following steps:
(1) Insert replacement sensor body (12) into sensor cover (11).
Secure sensor to mounting plate (8) with four screws and
washers (13), and ground lug (18). Be sure to install
ground lug (18) between sensor body (12) and washer (13) as
shown in wiring diagram on figure 7-33.
(2) Solder five wires of receptacle (14) to their respective

lugs on replacement sensor. (See wiring diagram in figure
7-33).
(3) Install receptacle (14) inside cover (IS) with four screws
and washer (16).
(4) Install base of cover (IS) onto mounting plate (8) with
four screws and washers (17).
(S) Working through top access opening, install vertical

sensor (4) onto mounting pad (10) with three springs (9)
and screws (7).
(6) Working through side pedestal access opening, connect
electrical plug (S) to vertical sensor (4).
(2) Reinstall access covers (1, 2, and 3), if required.

(3) Tag and return defective vertical sensor to supply for
disposition.
7-22. +lS VOLT POWER SUPPLIES A2Al and A2A2. The following
instructions describe how to remove and replace +lS volt power
supplies A2Al and A2A2. Proceed as follows:

• Tags, wire identification
7-77
steps:
(1) Loosen seven clamps (1) and open cover (2) to its locked
position.
(2) Tag and disconnect electrical wires from terminal

strip (5).
(3) Loosen four captive screws (7) and carefully move +15 volt
power supply (3 or 4) outward just enough to allow access
to terminal strip (6).
NOTE
An assistant is required in step (4) below, to
hold power supply while technician disconnects
wires from terminal strip (6).
(4) While assistant holds power supply in position, tag and
disconnect wires from terminal strip (6).
(5) Move power supply (3 or· 4) away from enclosure panel (10).
(6) On underside of power supply (3 or 4), remove and retain
two mounting brackets (8) and four screws, lockwashers, and
flat washers (9).

following steps:
(1) Install two mounting brackets (8) onto underside of
replacement power supply (3 or 4) with four screws,
lockwashers, and flat washers (9).
NOTE
hold power supply while technician connects
wires to terminal strip (6).
(2) While assistant holds power supply (3 or 4), connect wires

to their respective terminals on terminal strip (6), as
tagged.
(3) Install power supply (3 or 4) onto enclosure panel (10) and
tighten four captive screws (7).
(4) Connect wires to their respective terminals on terminal
strip (5).
(5) Perform power supply alignment procedure as described in
paragraph 7-45.
(6) Close cover (2) and tighten seven clamps (1).
7-78
3
4
1. CLAMP ( 7 PLACES)
2.
COVER WER SUPPLY A 1
3.
+15-VOLTPO ERSUPPLYA2
4. ... 1S-VOL T POW
S. MINAL STRIP
10 / '
TER TRIP
6.
TERMINAL 5 W(4 PLACES)
7.
CAPTIVE SC:ERACKET (2
9 8. MOUNTiNG
PLACES) CKWASHER,
9.
SCREW, LO ER (4 PLACES)
FLAT WASH
10. EN CLOSURE PANEL
Figure 7-34. lies A2Al and A2A2

+15 Volt Power Sl~~ement
Removal and Rep
7-79
(2) Tag and return defective power supply to supply for

disposition.
7-23. RF RECEIVERS A3Al THROUGH A3A7. The following instructions

describe how to remove and replace RF receivers A3Al through A3A7.
Proceed as follows:

• Wrench, open-end, 9/32-inch
• Wrench, open-end, 3lB-inch
described in paragraph 7 B.
NOTE
RF receivers A3Al through A3A7 are mounted in
identical fashion. Removal and replacement
instructions are the same for all units.

steps:
(1) Loosen nine captive screw clamps (1) and open cover (2).
(2) Tag and disconnect four coaxial cables (3) at jacks Jl, J2,
J3, and J4 on RF receiver (5).
(3) Loosen two captive screws (4) and remove RF receiver (5)
from enclosure panel (6).

following steps:
(1) Install replacement RF receiver (5) onto enclosure panel
(6) and tighten two captive screws (4j.
(2) Install four coaxial cables to their respective jacks on RF
receiver (5), as tagged.
(3) Close cover (2) and secure cover with nine captive screw
clamps (1).
(1) Operate. antenna and. check for normal operation.
7-BO
1. CAPTIVE SCREW CLAMP (9 PLACES)
2. COVER
3. COAXIAL CABLE (4 PLACES)
S. RF RECEIVER (7 PLACES)
6. ENCLOSURE PANel
7647-BF-60B8
Figure 7-35. RF Receivers A3Al Through A3A7 Removal and Replacement
7-81
(2) Tag and return defective RF receiver to supply for
disposition.
7-24. LOW-NOISE AMPLIFIER A3A8. The following instructions describe

how to remove and replace low-noise amplifier (LNA) A3A8. Proceed as
follows:

Screwdriver, common, normal-duty
Tags, wire identification
Wrench, open-end, 9/32-inch
b. Preliminary Safety Precautions. Prepare antenna for

maintenance as described in paragraph 7-8.

steps:
(1) Loosen nine captive screw clamps (1) and open cover (2).
(2) Tag and disconnect four coaxial cables (3) from connectors
Jl, J2, J3, and J4 on low-noise amplifier (4).
(3) Loosen two captive screws (5) and remove low-noise

amplifier (4).

following steps:
(1) Install replacement low-noise amplifier (4) onto enclosure

panel (6) and tighten two captive screws (5).
(2) Connect four coaxial cables (3) to their respective jacks

on amplifier (4), as tagged.
(3) Close cover (2) and secure nine captive screw clamps (1).
(2) Tag and return defective low-noise amplifier to supply for

disposition.
7-82
2
1. CAPTIVE SCREW CLAMPS (9 PLACES)

2. COVER
4. LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
6. ENCLOSURE PANEL
7647-8F-6098
Figure 7-36. Low-Noise Amplifier A3A8 Removal and Replacement
7-83
7-25. ±12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY A3A9. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace ±12 volt power supply A3A9.
Proceed as follows:

steps:
(1) Loosen nine clamps (1) and open cover (2).
(2) Remove plastic terminal cover (3).

(3) Tag and disconnect electrical wires from terminal board
(front) (4).
NOTE
Terminal board (bottom) (5) is located at bottom
left-hand corner of ±12 volt power supply (7).
A plastic cover (3), similar to the one used in
above step (2), is installed on top of terminal
board.
(4) Remove plastic cover from terminal board (bottom) (5). Tag
and disconnect wires connected to terminal board (5).
(5) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers and two
holddown clamps (6).
(6) Remove ±12 volt power supply (7) from enclosure panel (8).
following steps:
(1) Install replacement ±12 volt power supply (7) onto

enclosure panel (8) with four screws, lockwashers, and flat
washers and two holddown clamps (6).
boards (4) and (5), as tagged. Install plastic terminal
covers (3).
(3) Perform ±12 volt power supply alignment procedure as
(4) Close cover (2) and tighten clamps (1).
7-84
1 2
1. CLAMP (9 PLACES)
2. COVER
3. PLASTIC TERMINAL COVER (2 PLACES)
4. TERMINAL BOARD (FRONT)
5. TERMINAL BOARD (BOTTOM~
(NOTSHOWN)
6. HOLDDOWN CLAMP (2 PLACES)
7. .±..12·VOLT POWER SUPPLY
8. ENCLOSURE PANEL
764 7-BF-61 DB
Figure 7-37. ±12 Volt Power Supply A3A9 Removal and Replacement
7-85
(2) Tag and return defective ±12 volt power supply to supply
for disposition.
7-26. VARIABLE COAXIAL ATTENUATORS A3AIOAI AND A3AIOA2. The

following instructions describe how to remove and replace variable
coaxial attenuators A3AIOAI and A3AIOA2. Proceed as follows:

steps:
NOTE
Variable coaxial attenuators A3AIOAI and A3AIOA2
are mounted in identical fashion. Instructions
for their removal and replacement are the same.
(2) Tag and disconnect wires at terminal board (13).

(3) Tag and disconnect coaxial cables at six connecting
points (5) on amplifier panel (3).
(4) Loosen two captive screws (9) and remove amplifier

panel (3).
NOTE
If removing variable coaxial attenuator A3AIOAI
(6), do step (5) below; then, skip to step (7).
If removing variable coaxial attenuator A3AIOA2
(12), go directly to step (6).
(5) Disconnect coaxial cable W23 (8) at connector Jl (7).

(6) Disconnect couplings CP2 (10) and CPl (11) from Jl and J2
connectors, respectively.
7-86
11
10
LEGE NO
1. ClAMP (9 PLACES)
2. COVER
,. AMPLIFIER PANEL
4. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, FLAT 9
WASHER(4 PLACES)
5. COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTING POINT
(TYPICAL- 6 PLACES)
,. VARIABLE COAXIAL ATTENUATOR
A3A1DA1
7. CONNECTORJ1 (TYPICAL)
B. COAXIAL CABLE W23
••
10.
CAPTIVE SCREW(2 PLACES)
COUPLING CP2
11. COUPLING CP1
12. VARIABLE COAXIAL ATTENUATQR
A]A10A2
13. TERMINAL BOARD
14. ENCLOSURE PANEL
7647-BF-611B
Figure 7-38. Variable Coaxial Attenuators A3AlOAl and A3AlOA2

Removal and Replacement
7-87
(7) On opposite side of amplifier panel (3), remove four
screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (4). Remove variable
coaxial attenuator (6) or (12).

following steps:
(1) Install replacement variable coaxial attenuator (6) or (12)
onto amplifier panel (3) with four screws, lockwashers, and
flat washers (4).
(2) Connect coaxial cable W23 (8) or couplings CP2 (10) and CPl
(11) to their respective connector(s).
(3) Install amplifier panel (3) onto enclosure panel (14).

Tighten two captive screws (9).
(4) Connect six coaxial cables to their respective connecting

points (5) on amplifier panel (3), as tagged.
board (13), as tagged.
(6) Perform variable coaxial attenuator alignment procedure as

(7) Close cover (1) and tighten nine clamps (2).

(2) Tag and return defective attenuator to supply for

disposition.
7-88
7-27. S-BAND RF AMPLIFIER A3AIOA3. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace S-band RF amplifier A3AIOA3.
Proceed as follows:

• Solder, resin core, SN60
• Nutdriver set

paragraph 7 8.
7-89
steps:
(2) Tag and disconnect wires at terminal board (6).
(3) Tag and disconnect coaxial cables at six connecting

points (4) on amplifier panel (5).
(4) Loosen two captive screws (3) and remove amplifier

panel (5).
(5) On S-band RF amplifier (11), tag and unsolder wires at
ground terminal (9) and power-in terminal (10).
(6) Disconnect coaxial cable (8).
(7) Remove four screws, washers, and nuts (7); then, remove
S-band RF amplifier (11) from amplifier panel (5).

following steps:
(1) Install replacement S-band RF amplifier (11) on amplifier

panel (5) with four screws, washers, and nuts (7).
(2) Connect coaxial cable (8).
(3) Solder wires to ground terminal (9) and power-in

terminal (10), as tagged.
(4) Install amplifier panel (5) into enclosure and tighten two
captive screws (3).
(5) Connect coaxial cables to six connecting points (4) on
amplifier panel (5).

board (6), as tagged.

(2) Tag and return defective amplifier to supply for

disposition.
7-90
5
1. COVER
2. CLAMP (9 PLACES)
4. COAXIAL CABLE
(TYPICAL·6 PLACES)
,~
S. AMPLIFIER PANEL
6. TERMINAL BOARD
7. SCREW, WASHER. AND NUT
(4 PLACES)
8. COAXIAL CABLE
9. GROUND TERMINAL
10. POWER-IN TERMINAL 11
.'
11.
,-~ '~
7647-8F-61Z8
Figure 7-39. S-Band RF Amplifier A3AIOA3 Removal and Replacement
7-91
7-28. MONITOR AND CONTROL BOARD A3All. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace monitor and control board A3All.
Proceed as follows:
• screwdriver, Phillips, No. 2

paragraph 7 8.
steps:
(2) Loosen (do not remove) two screws, lockwashers, and flat
washers (3).
(3) Swing two retainers (4) (one up and one down) away from
edge of monitor and control board (5).
(4) Carefully pull monitor and control board (5) out from
holders (6).

following steps:
(1) Carefully install replacement monitor and control board (5)
onto holders (6).
(2) Swing two retainers (4) (one down and one up) to cover edge
of monitor and control board (5).
(3) Tighten two screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (3).
(4) Perform monitor and control board alignment procedure per

paragraph 7-48.
(2) Tag and return defective monitor and control board to

supply for disposition.
7-92
1. COVER
2. CLAMP (9 PLACES)
WASHER (2 PLACES)
4. RETAINER (2 PLACES)
5. MONITOR AND CONTROL BOARO
6. HOLDER (2 PLACES)
7. GUIDE (4 PLACES)
8. CONNECTOR (2 PLACES)
7647-BF-613B
Figure 7-40. Monitor and control Board A3All Removal and Replacement
7-93
7-29. STALO POWER DIVIDER BOARD A3A12. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace STALO power divider board A3A12.
Proceed as follows:
• Screwdriver, Phillips, No. 2

paragraph 7 8.
steps:
(2) Tag and disconnect eight coaxial cables connected to STALO

power divider board (4).
(3) Loosen two captive screws (3) and remove STALO power
divider board (4).
(4) Remove four screws, lockwashers, flat washers, nuts (6),

and spacers (8); then, remove angles (5 and 7) from STALO
power divider (4). Retain angles (5 and 7) along with
attaching hardware (6 and 8) for installation on
replacement board.

following steps:
(1) Reinstall angles (5 and 7) on replacement STALO power

divider board (4) with four screws, lockwashers, flat
washers, nuts (6), and spacers (8).
(2) Install STALO power divider board (4) and tighten two
captive screws (3).
(3) Reconnect eight coaxial cables on STALO power divider board

(4), as tagged.

(2) Tag and return defective board to supply for disposition.
7-94
4 1. COVER
2. CLAMP (9 PLACES)
4. STALQ POWER DIVIDER BOARD
5. LOWER ANGLE
WASHER, NUT (4 PLACES)
7. UPPER ANGLE
8. SPACER (4 PLACES)
7647_BF_614B
Figure 7-41. STALO Power Divider Board A3A12 Removal and Replacement
7-95
7-30. 6-dB ATTENUATORS A3ATI THROUGH A3AT12. The following
instructions describe how to remove and replace 6-dB attenuators
A3ATI through A3AT12. Proceed as follows:

• Wrenches, open-end, 5/16-inch (2 required)
• Wrenches, open-end, 3/B-inch (2 required)
paragraph 7-B.

steps:

NOTE
There are four rows of attenuator/detector
assemblies. Each assembly contains three
attenuators (6) and one diode detector (7).
(2) Tag and disconnect coaxial cable (3) at each end of

attenuator/detector assembly (4) to be worked on.
(3) Loosen clamp (5) and slide out attenuator/detector

assembly (4).
(4) Disassemble attenuator/detector assembly (4) and remove

defective attenuator (6) or detector (7).

following steps:
(1) Assemble attenuator/detector assembly (4) using replacement

attenuator (6).
(2) Slide attenuator/detector assembly (4) through clamp (5)

into proper position. Tighten clamp (5).
(3) Reconnect coaxial cable (3) at each end of attenuator/

detector assembly (4), as tagged.
(4) Close cover (1) and secure nine clamps (2).
7-96
1. COVER
2. CLAMP (9 PLACES)
3. COAXIAL CABLE CONNECTION
4. ATTENUATORIDETECTOR
ASSEMBLY
5. CLAMP
6. ATTENUATOR(3 PLACES)
7. DETECTOR
7647-BF-61SB
Figure 7-42. 6-dB Attenuators A3ATI Through A3AT12

7-97
(2) Tag and return defective attenuator to supply for

disposition.
7-31. RADOME A4Al. The following instructions describe how to

remove and replace radome A4Al. proceed as follows:
• Adhesive, rubber, MIL-A-5092, type II, I-liter

(approximately 1 quart)
• Brush, sash, Fed Spec H-B-00491
• Gasket, radome, PN ID16637HOl
• Gasket, filter, PN 125B314HOI
• Gloves, Fed Spec ZZ-G-381
• Goggles, safety, Fed Spec GGG-G-513
• Sealant, MIL-S-8802, type I, class B-l/2
• Trichloroethane, inhibited, MIL-T-81533, 4 liters
(approximately 1 gallon)
• Wrench, combination, 7/16-inch
b. Maintenance Preparation. Perform the following steps:
(1) Prepare antenna for maintenance per paragraph 7-8.
(2) Lower antenna array per paragraph 7-9.

steps:
CAUTION
The radome (1) or supporting brackets can be
damaged if any extra weight is applied.
Therefore, do not stand or climb on radome (1).
(1) Remove sealant from perimeter of radome (1).
(2) Remove 164 screws and washers (8) from top and bottom of
radome (1).
(3) Remove 78 screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and nuts (2)

from sides of radome (1).
(4) Mark radome (1) top and bottom to indicate way radome is
oriented on array (7).
7-98
1
1. RAOOME
2. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, FLAT
3. GASKET (BOTH SIDES)
4. SIDE SUPPORT (2 PLACES)
S. FILLER (2 PLAC.ES)
6. GASKET (SUPPORT ANGLE)(TOP.
BOnOM)
7. ARRAY (REF.) 7---,.; 4
8. SCREW. WASHER (164 PLAC.ES)
7647-BF-616B
Figure 7-43. Radome A4Al Removal and Replacement
7-99
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, four assistants are

required to lift and handle radome (1) since the
radome (1) weighs about 55 kilograms (120
pounds).
(5) Working with assistants, lift radome (1) off of antenna

array (7).
(6) Inspect gaskets (3 and 6) for damage. If damaged, replace

gasket(s) using the following procedure; otherwise, go to
replacement procedure in paragraph d.
WARNING
Trichloroethane, MIL-T-81533, is toxic to skin,

eyes, and respiratory tract. To prevent
personal injury from trichloroethane, skin and
eye protection- is required. Avoid repeated or
prolonged contact. Good general ventilation is
normally required.
(a) Remove gasket (3 and/or 6) and clean metal surface of

radome side support (4) and filler (5) with trichloro-
ethane and a lint-free cloth. Allow surface to air dry
for about 10 minutes.
WARNING
Adhesive, MIL-A-5092, type II, is toxic to skin,

personal injury from adhesive, skin and eye
protection is required. Avoid repeated or
normally required.
(b) Using a brush, apply a uniform coat of adhesive on metal

surfaces (4 and 5) and underside of replacement gasket (3
and/or 6). (Only apply adhesive to metal area to be
covered by gasket.)
(c) Allow adhesive to dry for about 5 to 10 minutes.

(Adhesive should feel tacky, but should not transfer onto
finger.) If adhesive dries out, wipe adhesive with
trichloroethane and a lint-free cloth to make adhesive
tacky again.
7-100
following steps:
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, four assistants are

required to lift and handle radome (1) since the
radome (1) weighs about 55 kilograms (120
pounds).
(1) Working with assistants, lift radome (1) onto array (7) and
orient radome to line up with screw holes. (Be sure to
take note of markings as to top and bottom that were made
in removal steps.)
(2) Starting on sides of radome (1), loosely install screws,

lockwashers, flat washers, nuts (2), and screws and
washers (8) around radome perimeter.
(3) Starting at center of each side, tighten screws (2),

working towards top and bottom of radome (1). (Both sides
are to be tightened simultaneously.)
(4) Starting at center of top and bottom, tighten screws (8)

working toward the sides of radome (1). (Both top and
bottom are to be tightened simultaneously.)
WARNING
Sealant, MIL-S-8802, is toxic to skin, eyes, and

respiratory tract. To prevent personal injury
from sealant, skin and eye protection is
required. Avoid repeated or prolonged contact.
Good general ventilation is normally required.
(5) Apply sealant (MIL-S-8802) around radome (1).
(6) Raise antenna array per paragraph 7-10.
e. Follow-On Maintenance. None.
7-32. IFF ANTENNA (P/O A5). The following instructions describe how
to remove and replace the IFF antenna (P/O A5). Proceed as follows:
• Extension, socket wrench, 3/8-inch drive

• Handle, socket wrench, ratchet, 3/8-inch drive
• Socket, socket wrench, 9/16-inch, 3/8-inch drive
7-101
(3) Install pin in handwheel of drive motor.

steps:
(1) Tag and disconnect coaxial cables (1 and 2).
(2) Install loose coaxial cables (1 and 2) onto stowage

receptacles (3).
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, use two persons to

lift and handle IFF antenna since the IFF
antenna weighs about 36 kilograms (80 pounds).
(3) While assistant supports IFF antenna (4), loosen four

captive bolts (6); then, lift antenna off alignment
pins (5).
(4) If IFF antenna (4) is to be replaced with a new unit,

remove and retain backfill radiator (7) per paragraph 7-34.

following steps:
NOTE
If installing a new replacement IFF antenna (4),

go to step (1); otherwise, go to step (2).
(1) Install backfill radiator (7), previously retained in

removal procedure above. (Refer to paragraph 7-34.)
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, use two persons to

lift and handle IFF antenna since the IFF
antenna weighs about 36 kilograms (80 pounds).
(2) Working with assistant, place IFF antenna (4) into its
installed position. Be sure alignment pins (5) engage into
base of antenna.
(3) While assistant supports IFF antenna (4), tighten four

captive bolts (6).
7-102
1. COAXIAL CABLE (W1091)
3. STOWAGE RECEPTACLE (2 PLACES)
4. IFF ANTENNA
S. ALIGNMENT PIN
6. CAPTIVE BOLT{4PLACES)
7. BACKfiLL RADIATOR
7647-BF-617B
Figure 7-44.
IFF Antenna Removal and Replacement
7-103
(4) Disconnect coaxial cables (1 and 2) from stowage
receptacles (3) and reconnect them to receptacles Jl and J2
on IFF antenna (4), as tagged.

(2) Tag and return defective antenna to supply for disposition.
7-33. DUPLEXER A5Al. The following instructions describe how to
remove and replace duplexer A5Al. Proceed as follows:
(3) Install pin in handwheel of drive motor.
steps:
(1) Tag and disconnect coaxial cables (1 and 2).
(2) Connect coaxial cables (1 and 2) onto stowage
receptacles (3).
(4) Behind duplexer (8), loosen connectors PI (5) and P2 (6).
(5) Remove eight screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and
nuts (7); then, remove duplexer (8) from bracket (9).
following steps:
(1) Position duplexer (8) so that connectors (5 and 6) mate
with jacks Jl (10) and J2 (11). Start connections; do not
tighten completely at this time.
(2) Install eight screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and

nuts (7).
7-104
LEGEND
1. COAXIAL CABLE (W1091) /'

:1
3. STOWAGE RECEPTACLE
(2 PLACES)
5. CONNECTOR (P1)
".
7.
CONNECTOR (P2)
SCREW, LOCKWASHER, fLAT
8. DUPlEXER
9. BRACKET
10. JACK(J1)
11. JACK (J2)
7641-BF-618B
Figure 7-45. Duplexer A5Al Removal and Replacement
7-105
(3) Tighten connectors (5 and 6).
(4) Connect coaxial cables (I, 2, and 4) to their respective
jacks.

(2) Tag and return defective duplexer to supply for

disposition.
7-34. BACKFILL RADIATOR A6. The following instructions describe how
to remove and replace backfill radiator A6. Proceed as follows:


steps:
(2) Remove six screws, lockwashers, flat washer, and nuts (2).
Remove backfill radiator (3).

following steps:
(1) Install replacement backfill radiator (3) onto support
brackets (4) with six screws, lockwashers, flat washers,
and nuts (2).

(2) Tag and return defective backfill radiator to supply for

disposition.
7-106
2. SCREW,lOCKWASHER, FlATWASHER,
NUT(6 PLACES)
3. BACKFILL RADIATOR
4. SUPPORT BRACKET
7647-BF-6198
Figure 7-46. Backfill Radiator A6 Removal and Replacement
7-107
7-35. OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNA. The following instructions describe
how to remove and replace the omnidirectional antenna. Proceed as
follows:


steps:
(1) Disconnect coaxial cable (2) from omnidirectional
antenna (1).
(2) Connect coaxial cable (2) to stowage receptacles (11).

(3) Pullout pin (4) and lift out antenna (1), with attached
mast (3), from holder (5).
(4) Disconnect coaxial cable (9) from base of antenna (1).
(5 Remove four screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and

nuts (10). Remove antenna (1) from support bracket (7).
NOTE
If bandpass filter (8) is to be replaced,

perform steps (6) and (7); otherwise, go to
replacement procedure in paragraph d.
(7) Remove four screws, washers, and self-locking nuts (6).

Remove bandpass filter (8).

following steps:
NOTE
If bandpass filter (8) was removed, perform

steps (1) and (2); otherwise, go directly to
step (3).
(1) Install replacement bandpass filter (8) onto support
bracket (7) with four screws, washers, and nuts (6).
7-108
1~
~10
~ o
i
!J..<ill!Q
1. OMNIDIRECTIONAL ANTENNA
2. COAXIAL CABLE (Wl 060)
3. MAST
4. PIN
5. HOLDER
6. SCREW, WASHER. SELF·LOCKING
NUT (4 PLACES)
7. SUPPORT BRACKET
8. BANDPASS FilTER
10. SCREW, LOCKWASHER. fLAT
WASHER. NUT (4 PLACES)
11. STOWAGE RECEPTACLE
8 7647-BF-620B
Figure 7-47. Omnidirectional Antenna Removal and Replacement
7-109/(7-110 blank)
(2) Connect coaxial cable (9) to jack J2 on filter (8).
(3) Install antenna (1) on support bracket (7) with four

screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and nuts (10).
(4) Connect other end of coaxial cable (9) to jack J3 on base

of omnidirectional antenna (1).
(5) Install antenna assembly (1), including mast (3), into

holder (5); then, insert pin (4).
(6) Disconnect coaxial cable (2) from stowage receptacle (11).
(7) Connect coaxial cable (2) to jack Jl on bandpass

filter (8).
(8) Raise antenna per paragraph 7-10.
(2) Tag and return defective omnidirectional antenna to supply

for disposition.
7-36. ELECTRONIC SWITCH DIODES. The following instructions describe

how to remove and replace electronic switch diodes CRI through CR4.
Proceed as follows:
• Sealant, MIL-S-22473, grade JV

• Trichloroethane, Fed Spec O-T-620, type II

paragraph 7-8.
7-111
steps:
CAUTION
To prevent damage to equipment, center of diode

holder (1) must be held stationary while
loosening the knurled cap (2).
(1) While holding center of diode holder (1), unscrew knurled

cap (2) from receptacle (4).
(2) Unscrew and remove diode (3) from diode holder (1).
following steps:
WARNING
Trichloroethane, MIL-T-81533, is toxic to skin,

personal injury from trichloroethane, skin and
eye protection is required. Avoid repeated or
normally required.
(1) Screw replacement diode (3) into diode holder (1).
(2) Clean threads with trichloroethane and apply sealant,

MIL-S-22473, around threads of receptacle (4).
CAUTION
To prevent damage to equipment, center of diode

holder (1) must be held stationary while
tightening the knurled cap (2).
(3) Install diode holder (1) on receptacle (4). Tighten

knurled cap (2) fingertight.

(2) Tag and return defective diode(s) to supply for

disposition.
7-112
HOLD CENTER OF OIODE
HOLOER STATIONARY WHILE
TIGHTENING OR LOOSENING
KNURLED CAP.
TYPICAL
1. DIODE HOLDER 4 PLACES
2. KNURLED CAP
3. DIODE
4. RECEPTACLE
7647~BF·621 B
Figure 7-48. Electronic Switch Diodes Removal and Replacement
7-113
7-37. LOW-NOISE AMPLIFIERS A7Al THROUGH A7All. The following
instructions describe how to remove and replace low-noise amplifiers
A7Al through A7All. Proceed as follows:


paragraph 7-8.

steps:
NOTE
Removal and replacement instructions are
identical for each of the 11 low-noise
amplifiers.
(I) Loosen eight captive screws (I) and remove cover (2).
(2) Loosen coaxial connection (Jl-to-J3) between low-noise

amplifier (4) and combiner (5).
(3) Disconnect coaxial cables at jacks J2, J3, and J4 on low-

noise amplifier (4).
(4) Loosen two captive screws (3) and remove low-noise

amplifier (4).
following steps:
(I) Install replacement low-noise amplifier (4) in position to

allow connection between Jl on amplifier and J3 on combiner
(5). (Do not tighten connection at this time.)
(2) Tighten two captive screws (3).
(3) Tighten Jl-to-J3 connection, previously mated in step (I).
(4) Connect coaxial cables to J2, J3, and J4 on low-noise

amplifier (4).
(5) Install cover (2) and tighten eight captive screws (I).
(I) Operate antenna and check for normal operation.

(2) Tag and return defective amplifier to supply for
disposition.
7-114
2...--1
J1_
(REF)
2. COVER
3. CAPTiVE SCREW(2 PLACES)
4. LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (LNA)
(11 PLACES)
5. COMBINER (11 PLACES)
TYPICAL
11 PLACES
7647-BF-622B
Figure 7-49. Low-Noise Amplifiers A7Al Through A7All

7-11S
7-38. 2:1 MATRIX COMBINERS A7A15 THROUGH A7A25. The following
instructions describe how to remove and replace 2:1 matrix combiners
°A7A15 through A7A25. Proceed as follows:

• Wrench, socket, 7/16-inch, 3/8-inch drive
• Extension, 8-inch, 3/8-inch drive
• Ratchet, handle, 3/8-inch drive

paragraph 7-8.

steps:
(1) Remove low-noise amplifier (LNA) (10) ]oLning affected 2:1

matrix combiner (9) per paragraph 7-37.
(2) Disconnect cables from J2 through J4 on remaining low-noise

amplifiers (LNAs) (10).
(3) Check quick-release pins (1 and 3) are in place at three

locations on matrix combiner assembly (2).
(4) Remove two bolts, lockwashers, and flat washers (4) from
each of four attaching points around matrix combiner
assembly (2).
(5) Pullout quick-release pin (3) from lower right-hand side

of matrix combiner assembly (2).
(6) Swing open matrix combiner assembly (2).
(7) From back of frame (6), remove two screws, lockwashers, and
flat washers (5) holding matrix combiner (9) to frame.
(8) Loosen connectors (7 and 8) and remove matrix combiner (9).

following steps:
(1) Install replacement matrix combiner (9) in place on

frame (6) and align connectors (7 and 8) with their
respective jacks on the 18 x 18 matrix assembly. [Do not
tighten connectors (7 and 8) at this time.]
(2) Secure matrix combiner (9) to frame (6) with two screws,
lockwashers, and flat washers (5).
(3) Tighten connectors (7 and 8) finger tight.
7-116
1. QUICK·RELEASE PIN (LEFT.HAND 6. FRAME
TYPICAL
SIDE)(2 PLACES) 7. CONNECTOR (J2)
11 PLACES
2. MATRIX COMBINER ASSEMBLY 8. CONNECTOR(J1)
3. QUICK-RELEASE PIN (RIGHT·HANO 9. MATRIXCOMBINER(11 PLACES)
SIDE) 10. LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (LNA)
4. BOLT, LOCKWASHER, FLAT WASHER (11 PLACES)
(4 PLACES)
S. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, FLAT WASHER
(2 PLACES) 7647·BF·623A
Figure 7-50. 2:1 Matrix Combiners A7A15 Through A7A25

7-117
(4) Install low-noise amplifier (LNAs) (10) per paragraph 7-37.
(Do not connect coaxial cables to J2 through J4 now.)
(5) Close matrix combiner assembly (2) and insert quick-release
pin (3).
(6) Secure matrix combiner assembly (2) with two screws, lock-
washers, and flat washers (4) at the four attaching points.
(7) Connect all coaxial cables to their respective connectors

(J2 through J4) on low-noise amplifiers (LNAs) (10).
(8) Install LNA cover, previously removed in paragraph 7-37.

(2) Tag and return defective combiner(s) to supply for
disposition.
7-39. 18 x 18 MATRICES A12 AND A13. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace 18 x 18 matrices A12 and A13.
Proceed as follows:

• Wrench set, socket, 3/8-inch drive
paragraph 7-8.
c. Removal Procedure. This procedure requires two assistants to

aid the technician in handling the matrix during its removal and
installation. See figure 7-51 and perform the following steps:
(1) Disconnect coaxial cables from matrix assembly (5) as

follows:
(a) Loosen eight captive screws (1) and remove LNA cover (2).
(b) On each of 11 low-noise amplifiers (3), disconnect three

coaxial cables (4).
(c) Between both sections of matrix assembly (5), tag and

disconnect both sets of coaxial cables (6).
(d) On left-hand side of matrix assembly (5), tag and

disconnect 36 coaxial cables (7).
7-118
1~~
2---.J.J ~ I
~ i:
I '!
I i
,
1. CAPTIVE SCREW (8 PLACES) 7. COAXIAL CABLE (36 PLACES)

2. .LNA COVER 8. COAXIAL CABLE
3. LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER (11 PLACES) 9. COUPLER
4. COAXIAL CABLES (3 PLACES) 10. COAXIAL CABLE
5. MATRIX ASSEMBLY 11. COAXIAL CABLE
6. COAXIAL CABLE (2 PLACES) 12. COAXIAL CABLE
7647·BF·624A
Figure 7-51. 18 X 18 Matrices A7A12 and A7A13

Removal and Replacement (Sheet 1 of 4)
7-ll9
14
LEGEND ~ Continued
,L
,
13. QUICK-RELEASE PIN (2 PLACES)
",
..,.., , ."
14. BOLT. LOCKWASHER. FLAT WASHER
(4 PLACES) Q,', .,.. :
15.
16.
QUICK-RELEASE PIN
RESTRAINT CABLE (WITH ATTACHING
tIi!!
<>i
.,.. , ;
HARDWARE) (2 PLACES)
!
'" ,
Q,' •,
17. PIVQTBRACKET (2 PLACES) ,i •
i,
'"~f •!
., i
...
'" ,
'. ...
I
"
7647-BF-625A

7-120.
18
....
..
. ..
•
...
.... , /
:::0
~
'
.[ .. V"'
~
22
) TYPICAL
11 PLACES
LEGEND· Continued
18. MATRIX COMBINER ASSEMBLY

19. SCREW.LOCKWASHER,fLAT
WASHER (4 PLACES)
20. COMBINER (11 PLACES)
21. CONNECTOR{2 PLACES)
WASHER. NUT (3 PLACES)
7647-BF-626A

7-121
ALTHOUGH THE 18 X 18 MATRIX ASSY'S ARE
INTERCHANGEABLE, THE COAXIAL CABLE
HOOK·UPIS DIFFERENT FOR EACH. THE
18 X 18 MATRIX ASSY DESIGNATED A 12
IS ADJACENT TO ARRAY.
32
LEGEND· Continued
23. SCREW,LOCKWASHER, FLAT 31. SUPPORT ANGLE, TOP

WASHER(4 PLACES) 32. COUPLER
24. SUPPORT ANGLE, TOP 33. SCiUW, LOCKWASHER, FLAT
25. MATRIX PANEL A12 WASHER (4 PLACES)
26. MATRIXPANELA13 34. SUPPORT ANGLE. BonOM
27. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, FLAT 35. SHIM
WASHER (4 PLACES) 36. BonOM HINGE BRACKET
28. SUPPORT BRACKET, TOP 37. SCREW,lOCKWASHER, FLAT
29. SHIM WASHER (4 PLACES)
30. SCREW, LOCKWASHER, FLAT 38. SUPPORT ANGLE, BonOM
WASHER(4 PLACES) 39. SCREW,lOCKWASHER, FLAT
WASHER (4 PLACES)
7647-BF-627A

7-122
(e) On top left-hand corner of matrix assembly (5), tag and
disconnect coaxial cables (S and 10) from coupler (9).
(f) On top of matrix assembly (5), disconnect coaxial cables

(11 and 12).
(g) Dress and tie all loose coaxial cables clear of matrix
assembly (5).
(2) Remove matrix assembly (5) from antenna as follows (see

figure 7-51, sheet 2):
(a) Check that quick-release pins (13 and 15) are installed
at three, locations around matrix assembly (5).
(b) Remove bolts, lockwashers, and flat washers (14) from

four attaching points around matrix assembly (5).
(c) Pullout quick-release pin (15); then, swing open matrix

assembly (5).
(d) Remove two restraint cables (16).
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, two assistants are
required in step (e) below to assist in handling
the matrix assembly (5) during its removal.
(e) While both assistants support matrix assembly (5), pull

out both quick-release pins (13); then, carefully slide
matrix assembly (5) from pivot brackets (17) and clear of
antenna.
(3) Disassemble matrix assembly (5) from matrix combiner

frame (IS) as follows (see figure 7-51, sheet 3):
(a) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (19).
(b) Remove three screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and

nuts (22).
(c) Loosen both connectors (21) on each of 11 combiners (20).
(d) Separate matrix combiner assembly (IS) from matrix

assembly (5).
(4) Separate matrix panel A12 (25) from matrix panel A13 (26)
(figure 7-51, sheet 4) as follows:
(a) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (23 and
39) and take off support angles (24 and 3S).
7-123
(b) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (27)
and take off support bracket (28) and shim (29).
(c) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (30)

and take off top support angle (31) with attached
coupler (32).
(d) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (33)

and take off bottom support angle (34).
(e) Remove four screws, lockwashers, and flat washers (33)

and take off bottom hinge bracket (36) and shim (35).
(f) Separate matrix panel A12 (25) from matrix panel

A13 (26).
d. Replacement Procedure. Matrix panels A12 (25) and A13 (26) are
interchangeable. It is important to note that their established
position in the matrix combiner differs in regard to their cabling
hookup. Matrix panel A12 (25) is the one closest to the antenna
array. See figure 7-51 and perform the following steps:
(1) Assemble matrix assembly (5) (see figure 7-51, sheet 4) as

follows:
(a) Position matrix panel A12 (25) in parallel with matrix

panel A13 (26). [Be sure that matrix panel A12 (25) is
positioned closest (inboard) to antenna array.]
(b) Join matrix panels (25 and 26) together with angles (24,
31, 34, and 38 and brackets 28 and 36 with shims 29 and
35) using attaching hardware as shown in figure 7-51,
sheet 4.
(2) Assemble matrix assembly (5) with matrix combiner

assembly (18) as follows (see figure 7-51, sheet 3):
(a) Join matrix assembly (5) to matrix combiner assembly (18)

with four screws, lockwashers, flat washers, and
nuts (22).
(b) Tighten both connectors (21) on each of 11

combiners (20).
(3) Install matrix assembly (5) onto antenna (see figure 7-51,
sheet 2) as follows:
7-124
WARNING
To prevent personal injury, two assistants are

required in step (a) below to assist in handling
the matrix assembly (5) during its installation.
(a) Working with assistants, carefully lift matrix assembly

(5) into position between upper and lower pivot brackets
(17); then, insert two quick-release pins (13).
(b) Swing matrix assembly (5) against support structure of

antenna and install four bolts, lockwashers, and flat
washers (14).
(c) Install restraint cables (16).
(d) Insert quick-release pin (15).
(4) Connect loose coaxial cables to matrix assembly (5) (see

figure 7-51, sheet 1) as follows:
(a) Connect coaxial cables (11 and 12) to jacks J20.
(b) Connect coaxial cables (8 and 10) to jacks Jl and J3 of

coupler (9), as tagged.
(c) Connect 36 coaxial cables (7) to their respective jacks

on matrix assembly (5), as tagged.
(d) Connect coaxial cables (6) to jacks J19, as tagged.
(e) Connect three coaxial cables (4) to each of 11 low-noise

amplifiers (3).
(f) Install LNA cover (2) and tighten eight captive

screws (1).
(2) Tag and return defective 18 x 18 matrix panel(s) to supply

for disposition.
7-40. RECEIVER-PROTECTORS. The following instructions describe how

to remove and replace the receiver-protectors. Proceed as follows:
• Key, socket-head and capscrew (allen), 5/32-inch

• Gasket, PN 138C416H03
7-125
paragraph 7-8.
steps:
(1) Open purge valve (1) and allow air pressure to completely
bleed out of waveguide. Close purge valve (1).

NOTE
Shim (6) is different for each receiver-
protector. If more than one receiver-protector
is being replaced, mark each shim so that it can
be installed in the location where it was
removed.
(3) Remove six capscrews, lockwashers, and flat washers (4) and
take off receLver-protector (2) and shim (6).
(4) Remove and discard gaskets (5).
WARNING
To prevent personal injury from radioactive

material, do not attempt to disassemble or
repair receiver-protector. If the receiver
protector is tampered with, escaping radiation
could be hazardous to health.

following steps:
NOTE
Shim (6) must be replaced in the same receiver-
protector location from which it was removed.
(1) Install replacement receiver-protector (2) and shim (6)

using new gaskets (5). Tighten six capscrews, lockwashers,
and flat washers (4) in sequence per paragraph 7-12.

(1) Purge waveguide system per paragraph 7-11.
(3) Tag and return defective receiver-protector to supply for

disposition.
7-126
~'
I ~
I
................-~
LEGEND
1. PURGE VALVE
5
2. RECEIVER PROTECTOR (TYPICAL 22 PLACES)
3. COAXIAL CABLE
4. CAPSCREW. LOC<WASHER. FLAT WASHER 4
(6 PLACES)
5. GAS<ET (2 PLACES)
6. SHIM
2.69 B-BM- 6289
Figure 7-52. Receiver-Protector (Typical) Removal and Replacement
7-127
7-41. 11 x 6 MATRIX ASSEMBLY A12. The following instructions
describe how to remove and replace 11 x 6 matrix assembly A12.
Proceed as follows:

• Wrench, socket, 7/16-inch, 3/8-drive

paragraph 7-8.
steps:
(1) Open matrix combiner assembly (1) per paragraph 7-38, steps
(2) through (6).
(2) Disconnect 17 coaxial cables (4) from jacks Jl through J17.
(3) Disconnect two coaxial cables (5) from jacks J18 and J19.
WARNING

required in steps (4) and (5) below to support
and handle the 11 x 6 matrix assembly (2) during
its removal.
(4) While assistant supports 11 x 6 matrix assembly (2), remove

five bolts, lockwashers, and flat washers (6).
(5) Working with assistant, lift off and remove matrix

assembly (2), from support mounts (3).

following steps:
WARNING

required in step (1) below to handle and support
the 11 x 6 matrix assembly (2) during its
installation.
(1) Working with assistant, install replacement matrix assembly

(2) onto support mounts (3). Secure in place with five
bolts, lockwashers, and flat washers (6).
(2) Connect coaxial cables (4 and 5) to their respective jacks.
7-128
1. MATRIX COMBINER ASSEMBLY (REF)
2. 11 X 16 MATRIX ASSEMBLY
3. SUPPORT MOUNT (2 PLACES)
S. COAXIAL CABLE (2 PLACES)
6. BOLT, LOCKWASHER, FLAT WASHER
(5 PLACES)
7647·BF-629A
Figure 7-53. 11 x 6 Matrix Assembly A12 Removal and Replacement
7-129
(3) Close and secure matrix combiner assembly (1) per paragraph
7-38, steps (5) through (8).
(2) Tag and return defective matrix assembly to supply for

disposition.
Section V. REPAIR
7-42. GENERAL. Most replaceable assemblies that can be repaired are

returned to either the depot or to the manufacturer for repair.
(Refer to table 7-1.)
Section VI. ALIGNMENT
7-43. GENERAL. The following paragraphs provide procedures for

setting all adjustable components designated for adjustment at the
site level of maintenance. In most cases, the adjustments are
associated with site replaceable assemblies that must be harmonized
with the system when they are replaced. The removal and replacement
instructions in section IV reference these procedures when they are
applicable.
7-44. +15 VOLT POWER SUPPLIES A2Al AND A2A2 ALIGNMENT. The
alignment of these power supplies should only be required upon
initial installation, as a result of finding a defect during trouble-
shooting or replacing a power supply. The maintenance philosophy is
that the power supply is a disposable item. There are three
alignments that can be performed on the power supply; however, only
one can be performed in the field. This alignment is defined (VA),
located on front panel of the power supply. Proceed as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. Obtain a Simpson digital

multimeter, model 960, or AN/USM 341.

paragraph 7 8.
c. Procedure. See figures 7-54 and 7-55 and perform the following
steps:
(1) Raise cover (1) of power supply enclosure (2). (See figure
7-54. )
(2) Remove fuse from rear panel of standby power supply A2 (9).
(3) Pullout interlock switch (3).
(4) Raise cover (4) of receiver enclosure (5).
7-130
(5) On power distribution panel lAl, set all ANTENNA circuit
breakers up except ANT DRIVE.
(6) Inside receiver enclosure (5), connect digital multimeter

between TBI-IO(+) (7) and TB2-1(-) (6). (The multimeter
should indicate +15 ±O.l Vdc.)
NOTE
If the multimeter indication is not within
tolerance, a second technician will be needed to
read the multimeter or make the necessary
adjustment.
(7) Adjust VA control of on line power supply Al (10) for a

multimeter indication of +15 ±O.l Vdc (see figure 7-55).
(8) Push in interlock switch (3).
(9) Install fuse into rear panel of standby power supply A2

( 9) .
(10) Remove fuse from rear panel of on line power supply Al
(10).
(11) Pullout interlock switch (3).
7-131
LEGEND:
1. COVER
2. POWER SUPPLY
ENCLOSURE
3. INTERLOCK SWITCH
8 4. COVER
S. RECEIVER ENCLOSURE
6. TERMINAL BOARD TB2 (_)
7. TERMINAL BOARD TB2 (+)
B. MONITOR AND CONTROL BOARD A3A 11
9. + 15 VOLT POWER SUPPLY A2A2
10. +lSVOLTPOWERSUPPLYA2Al
7647-BF-63SC
Figure 7-54. +15 Volt Power Supplies A2Al and A2A2 Alignment
7-132
VA CONTROL
/'
FRONT PANEL
7G47-LB-04IA
Figure 7-55. +15 Volt Power Supplies A2Al and A2A2

Alignment Locations
(12) Adjust VA control of standby power supply A2 (9) for a

multimeter indication of +15 ±O.l Vdc (see figure 7-55).
(13) Push in interlock switch (3).
(14) Install fuse into rear panel of on line power supply Al

( 10 ) •
(15) Disconnect multimeter from terminal boards (6 and 7).

Close covers (1 and 4) on power supply enclosure (2) and
receiver enclosure (5) (see figure 7-54).
(16) On pedestal, remove lockpin from handwheel.
(17) On power distribution panel lAl, set ANT DRIVE circuit

breaker to up.
7-133
CAUTION
To prevent damage to sensitive adjacent antenna
components, do not operate two or more identical
radars within 1 mile of each other unless sector
blanking is used.
(IS) On antenna pallet, set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to NORMAL.

Check that antenna is rotating.
7-45. ±12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY A3A9 ALIGNMENT. Alignment of this power
supply should only be required upon finding a defect during trouble-
shooting, or replacing a power supply. The maintenance philosophy is
that the power supply is a disposable item. There are four align-
ments that can be performed on the power supply; however, only two
can be performed in the field. These alignments are +VADJ and -VADJ,
which are located on the rear panel of the power supply. Proceed as
follows:

multimeter, model 260-SPRT.

paragraph 7-S.
c. Procedure. See figures 7-54 and 7-56 and perform the following
steps:
(1) Raise cover (1) of power supply enclosure (2) and pullout
interlock switch (3) (see figure 7-54).
(2) Raise cover (4) of receiver enclosure (5).

breakers up except ANT DRIVE.
NOTE
The adjustment o~ step (4) must be correct
before step (5) 1S attempted, because plus
voltage is used as a reference for minus
voltage.
(4) Connect digital multimeter between All, TP30 (+) and All,
TP31 (-). The mul~imeter should indicate ±12 ±O.l Vdc. If
not, adjust +VADJ control on rear of power supply for
proper indication (see figure 7-56). The test points on pc
board All are across the front edge of the pc board.
(5) Connect digital multimeter between All, TP34 (-) and All,
TP31 (+). The multimeter should indicate -12 ±O.l Vdc. If
not, adjust -VADJ control on rear of power supply for
proper indication (see figure 7-56).
7-134
(6) Disconnect digital multimeter and close cover of enclosure.

breaker to up.
CAUTION
blanking is used.
(9) On antenna pallet, set SAFETY INTERLOCK switch to NORMAL.

-VAOJ
CONTROL I 2 :5 4 5 6
TB2
SP SENS OUT
+VAOJ TBI +1
CONTROL
0 0
+VAOJ
0
2
0 FI
IASB
:5
o 0
120VAC 400HZ
NO
250V
7647-LB-032A
Figure 7-56. ±12 Volt Power Supply A3A9 Alignment Locations
7-135
7-46. VARIABLE COAXIAL ATTENUATORS A3AIOAI AND ~3AIOA2 ADJUSTMENT.
The variable coaxial attenuators, although ide' .cal, are part of
separate circuits. Attenuator A3AIOAI is used J determine STALO
level; whereas attenuator A3AIOA2 is used to determine RF test
monitor level. Proceed as follows:
• Generator, RF, HP 8616A

• Power meter, RF, HP 435B
• Terminations, 50-ohm, Narda 370 BNM (2 required)
b. Maintenance Preparation. prepare antenna for maintenance per

paragraph 7-8.
c. Attenuator A3AIOAI Adjustment. Perform the following steps:
(1) Raise cover (4) of receiver enclosure (5) (see figure

7-54).
(2) On power distribution panel lAl (see figure 7-12), set all
ANTENNA circuit breakers up except ANT DRIVE to up.
(3) Disconnect cable W21 from RF receiver A3AIJ3. Connect

cable W21 to RF power meter.
(4) Adjust RF generator for a clockwise output of 2970 MHz at a

power level of 7.6 ±0.25 dBm. Connect RF generator to
A3J38, STALO input.
NOTE
See figure 7-57 when performing steps (5)
and (6).
(5) Using 7/16-inch wrench, release locking nut of A3AIOAI and

adjust A3AIOAI for an RF power meter indication of 9 ±0.25
dBm (approximately 7.94 milliwatts).
(6) Tighten locking nut while ensuring that RF power meter

indication is maintained.
(7) Disconnect power meter and RF generator. Reconnect cable

W21 to RF receiver A3AIJ3.
d. Attenuator A3AIOA2 Adjustment. Perform the following steps:
(1) Disconnect cable W28 from low-noise amplifier A3A8Jl.

Connect cable W28 to RF power meter.
(2) Connect a 50-ohm termination to A3J7 (RF test monitor out)

and to A3J39 (SLR).
7-136
(3) Adjust RF generator for a clockwise output of 3000 MHz at a
power level of 10 ±0.25 dBm. Connect RF generator to
A3J37.
NOTE
See figure 7-57 when performing steps (4)
and (5).
(4) Using 7/16-inch wrench, release locking nut of A3AIOA2 and

adjust A3AIOA2 for an RF power meter indication of -21.1
±O.25 dBm.
(5) Tighten locking nut while ensuring that RF power meter

indication is maintained.
(6) Disconnect cable W28 from RF power meter. Reconnect cable

W28 to low-noise amplifier A3A8Jl.
(7) Disconnect 50-ohm termination from A3J7 and connect RF

power meter in its place.
RF TEST
MONITOR STALO LEVEL
ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT
A2 AI
=
7647-BF-025A
Figure 7-57. Amplifier Panel Assembly A3AIO Alignment Locations
7-137
(8) With RF generator still set for a clockwise output of 3000
MHz at a power level of 10 ±0.25 dBm, measure power level
at A3J7. The RF power meter should indicate at least 6.5
dBm when A3AIOA2 is properly aligned.
(9) Remove 50-ohm termination from A3J39, disconnect RF

generator from A3J37, and disconnect RF power meter from
A3J7.
(10) Close cover of receiver enclosure.

breaker up.
CAUTION
blanking is used.

7-47. MONITOR AND CONTROL BOARD A3All ALIGNMENT. Alignment of the

monitor and control board should only be required as a result of
finding a defect upon troubleshooting, or replacing a pc board. The
maintenance philosophy is that the monitor and control board is depot
repairable. There are four alignments that can be performed on the
PC board. These are all involved in receiver protector circuitry and
are identical. Proceed as follows:

multimeter, model 260 8PRT.
b. Maintenance Preparation. Pre9are antenna for maintenance per

paragraph 7-8.
(1) Raise cover (4) of receiver enclosure (5) (see figure

7-54) .
breakers except ANT DRIVE up (see figure 7-12).
(3) Connect digital multimeter between All test points, TP39

(+) and TP31 (-) (see figure 7-56). The multimeter should
indicate 320 ±5 millivolts dc. If not, adjust AIIR35 (GPI
ADJUST) for proper indication (see figure 7-58).
7-138
(+) and TP31 (-). The multimeter should indicate 320 ±5
millivolts dc. If not, adjust AIIR49 (GP2 ADJUST) for the


(7) Disconnect digital multimeter and close receiver enclosure

cover.
(8) On pedestal, remove lockpin from handwheel (see figure

7-4).

breaker up (see figure 7-12).
CAUTION
blanking is used.

7-139
.....,
I
.,.
I-'
o
GP2 GP3 GP4 GPI

ADJUST AOJUST ADJUST ADJUST
«)
® ® ~ ® ®
CI9 D~
{? t,
o
0"o
e u
", ]
[-::3 C9a:::D R2 JlOfOl
t "'0
C::~~:]
o-c::::J..o J....L
~
C31
<CD <>80 RIO
~@Cl
007
CJ~~ 1-CCJ)~"2~'~" '.,

~ "'" I ~325rn-0~ ""
~ "'
R5~ (j:2 ~
76.'-IlJ·02';1l
Figure 7-58. Monitor and Control Board AJAll Alignment Locations

Section VII. SERVICE
7-48. GENERAL. This section contains additional instructions for

accomplishing specific servicing tasks found in the Inspection and
Maintenance Requirements and Scheduled Periodic Inspection Workcards
technical manual.
7-49. ANTENNA DRIVE ASSEMBLY AIAIIA2 OIL CHANGE. Proceed as

follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. Obtain the following 'items:
• Measure, liquid, NSN 7240-00-255-8113

• Oil, lubricating, MIL-L-7870 (4 liters)
• Pail (or container), 10-liter (lO-quart) capacity
• Pliers, diagonal cutting
• Pliers, safety wire, lWTll (Snap-on)
• Seal (used with breather vent), NAS 1598-9Y
• Seal (used with drain plug), NAS 1598-8Y (2 required)
• Towels, wiping
• Wire, safety, 0.032-inch diameter, MS20995C32
• Wrench, combination, 3j4-inch

paragraph 7-8.
c. Draining Procedure. See figure 7-59 and perform the following

steps:
(1) Place pail (or container) below drain plug (5).
(2) Cut safety wire and unscrew drain plug (5). Allow oil to
completely drain out from gear case (4) into pail. Wipe up
any oil spillage.
(3) Install drain plug (5) using new seal (6). Safety wire
drain plug (5).
(4) Inspect old (drained) oil for presence of metal particles.

If metal chunks, large chips, or filings are found, the
antenna gearcase (4) has experienced internal failure and
requires replacement.
(5) Check color of oil. Oil shouldobe a clear light amber

color. If oil appears milky, it has been contaminated with
moisture and thereby requires the gearcase (4) to be
flushed with clean oil before final servicing.
7-141
1. BREATHER VENT
2. SEAL
3. FILLER PORT
4. GEARCASE cm:Il
S. DRAIN PLUG
6. SEAL • PROPER OIL LEVEL IS CENTERED
7. SEAL WITHIN SIGHTGLASS.
8. OVERFILL DRAIN PLUG
9. SIGHTGLASS 7647.8F.634A
Figure 7-59. Antenna Drive Assembly Oil Change
7-142
d. Refilling Procedure. See figure 7-59 and perform the following
steps:
(1) Cut safety wire and unscrew breather vent (1).
(2) Using liquid measure, pour clean oil through filler

port (3) until oil level reaches center of sight glass (9).
(Do not overfill).
NOTE
If overfilled, drain out excess oil per step (3)
below; otherwise, proceed to step (4).
(3) Unscrew overfill drain plug (8) and allow excess oil to
drain out into pail. Oil will stop draining when proper
level is met. Wipe any oil spillage. Install overfill
drain plug (8) using new seal (7).
(4) Install breather vent (1) using new seal (2). Tighten
until snug, then install safety wire.
e. Follow-On Maintenance. None.
Section VIII. SPECIAL MAINTENANCE
7-50. GENERAL. This section normally contains instructions for

repair tasks performed at a depot facility.' However, for this
equipment, instructions for depot repair tasks are provided in a
separate manual.
Section IX. PERFORMANCE TESTS AND CHECKS
7-51. GENERAL. This section contains instructions for performing

tests that verify equipment operation.
7-52. MAINTENANCE SUPPORT EQUIPMENT. The performance checks in this

section do not require any common test equipment, special tools, or
special test equipment.
7-53. ANTENNA ROTATION CHECK. The antenna rotation check verifies

the speed and direction of antenna rotation. This check is required
after installation of a drive motor or if physical damage is
discovered. Proceed as follows:
a. Eguipment and Supplies Reguired. None.

paragraph 7-8. Do not insert handwheel lockpin.
(1) Observe drive motor gearcase oil level in sight glass (9)
(see figure 7-59). The oil level should be centered.
7-143
(2) Inspect pallet to ensure there are no physical or personnel
hazards present such as tools, ladders, and braces.

breakers up (on).

(5) Observe antenna rotation. It should be clockwise as viewed

from above.
(6) Using a watch, count number of antenna revolutions in 1

minute. The number should be between six and seven (6.4
±10 percent).
7-54. ANTENNA WAVEGUIDE PRESSURE CHECK. The waveguide pressure

check verifies that leakage in the waveguide is within limits. This
check should be done whenever waveguides are opened. After the wave-
guide system has been assembled, the compressor should be used to
purge the air from it and to repurge it each time it is opened.
Proceed as follows:
a. Equipment and Supplies Required. None.

paragraph 7-8.
(1) On power distribution panel lAl, make sure WG COMPRSR SF6

BLOWER ~ircuit breaker is up (on). Check that compressor-
dehydrator is operating.
(2) On microwave assembly, open purge valve fully counterclock-

wise (see figure 7-7). Allow compressor-dehydrator to
purge waveguide. Operate compressor for at least 5 minutes
and then close purge valve by turning fully clockwise
(finger-tight).
(3) Observe indication on compressol-dehydrator meter when

compressor-dehydrator shuts off. The indication should be
between 27 and 31 psig.
(4) Using watch with a second hand, verify that compressor-

dehydrator duty cycle is at least a 10:1 ratio (off-time
versus on-time). (Example: If the off-time is 16 minutes
and the on-time is 1 minute and 36 seconds, the ratio is
10:1.)
7-144
NOTE
When performing step (4), if the 10:1 ratio is
not obtained and the differential is too small,
it may be possible to reduce the differential
slightly before lowering the shut-off point.
(5) Remove compressor-dehydrator cover and adjust knurled knob

next to microswitch located at lower left corner of
compressor-dehydrator.
(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as necessary to obtain proper

ratio and differential.
(7) Install compressor-dehydrator cover.

breaker up.
CAUTION
blanking is used.

7.55. Antenna LNA Performance Test, SEE Supplement 1
7-145/(7-146 blank)
Supplement InstmctiOD. 'Sf)
Technical Manual: CD ..TPS70(V)S~AN-l·
S~l
.~.p_... t ...... MaaUat CBRN..

~pageJfa4:ingf.7-14S . bf
'TPS~AN-l • ·_~atthe·.o.of~1.54_:~'~.SS AnteMa
UlAP~ 1'" . attdwdte the ibDowins iaatJU"'!~"'t.. .
Chaftae:
7..55. AJnBNNALN ~ea·TBIT.··Thia.caa.-,_.·teat"',isoiate
'..~weakot· ___ LNA&.·~ .. ~:
.. -uP PowerMeter43/or equlva.tem

. ·• • Power $elISOr 84 lA«.,..._
.~r_(to,' ··. . . . . . .·. . . iaitiaJ . .)
.~SMAtoNr.
•..
~~
.• '·",,,connectotiCOfQ1!le
..
•. tiII4.tool$ (_at
aadfO'N« ....~~.~. . . . . .·
......~S'tALO~u...,.:~au.....
"~(\V2AltOJUfT.~Qan.· •.J1.~·tho
U T_Moaitor Ot.d )7 (AJ17).: , .
Note: IftkeR014.
. . . . . . ~at·
..a........
1tep(2) . . r.d". . . . . . . . . iaskt.tho .
(STAlDJN)aad.l1(lFT_M.... Obt~:~ . . . . offJle
llG-.4%·.we to 13S;;'
;' . )
~'\',J
.. i
Page7-14Sa:
(3) Measure andreco~the power level of the STALO signal at the CQJltlecUon to138 with a
,~-'- I
10dBattenuator·attach for reference.. If the signal is too low to.rneasure,·repJ.acethe

attenuator with one of wet value, or remove it completely. A eonsistefit,stable reference level
measurement is requir
(4) On the LNA Test ontro~ set switch $5 to LOCAL TEST andswitehes SI through S4 to
logic 1111. This If aU the LNAs.
(5) Connect the cable n (RF Test Monitor Out),

at 12 on theLNAunder test.
(1) Connect the power meter•.using an SMA Jldaptet, tothe12 ofthe LNAunder test.
(8} Refer to theLNA esteoutrolswitehtnatrixprinted ontheinside?ftheReceiver Enclosure

Lid and tum-on onlyLNA under·. test by adjusting the appt()priate LNATest Control switches
Slthrougb 54 to the I 'c .c:onditioD. to·tum-on thatswitch~ Record the power measurement...
Note: If this is thei~' sy$temmea.suremetttofthe LNA's, record the values measured for all
LNA's for future • The r.n.oasureaents oftheLNAs may Vaty&nmO dB to as much as
+6 dB with a no~ ueof ± 3dB.
(9) Turn olf the LNA der test by ~the au Receiver Bnclosure LNA Test Control switches
S1 through 84 to logic' Ill.
(10) R.,.t stept 6.7, 8. If,9asreqtJired .foreaehLNA requiriftg test.
Note: Any LNAwhich·~areaterthaa,t'G tl:omthe"'..,JhoDldbe repJace(. and

LNA's measlUing than;! 3dB hm tht.nfenmee.should be ~ ofmalfimction until
proven otherwise by . 'tution oroperatioajnltnOthet~~ IfLNAreplacement
does not correct the· 'ver prob1em,the 2:100abiner or the18XUlJutlermatrixmay be. at
fault.
/ ,
"-- e(s)tbat 'Wete removedh~ 12 eob .LNA(a) .·..-test.

ElIGIGNre. disconnect the .... at AlJ7(RP
"
T.t.....Out).
TestM<mitotOut cable.(W2S) to 17.
. . (1$)~.ST:. .. ~caW. (W24)and fCCOQIleCtto .0..10 . . . . . .
'. a~ 12 (Al.410 .U2). .
(16)" Set ,the LNA~ CotUrol",SSto ·NORMALand~$I·""'.S4to 1111.
·PAtiftI'Im..'~"'~;(_F.... ""}.
• 'IAPB1'Y·1NTBlU.OCK switcl·tQ~.
(al~' Oa·.power . .paMt lAl •.radat . . .~ .. AHf··.DlU'\III.C\itcuit ..... up
\
(aeeFigure ' .. 12). .
'''-..-.
CHAPTER 8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
8-1. INTRODUCTION. This equipment does not have a separate circuit

diagrams manual. Because they are few in number, the diagrams and
lists normally contained in a separate circuit diagrams manual are
included in this manual. Figures 8-1 through 8-21 are data sheets
for integrated circuit components that apply to the antenna group
circuit boards. A major component location diagram, overall block
diagram, and various functional, schematic, wiring, and timing
diagrams for the antenna group are shown in FO-l through FO-17.
8-1
LOGIC DIAGRAM
SR CONTROL A SLEW RATE
VCC CONTROL A
INPUT A OUTPUT A
INPUT A OUTPUT A
SR CONTROL B
OUTPUT B
INPUT B OUTPUT B
SLEW RATE
ENABLE 4 CONTROL B
SR CONTROL C
Am26LS29
SLEW RATE
INPUT C OUTPUT C CONTROL C
SR CONTROL D OUTPUT C
INPUT D OUTPUT D
OUTPUT D
SLEW RATE
VCC - - CONTROL D
ENABLE GROUND--
VEE-- 764IA-LC-OO~A
Figure 8-1. Type 26LS29 Quad 3-State Single-Ended Line Drivers
8-2
'''~,. {
vee
},,,~,
OUTPUT A
ENABLE
OUTPUT e ENABLE
OUTPUT 0
,,,"n' {
GND },,"''
764IA-LC-006A
Figure 8-2. Type 26LS32 Quad Differential Line Receivers
8-3
TYPE 5400/54031740017403
NOTE
POSITiVE LOGIC, EACH

GATE' y. A8
NOTE:
TYPE 5403 HAS OPEN-COLLECTOR
OUTPUTS .
IA 18 IY 2A 28 2Y . GND
7647·BF·636A
Figure 8-3. Type 54LSOO Quad 2-Input positive NAND Gates
8-4
TYPE 5404/5406/7404/7406
NOTE
POSITiVE LOGIC'
Y~ A
NOTE:
TYPE 5406 HAS OPEN-COLLECTOR,
HIGH-VOLTAGE OUTPUTS,
IA IY 2A 2Y 3A 3Y GND
7647-BF-637A
Figure 8-4. Type 54LS04 Hex Inverter Buffers/Drivers with Open

Collectors
8-5
T YPE 5408/7408
VCC 4A 48 4Y 3A 38 3Y
NOTE'
POSITIVE LOGIC. EACH

GATE'
y. A8
IA 18 IY 2A 28 2Y GNO
7647-8F-638A
Figure 8-5. Type 54LS08 Quad 2-Input Positive AND Gates
8-6
TYPE 541017410
VCC IA IY 3C 3B 3A 3Y
NOTE
POSITIVE LOGIC, EACH

GATE'
IB IC 2A 2B 2C 2Y GND
7647-BF-639A
Figure 8-6. Type 54LSlO Triple 3-Input Positive NAND Gates
8-7
TYPE 54HII/74HII
IB 2C 2.Y GND
POSI TlVE LOGIC: Y =ABC
7647-BF-640A
Figure 8-7. Type 54LSll Triple 3-Input positive AND Gates
8-8
TYPE 542717427
Vee IC IY 3C 39 3A 3Y
IA IB 2A 2B 2C 2Y GND
POSITIVE LOGIC: Y=A ... 9.C
7647·BF·641A
Figure 8-8. Type 54LS27 Triple 3-Input positive NOR Gates
8-9
TYPE 5476
CLR PR
K J o
CLK
J oH--' K Q
CLR
I
ICLK IPR ICLR IJ VCC 2CLK
PCSITIVE LOGIC: LOW INPUT TO PRESET SETS 0 HIGH

LOW INPUT TO CLEAR SETS 0 LOW
CLEAR AND PRESET ARE INDEPENDENT OF CLOCK
TRUTH
TABLE
tn tn+1
J K 0
L L I
On
L H 0
H L H I
H H -On I
NOTES: I. tn" BIT TIME BEFORE CLOCK PULSE.
2.tn+l" BIT TIME AFTER CLOCK PULSE.
7647·BF·642A
Figure 8-9. Type 54LS76 Dual J-K Flip-Flops with Clear and Preset
8-10
TYPE 54123
I
REXTI I 2
VCC C EXT C EXT 10 CLR 2B 2A
FUNCTION TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUTS
CLEAR A B 0 0
L X X L H
X H X L H
H
X
H
X
L ,
L
n
L
u
H I H n U
, L H n U
IA IB I 10 20 2 2 GND
CLR
C EXT REXTI
CEXT
NOTE: DC TRIGGERING FROM GATED LOW LEVEL ACTIVE {AI AND HIGH LEVEL ACTIVE {Bl INPUTS,
AND ALSO PROVIDE OVERRIDING DIRECT CLEAR INPUTS. COMPLEMENTARY OUTPUTS ARE
PROVIDED. THE RETRIGGER CAPABILITY SIMPLIFIES THE GENERATION OF OUTPUT
PULSES OF EXTREMELY LONG DURATION. BY TRIGGERING THE INPUT BEFORE THE
OUTPUT PULSE IS TERMINATED, THE OUTPUT PULSE MAY BE EXTENDED.
7647·BF·643A
Figure 8-10. Type 54LS123 Dual Retriggerable Monostable

Multi-vibrator
8-11
DATA OUTPUTS
yee YO Yl Y2 Y3 Y4 VS Y6
YO YI Y2 Y3 Y4 v5
A Y6
B L G2A G2B G1 Y7
ABC G2A G2B G1 v7 GND

'---y----' '---y----' OUTPUT
SELECT ENABLE
POSITIVE LOGIC: SEE FUNCTION TABLE
54LS138
FUNCTION TABLE
INPUTS
OuTPUTS
ENABLE SELECT
GI G2* C B A YO VI V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7
X H X X X H H H H H H H H
L X X X X H H H H H H H H
H L L L L L H H H H H H H
H L L L H H L H H H H H H
H L L H L H H L H H H H H
H L L H H H H H L H H H H
H L H L L H H H H L H H H
H L H L H H H H H H L H H
H L H H L H H H H H H L H
H L H H H H H H H H H H L
*G2 :: G2A + G2B

H :: HIGH LEVEL. L = LOW LEVEL. X = IRRELEVANT
7619-CC-D31A
Figure 8-11. Type 54LS138 3-to-8 Line Decoder/Demultiplexer
8-12
54LS224
w
'"
N Q
o '"
"Q
0
Q
Q Q Z
--' '"
1
OE
9
LDCK
,
r-
J
RING COUNTER CaMP
~
~s
- 10 J CTR DIY 16 1
WRITE
ADDRESS
~
~
::::
:::;
Cl
>+ •~ Yo p
Qz:P+l
~~
~
7
}- :::
\~ ::::::
- 0
P=Q+l ~
JJ
~
CT"'l
q~D ,." :;;:;;

12
P=G -
C2
,.
15 EMPTY
2
IR
14
15 OR
UNCK
»-- ,.
t
~ J
s RING COUNTER
~ - ~~ ,.
CTR DIY 16 1
'0
C' READ
ADDRESS 4 F:::
+
•F3
5
7
~
RAM
}- •~
9
16X4
~
CT E 1 10
~~DC4 }J l~ t:::
11
,. :::::t::: r:.-
14
15
- lA 1116
2A 1/16 -
EN
C5
-
DO
4
5
lA.:m 2A - ~ ~ 00
D1 -_ ~ 01
02 •
7
----.!L 02
--~
" - "
7619-CC-001A
Figure 8-12. Type 54LS224 16 x 4 Asynchronous FIFO Memories

(Sheet 1 of 2)
8-13
Pin Functions
Pin Acronym Name Function
1 OE Output enable Low forces data outputs to high impedeance

level
2 IR Input ready High when memory not full and LOCK is low.
3 LOCK Load clock High-to-Iow transistion writes data in

memory.
4-7 00-3 4-bit data input.
9 CLR Clear not High-to-Iow transition sets IR high and OR

low to indicate old data remaining at data
outputs is invalid.
10-13 Q3-0 4-bit data output; non-inverting with

respect to data input.
14 OR Output ready High when memory is not empty and UNCK

is high.
15 UNCK Unload clock Low-to-high transition reads data from

memory.
Figure 8-12. Type 54LS224 16 x 4 Asynchronous FIFO Memories

(Sheet 2 of 2)
8-14
Vee 8a 8D 7D 7a 6a 6D 50 50 CLOCK
,--- ,---
20 I- 19 I- 18 I- 17 I- 16 t- 15 I- 14 I- 13 I- 12 I- 11
~a ~ ~D a~ ~a oS
CLR CK CK
CLR CLR CK
GD CK
CLR 1 \/
~ qa ?
J eK eLR
qa". D I
~ ~
eLR eLR
eK eK
D "I
D
1 l- 2 I- 3 f-- 4 l- s t- 6 t- 7 l- s I- 9 I- 10
CLEAR la lD 20 2a 3a 3D 4D 4a GNO
TRUTH TABLE
INPUTS OUTPUT
CLEAR CLOCK D a
L x X L
H I H H
H I L L
H L X ao
7619-CC-002A
Figure 8-13. Type 54LS273 8-Bit Registers with 1 Clear
8-15
Vee ,. 1Y 3e 38 3. 3Y
14 11 B
FUNCTION TABLE (EACH GATE)

INPUTS OUTPUTS
•
H
8
H
e
H
y
L
~4ALS1010 L X X H
X L X H
X X L H
2 3 6 7
18 1e 2' 28 2e 2Y GNO
7619-CC-003A
Figure 8-14. Type 54LS1010 Triple 3-Input NAND Gate
8-16
TYPE 741
l- f-
=> W...J
a. ~...J
l-
=> u.=>
NC NC NC V+ 0 oz NC
NOTE: NC ~ NO CONNECTION.
THIS DEVICE IS A DIFFERENTIAL
INPUT, CLASS AB OUTPUT AMPLIFIER.
IT IS PROTECTED AGAINST FAULTS
AT INPUT AND OUTPUT, AND REQUIRES
NO EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR
FREQUENCY COMPENSATION. THE
LARGE - SIGNAL VOLTAGE GAIN IS
TYPICALLY 200 VOLTS PER
MILLIVOLT.
NC NC I-...J '1- >1- V- NC

W...J >=> z=>
Ul=> za. -a.
U.z -z '2
2_
U.
0 0
2
7647·BF·644A
Figure 8-15. Type 741HM Frequency-Compensated Operational Amplifier
8-17
COLOR DOT
(OR SLANT cORNER
FOR PIN NO.1
NC 1 14 B+
NC 2 13 NC
NC 3 12 NC
NC 4 11 NC
NC 5 10 NC
NC 6 9 NC
GNO/CASE 7 8 OUTPUT
CO-402D-2D
CO-400 SERIES CHARACTERISTICS CODE
CO-4 LOW PROFILE SERIES

o TTL SV
2 14-PIN BASE
o INITIAL ACCURACY
2 -5S·C TO +12S·C TEMPERATURE RANGE

o SCREEN TEST OPTION
7619-CC-004A
FREQ. lD53.6KHZ SPECIFIED WHEN ORDERED
Figure 8-16. Type CO-402D-2D Square Wave Crystal Oscillator
8-18
1 40 TRC
VCC
NC 2 39 EPE
GND 3 38 CLS1
RRD 4 37 CLS2
RBRB 5 36 SBS
RBR7 6 35 PI
RBR6 7 34 CRl
RBR5 8 33 TBRS
9 HD6402 32 TBR7
RBR4
RBR3 10 31 TBR6
11 30 TBR~
R8R2
RBRt 12 29 TBR4
13 28 TBR~
PE
FE 14 27 TBR2
OE 15 26 TBRt
SFD 16 25 TRO
RRC 17 24 TRE
ORR 18 23 TBRl
DR 19 22 TBRE
RRI 20 21 MR
I I I I I I I I
r----------r rrrrrrr---i TBRS (MS8) TBRt (lSe)
I
TRE
TBRE
13-STATE)
-ir------,
I
, ,
I PARITY
TRANSMITTER BUFFER REGISTER
I
+ ,
, ST~OP , lOjGIC 1->-i...__T_R_AN_S_"'_IT_T,ER_RE_G_IS_T_E_R_--,' rSTART "
TeRl - . - , TRANSMITTER
n_
AND
j
TRC~ CONTROL ~,--_ _ _ _ _ _ _M_U_l_T_IP_l_EX_E_R_-,_ _ _ _ _ _ _~1 ,
, T'--_ _ _ _ _ _--., IL-_______ +--I
TRO
C l S I - 1 I , - - + - - - - - - - - - -__ r-::~~-}-------------~I~ses
CONTROL
CLS2 REGISTER EPE
CRl I I PI
~ I I ,
, ,..--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--.-_+-I,.-'_RRI
' L
RRC -;", RECEIVER
• I
rl....------L------M-Ul-T--I-Pl-E-X--ER----------., START
TIMING
AND I
I I,
LOGIC
,
ORR -;", CONTROL . , • ,

STOP PARITY r- >-i RECEIVER REGISTER ,
DR :' lOGIC lOGIC ! ,
(3-STATEl
, I RECEIVER BUFFER REGISTER , ,
I , , , I I J I I ,
SFD
L Y
--;E • -
7
--;;E. -
jZ-~umJ~~t~
PE • -;BR7IM-;).-. - + +-.-. + R;;;' (lSe)
-.J
RRD
7619-CC-D0:5B
Figure 8-17. Type HD6402 Universal Asychronous Receiver

Transmitter with 3-State Output (Sheet 1 of 4)
8-19
Pin Functions
4 RRD Receiver register disable High forces receiver data outputs to high
impedance level.
5-12 RBR8-1 Receiver buffer register B-bit receiver data output.
13 PE Parity error High indcates parity error
14 FE Framing error High indicates first stop bit invalid.
15 OE Overrun error High indicates data received flag not cleared

before last cha racter transferred to receiver
buffering register.
16 SFD Status flags disable High forces outputs PE, FE, OE, DR, and TBRE
to high impedance level.
17 RRC Receiver register clock Sixteen times the receive data rate.
18 DRR Data received reset Low clear DR to low level.
19 DR Data received High indicates a character has been recl!ived

and is in output register.
20 RRI Receiver register input Serial data input to receiver.
21 MR Master reset High clears PE, FE, OR, DR, TRE, and sets TBRE,
TRO high. Less than 18 clocks later, TRE
returns high.
22 TBRE Transmitter buffer High indicates transmitter can accept new

register empty data.
23 T8RL Transmitter buffer Low transfer 8-bittransmit data inputto

register load internal buffer register. Low-to-high
transition requests data transfer to
transmitter register.
24 TRE Transmitter register High indicates completed transmission of

empty character including stop bits.
25 TRO Transmitter register Serial data transmitter output.

output
Figure 8-17. Type HD6402 Universal Asychronous Receiver

8-20
Pin Functions - Continued
26-33 TBRl-8 Transmitter buffer 8-bit transmitter data input.

register
34 CRL Control register load High loads control register.
35 PI Parity inhibit High inhibits parity generation and checking,

and forces PE low (see Control Word table).
36 SBS Stop bit select High selects 1.5 stop bits for 5-character
format and 2 stop bits for other lengths (see
Control Word table).
37-38 CLS2-1 Character length selected See Control Word table
39 EPE Even parity enable When PI is low, high generates and checks
even parity. Low selects odd parity (see
Control Word table).
40 TRC Transmitter register clock Sixteen times transmit data rate.

/r"
Figure 8-17. Type HD6402 Universal Asynchronous Receiver

8-21
Control Word Functions
Control Word
CLS2 CLSl PI EPE SBS Data Bits Parity Bit Stop Bit
L L L L L 5 Odd 1
L L L L H 5 Odd 1.5
L L L H L 5 Even 1
L L L H H 5 Even 1.5
L L H X L 5 Disabled 1
L L H X H 5 Disabled 1.5
L H L L L 6 Odd 1
L H L L H 6 Odd 2
L H L H L 6 Even 1
L H L H H 6 Even 2
L H H X L 6 Disabled 1
L H H X H 6 Disabled 2
H L L L L 7 Odd 1
H L L L H 7 Odd 2
H L L H L 7 Even 1
H L L H H 7 Even 2
H L H X L 7 Disabled 1
H L H X H 7 Disabled 2
H H L L L B Odd 1
H H L L H B Odd 2
H H L H L B Even 1
H H L H H B Even 2
H H H X L B Disabled 1
H H H X H B Disabled 2
NOTE:
H= High
L= Low
X= Imma-
terial
Figure 8-17. Type HD6402 Universal Asynchronous Receiver

8-22
TOP VIEW
LOGIC SYMBOL
0, Vee eE 0,
°2
2 '5 eE °2
0,
, '4 A4 0,
4 HM7603 A3 AD
°4 °4
"
5 ,2 A2 A,
°s °s
6 11 A, A2
°6 °6
7 10 AD A,
°7 °7
GND 8 9 DB A4 °B
PIN NAMES
AO-A4 ADDRESS INPUTS
°t-OEI DATA OUTPUTS (3-STATE)
eE CHIP ENABLE INPUT
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
AO (10)
At (11)
1 OF 32
A2 (t2) ADDRESS ROW 32 X EI
BUFFER DECODER MEMORY ARRAY
A3 (I')
A4 ('4)
eE ('5)-----4
(16)=" CC
(B)=GND
(9) (7) (6) (S) (2) (1)
08 07 06 Os °2 0,
7619-CC-006A
Figure 8-18. Type HM7603 32 x 8 3-State PROM
8-23
TYPE LM 109 H/K
R8 R9 RI3 INP UT
100 100 10K (II
OB~ 09 . ~D2
R4 RIB
lOOK 500 016
~
R21 r-( 017
~ 015~
6BO RI2
240
RI7 RII
200 0.3
KOl2
010 ~
OUTPUT
R5
(2 I
3.3K
013 06
l;t R 20
'; b l
R6
2.7K
"( RI5
6K
RI6
2K'
011
/ 0-I9K
RI
IK R2
'- 20K
k 07
,;:1
~OPF ~
04
R7 RI9
500 Ol~ 02 k03 5K
RIO R3 RI4
6K IK 6K
COM MON
(3 I
OUTPUT (21 COMMON 131 OUTPUT (21
THE TYPE LMI09H/K INTEGRATED CIR-

CUIT IS A+5Y YOLTAGE REGULATOR
o o COMMONLY USED FOR LOCAL VOL TAGE
INPUTII I COMMON 131
o o REGULATION IN TTL DIGITAL LOGIC
CIRCUITS, THE LMI09H CAN DELlYER
o OUTPUT CURRENTS IN EXCESS OF
200MA; THE LMI09K CAN SUPPLY
OUTPUT CURRENTS IN EXCESS OF IA.
LMI09K LMI09H
INPUT (f I
7647-BF·645A
Figure 8-19. Type LM109K +5V, lA Fixed Voltage Regulator
8-24
TYPE LMIIiD
GROUND
NON-
INVERTING r---i+
INPUT
INVERTING
INPUT
OUTPUT
BALANCE!
STROBE
NOTES: I TOP VIEW

2. PIN 6 INTERNALLY CONNECTED TO
BOTTOM OF PACKAGE.
THE TYPE LMIIID/H OPERATIONAL

AMPLIFIER IS A GENERAL PURPOSE
VOLTAGE COMPARATOR/BUFFER WITH
A TTL- COMPATIBLE OUTPUT THAT TYPE LMIIIH
IS CAPABLE OF DRIVING LAMPS OR VCC
RELAYS UP TO A 50MA CURRENT
LOAD.
GROUND
NON-
+ BALANCE.'
INVERTING
STROBE
INPUT
5 BALANCE
NOTES: I. TOP VIEW(METAL CAN)

2. PIN 4 INTERNALLY CONNEC TED TO CASE
7647·BF·646A
Figure 8-20. Type LMlllD Analog Voltage Comparator
8-25
OUTPUT
CHARACTERISTICS
PARAMETER MINIMUM TYPICAL MAXIMUM

o LMI20H-05 0
INPUT VOLTAGE -7V -25V
OUTPUT VOLTAGE -4.8V -5V -5.2V
GNO
QUIESCENT CURRENT I MA 2 MA
NOTE: INPUT IS CONNECTED TO CASE
LOAD CURRENT 1.5 A
LOAD VOLTAGE REGULATION WITHIN:!: 3% Of pRESET VOLTAGE
BOTTOM VIEW (TO-3 CASE)
7619-CC-007A
Figure 8-21. Type LMl20H-OS -SV, O.SA Fixed Voltage Regulator
8-26
GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS
A ampere
ac alternating current
ACP azimuth change pulse
ARP azimuth reference pulse
bps bits per second
cm centimeter
D/A digital-to-analog
dB decibel
dBm decibels relative to I milliwatt
dc direct current
ESDS electrostatic discharge sensitive
FIFO first-in-first-out
ft foot
ftllb foot pounds
gal gallon (s)
GHz gigahertz
Hz hertz
hp horsepower
IF intermediate frequency
IFF Identification Friend or Foe
in. inch(es)
in. lIb inch pounds
ISLS interrogator sidelobe suppression
kg kilogram
kHz kilohertz
kV kilovolts
kW kilowatts
lb pound
LNA low-noise amplifier
LRU line replaceable unit
MDS minimum discernible signal
MFI monitoring and fault isolation
MHz megahertz
mm millimeters
mV millivolts
mW milliwatts
MW megawatts
N-m newton-meter
oz ounce
pcb printed circuit board
PPI plan-position indicator
PRF pulse repetition frequency
PRT pulse repetition time
PROM programmable read-only memory
qt quart
RF radio frequency
rms root mean square
rpm revolutions per minute
SLB side-lobe blanking
SLR side-lobe reference
Glossary I
GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS - Continued
STALO stable local oscillator

SWR standing wave ratio
us, usee, I1sec microsecond
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
V volt
VA volt-amperes
Vac volts alternating current
Vdc volts direct current
VSWR voltage standing wave ratio
Glossary 2
Iff ANTENNA
OMNI ANTENNA RADOME
ARRAY ASSY
#--7:-T---::'" TUS K AS S Y
RADIATiNG ELEMENTS
(36 PLACES)
k , - - - - - PEDESTALASSY
ANTENNA DRIVE ASSY
~B
lnO-8J-006A
FO-l. Antenna Group Assembly

Major Assemblies and Components
(Sheet 1 of 3)
LEFT HAND TUSK
RIGHT HAND
\
WAVEGUIDE
TUSK
\
ASSY
\ ERECTING SCREW JACK
SUPPORT STRUT
(2 PLACES) -------------J
PEDESTAL EXTENSION
ROTARY JOINT LIQUID

51A1AllAl - - - - - - - - - - - - - •."-~'- .sL~~------------ LEVEL INDICATORS
(NOTE 2)
"'I':m--h'~----------- PE RCE NT GRADE

., INDICATOR
(NOTE 3)
BORESIGHT
SCREW JACK
BRACKET
TRANSVERSE DRIVE
/
NOTE (CRANK ATTACHMENT)
/
/
THE FOLLOWING IS INCLUDED IN ANTENNA /
GROUPS BUT NOT SHOWN: SYNCHRO AND / HANDWHEEL
SCREW JACK HAND CRANK/24-VOL T DRill ENCODER GEAR AND LOCKING
& EXTENSION CORD WITH BATTERY CLIPS TRAIN ASSY PIN
TILT FRAME JACK 51A1AllA4
(NOTE 2) GEAR CASE
DRIVE MOTOR
ASSY
2 COMPONENT INTERNAL TO PEDESTAL ASSY
VIEWA
3 SEE VIEW B FOR LOCATION OF OTHER
2920-BF-007A
PERCENT GRP,DE INDICA TOR ON OUTBOARD
SIDE OF PEDESTAL EXTENSION
FO-l. Antenna Group Assembly

Major Assemblies and Components
(Sheet 2 of 3)
OMNI ;---\,
ANTENNA
IFF ANTENNA
I
I
I
I
PRIMARY RADAR ANTENNA I
I
I
[
I
I
[
[
[
[
I
[
6
ROTATING
: I STATIONARY
RF IFF TX/RX
-----Ari I I
l ~ l~ l ~-- ~-t--
I
SLIP RINGS
I I I
RADAR TX
I
PULSE
STALO CW
i I SLR IF
[ 6
RF TES T
I I TARGET RETURN
IF
PULSE
I I :
[
56V AC
I ! [
TILT SENSOR I i AMPL RESOLVER~ [
I
2 2
Sf
I DEMOD
~ER[
120V AC TI LT CORRECTiON
I I V OLTAGE
ACPS
+25V
I ISYN +)1
II It21 0 ~I
ORTH MARK
~
6
120V AC IX AND 36X
, ! I
OJ--~--~_..J
REF I SYNCHRO DATA
--.JI
3 PHASE
120V AC L __ ROTA~ JOINT_ __
400HZ
/
'"
DRIVE ANTENNA PEDESTAL
MOTOR
7647-LC-OJOB
FO-2. Overall Block Diagram

(Sheet 1 of 2)
SLOTTED WAVEGUIDE
ARRAY
JVI/\ /\/\/
- I.
laXI6 I
MATRIX!
I
LNA
II ~----Is
I-F AMP
-~I
, I
, I
I, >-_--.<J;Sc...-.;.TARGET RETURN
,I I-F
-. 22 _)1
II
I
I
I
TXRF INPUT(PULSEl-----------l
STALO INPUT (Cwl
OMNIDIRECTIONAL
ANTENNA I-F AMP
LNA
'>-----II~ SLR I-F
IFF BACKFILL
ANTENNA RADIATOR
pr,P3
DUPLEXER
ELECTRONIC ~~~P~I~,P~2~,P~3~-------------------------------~ RF IFF TX/RX
SWITCH
P2
7647-LO-OIIB
FO-2. Overall Block Diagram

(Sheet 2 of 2)
t_~____ -- ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR IAIA5
~
4 2
IJ)'
I
I
1
!: : I
I
I
I
I
1)34
I
I
NEUT
PHASE A
J 120V AC
BALANCE
1 VERTICAL
1
I
I
TP4
~
SEN701~-AI
TP2
G
TP3
~ D -l195j," 2 PI
Pia
JI
I
f
-~--------------------, : r_-- ,
'<"'}
K 7 6 A
o AMPLIFIER - P/OI I I I I 5V I I '-, ",CR3 I
, MODULATOR AI +15V' '~ ~') 23>---7"< 0 (: I ) 18 __ ___ +.2. J I ;.!' , 23 120V
[ I
I
I ~TPI RECT
7 IC AC
I •
TP3
:" I I I
-15V:-1!i22>--7-< E ( II
I I 1 -15V
19 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...... _ i 17
), 22 5
NEUT
,) J
I /
I I
TP5 : 1 I 1 I I 2 .(_ _ _ _ _ _ _
I
I
r CR4
~
---l
I I
£
RI5 RI?
TP4
TPI I
I
: I
I
I I
I I
: I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I ,
,
I
I
I
, ",1 }
DEMODULATED TILT TILT
U3
TP6
,4 >---;-<, C
1
( ) I 4---ara-----L R7 4~ OUT
RI6 TP7 12+(_ _ _ _ _ _ _
1
I
I
: I I2 0 56V AC RMS I I ..;;,~
J4 )
H - -....----i'--~, I I >---i""< F cI ,) - - - - - - _ - - D)>-..;..----~) 21

R8 : I I 1 I
I
II
I
I
I
I
1 I
I I I
: :
TP2 I I
T5V -5V: I : I I
I
I
I I R6 ~ TILT METER CAL
I
I
I I
iI H----O'---.... ---4·: >--'-<:

: I
'4
:
I
I
G
('
I
I I 56V AC RMS
) 1 21 - - - - - - - ..... - E)>-..!.7-,0---~) 20
I -
~ __________________ ~ 1 I L +v
_A ___
l
3
r------------~ Pial P/ol,[ C

+28V
i~l~:::::::::::::::::::::::::.::::::::::::::::::::::::~Jt5~
I
•
• :)i
[)'D)'
)P5
(
:
E
;C): i
I I 1143
I)
)42
41
S3 } 36X
S2
SI
SYNCHRO
MI
8
E
+-1-"-+4 ,,
i
, K2
------- - - 1 ENABLE/ DISABLE
f============~·..::========3:tt~I):G)!)>-:i-:--:-'~)
I
: >:39
I
I S3 } IX I
,
I
S2 SYNCHRO I
' I ' " i i'l"

H 40 SI ANTENNA TILT INDICATOR
,L ____ _
I
"----------..;.--..:.-+:
DS2
KI DSI
r,:",:,:~::----------------
Fr~M~AR~K~
....
_______________________________ ~ _________________":'____ ":'-lI~)~
~) 1 1615 NORTH MARK
AZIMUTH CHANGE PULSES
I
1 - .- - - - - - -
•
- -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ ---l
TP6
TP5
TILT ALARM
CRI
NOTE:
NOTE: ANTENNA DRIVE MOTOR ROTATES
THIS UNIT IS LOCATED
ANTENNA AT 6.4 RPM AND
INSIDE RADAR SET SHELTER
SIMULTANEOUSLY ROTATES ROTORS
AND IS NOT PART OF
OF FOLLOWING ITEMS ON
ANTENNA GROUP.
SIA1AI1AIA4:
SHOWN HERE FOR
ENCODER AI REFERENCE ONLY.
SYNCHRO 81
SYNCHRO B2
SENSOR RESOLVER A3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _---1
7647 - LH -0200
FO-3. Drive, Direction

Monitoring, and Level Monitoring
Functional Diagram
ANTENNA PEDESTAL 51AIAII
-,-,-:::::-=---=-===-=:::-==,--,-:-: ______________________________________ _
~~~~-----------------------------
ROTARY JOINT rA,--1
VERTICAL SYNCHRQ AND ENCODER GEAR TRAIN ASSY A4
SENSOR
A' PIC I PIa -- --
~ F)~iF2~5----~----------~------------------------------------------------------------------__________~.~-------P2,~~)A)~Jr'-------
I I ! 3v AC RMS ! I
7 A) I • I) B )>-.:-------
i
I
:
'I
fJUNCTIONe~~2--=-
I
-=---===-=-_', -- -[
I plO AMPLIFIER- I
r;~;------l
RAE,50LVER 'I
:
I
I
I r
~E)
1
I
I
1
I
I
I PITCH AC
I
PIO
P2'(F~
I
I
I P/O
~18 ,
1
1
(
G>
I DEMODULATOR A l i i
UI
I
I
' 19 ~
7
PIOI
I
,..----" J
PIO
)P2'
I
PIO
I
I PIO
P24(D":":!!"
'1"1
I
I
I
: I
I
I
I
I
1 I : I: I : : 1 I : I: I I
I
I I
I I
: I
I I 'I I I I I I I I I
I' :
G>
I I JI P24 MODULATEDTILTACI
I : i I: I I II: ~,B) )M),....--«2.
I
~B)IROLLAC
IIi 1
'(D~20(U2
I':
)21~G)
I I
I(F'fL
I
I I
1 I
I I I I I I
'-A-N-TE-N-N-A-DR-'V-E-'
ASSY A2
I L----------J L ---- -=--=--=-=-- -=----------- J
I
A ~JI,--_... I
PHA5E A I I
120V AC PHASE B B I
{
PHASE C
NEUT C ~I+'_ _" I
(SEE NOTE)
I
I
L ______________________________________________________
PIa PIO Pia 36X svNCHRO
RI
~J2~-------~P~5(A ~J5~--~-----~-_4~-~-~~~~------------------------------
53
IZOV AC {RI 36 1(: I " ""
37*(~:----------------~:(B~1~----~--------~~~t_--~~L--2~----------------------------------------------------
SYNCHRO R2 52
REF R2 51
IX SVNCHRO
53
iI I 52
51
I
I ENCODER AI
1
PIO PIO
+25V 44 ~(r~-------------~----_7---~
I
P2(A~ ~C)~2 AC'
+Z5v RTN
45
: )fJ-
~(~'----------------7--------,------~ ~G) , NO'
1 !
.~----B1L_{]
JI
I I
120v {PHASE A
AC NEUT
30
I C o-+::..A-----,
------ ------------------------- - - -- ---------------------
31 ------------------------ - - ------
Ii
~NORMAL
+28v IN ,
48 :
t28v OUT
49 ~..i______-"<C?s,
1
SAFETY INTERLOCK NO STOP

51Atl] ANTENNA PALLET
SHEL TER TRANSMIT RF FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE FIXED

WAVEGUIDE W, WAVEGUIDE WAVEGUIDE
W4 I I W5 W7
I
r-- @W2 - - ,I
I I
r-- @
I W3 - - ,I
I I
~--~--..!
FIXED
WAVEGUIDES.
NONE OR ANY
COMBINATION
DEPENDENT
UPON
DISTANCE
5tAtAll I ANTENNA PEDESTAL
~ ANTENNA IROTATING JOINT

FIXED FIXED FIXED FLEXIBLE FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
W70
r- I I-- WAVEGUIDE - WAVEGUIDE
W66
I-- WAVEGUIDE WAVEGUIDES
(2)
LOWER WIG I UPPER WIG
ROTATING I ROTATING
SECTION I SECTION
51A9
I MICROWAVE ASSEMBLY 51A4 I ARRAY ASSEMBLY
n
TRANSMIT MANIFOLD
22: 1 POWER DIVJDER ~
SIDE WALL
COUPLERS
AND
WAVEGUIDE ~ PHASING
U-CAP ~ WAVEGUIDE
CIRCULATORS ~ WAVEGUIDE
ASSEMBLIES
22
~ RADOME
RADIATING
ELEMENTS
(STICKS 9-30)
/~
PRODUCES A
COSECANT - SQUARED BEAM
IN FREE SP ACE
ASSEMBLIES
U 22
RF SPILLAGE
RECEIVER
PROTECTORS
7647-CO-0888
FO-4. Primary Radar Transmission

Path Functional Diagram
51A4 I ARRAY ASSEMBLY ~ MICROWAVE ASSEMBLY SIA7 MATRIX COMBINER ASSEMBLY
~ RADOME A128. AI3 I 18 X Ie MATRIX A15-A25 I 2:1 COM81NER AI-AI I I LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER
TARGET II
~
22 3. II
~
RECEIVE 3. WAVEGUIDE WAVEGUIDE 22
ECHOES
ELEMENTS
ASSEMBLIES CIRCULATORS
(STICKS 1-36)
"
SIAI2 !IIX6 SIA3 ! RECEIVER ENCLOSURE SIAIAIIAII ROTARY

MATRIX JOINT
JI2 81
I JI
AI-AS I RF AMPLIFI ER
WI052
JI3
WI053
82
,~~
JI' 83 I~
'-- WI054 ~
J40 A-F
• JII A-F
JI5
WI056
8'
~P WI062
~P
JI. 85
WIOSS
JI7 8. I J6
WIOS7
'I
7647-LD-oe9C
FO-S. Primary Radar Reception

Path Functional Diagram
I)
WI091 PI
TO/FROM
SHELTER
• ~
J6 CPII JI
»>--[
I
(,
j9P9 WI061
~""':.:=...ji-==~
:::EJII-=':';""-IJI
ELECTRONIC
J3 SWITCH D~~~~hER
I
-'7>-JI>:
ANT(A5)
PI
IIJ2 WI092 J2 P~ rJ2 II
ROTARY J3
JOINT
/ W
pos PULSE ~ ~
f30'
NEG PULSE = II
\
JI
PEDESTAL
(AIAIIJ BACKFILL
RADIATOR
(A6)
7647-LC-076C
FO-6. Secondary Radar

Transmission/Reception Path
Functional Diagram
CI
1/68OPF
"
© © CRI
lN758A
. r
CR2
IN758A
4~TP5
J
RI5 RI7 R7
60AK 60AK
AESOLVEA 2~----4_~~~.---~~~
A2 IN ' 2 K Tf
U3 >''*--....
6 ---1H--------~ 4 TILT SIG
TRANSISTOA VOLTAGE CHAAT

RI6
60AK 3 /4 DE~OD OUT
NOTES 7
I. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED: RB
REF ELEMENT
ALL RESISTANCE VALUES AAE IN OHMS,O.25W 30.IK
DES CB + 1:::. C7
B E C K-INDICATES THOUSANDS OF OHMS
MEG-INDICATES MILLIONS DF OHMS
'TP2 6.BUF'1' + r 6.BUF
01 2.3 0 0 2. UI,U2 AND U3 ARE 128C952HOI RIO
3.3K
02 2.3 0 0 400HZ O.5W
REF IN TP6
~
01 ~
2N2945A 0-:,H-_~--4--'.(Rt,9C-.....--....
4.7K CR5 CR7
O.5W IN645 IN645
I
f- ,-
I All CM CRB
I 4.7K IN645 IN645
I 02 ~ 0.5W
I 2N2945A 0-:VH-"------+-H--'
400HZ 14
REF IN
f-'L--+===::::::------':!Y;,J Rl2
3.3K
RI4
CR3 10K
r IN751A O.5W O.5W
-15V
+15V
CR4 ..J RI3
IN751A 10K
O.5W 7647·LD·D~DB
FO-7. Amplifier-demodulator
A1AllA1A4A2Al Schematic Diagram
LMIIIJ-B FROM 8H.2
-12V
+5V X
+5V
",2 COl 54L800
lOOK 0.1 R54
IK 13 TP21
P2
3
GP4 I
12 84-
R53 U3<A
36n,CRI 2.2K 2
I
I R4-
,-
I 12V
+5V +5V
UIS8
1 R45 C28
I lOOK 0.1 R47
IK 3 TP20
4
GP3 1 4 6 $3-
R46 U318
374iR3 2.2K L
5
I
1 R3-
I TO 8H.2
I-J2V UI6D
I +5V
+5V
I R38 C25
I 0.1 9 TPI9
2
GP2 I 10
R39
2.2K
35n
I
"
1
I
UI78
1-12V
I +5V
I R31 C22
I lOOK 0.1 R33 13
IK TPI8
5
I 12 SI-
GPI U32A
3B~R7
R32 J
2.2K 2
C24 RI-
0.1 -12V
UI7D
-12V +5V
R27
01 10K R29 +5V
IBK
2N2907A 02
2N2222A
R2B
IBK
CRO R30
10K CRIO
R25 POWER CONNECTIONS

10K FOR U16-U26 a U31-U32
-12V
NOTES:
FROM SH.2 F I. ALL DIODES ARE TYPE IN414B-1
764 7 ~ LO-03SA
FO-B. Monitor and Control A3All

Schematic Diagram (Sheet 1 of 3)
TO SH I
U23 X RIO
X~,
AM26LS:31 54LS04 15 10 IK
r- ---l I '~U258y-- JJU25C~ 13
X
21~1 +5V 4 V CLR 15
8 / PI
~ J a
EX ECUTE I I
+ 1-
l i V ,3
X
2
! +5V
RII
IBK
C7 54LSOO
R7 e3
~PREU5
5
6
~50Ei:
9" (THIS SH) '':90 PF 33K ,,6 4 U228 )
I I 54LS16A 16 K 14
15 '~141' '7 II 10 vee GNO
Q
I 54LS08
r
7 6 I~
-:lEN : IRe Ie u23E
9 2RC 2C
_"1 1/1'3
.w U25A
'~~
i....!c, A ~
54LS04
BCI 16 +5V 2 I8
U27A
~ 2A
+5V~ 28
2Q
U278
+5V
e~'9 54LSOO
0.1
+5V R4 ,....l., eLR _4 (
+5V la ~2eLR
'~
IK 2a 12
; Q.L
34
21I
,+
l+Z I,T, I
3
R6
IK
54LSI23 16
J
1 II
e'i",
8
:,
DATA
SERIAL
I ' I:V I
I
+5V 0.1
\J 12
~
+5V 12 lEN I 13
121
~EN
L ____ ...J
:
IB
23 TBRLDRR MR A9
eLR
1,5
U23F
T PI4 .
R3 UNCLK 54lS04
24 TRE IK I
R5 "4 OE
47
4 rAM2sLs291 TP7
20
RI
RB
6
5, +5V
7 03 a3 "
Q2 [I
-;;;;EN
15 U2 I12 " R7 6 02 U6
25
TRO 7 5 54LS224 12 II I
e3l'!
100PF~
4:- I
R6 01 al
V elR I
8 4 13
~U22A
SR I ClK 19
- 5V J ,
a'VEE I
+5V
RB
IK
34 CRL
R5
D• 3
DO
LDCLK
ao ....!! BO 8a
r-i 2
3
F TO SH I
n:
I 16
---.!l. 70
, LVf'-'f¥~
Tpt3 TPI2 vee GND 7a 54LS08
PI U3
36 SSS 16 B 14 15 PTP22
+5V HD-6402-B 60 6a
VRI
IN963B-1
C2
0.1 U238 4,6 +5V
R9
37
~ CLS2
CLSI DR l!!.. NC 13 50
U8
50 12
~TP24
{~S
"1 ~t- ~ 4piTP28
RRO +5V 54LS273
P256
PI /7>. 3 I. 9
3:
B 40
35
R60
4a
-0
:, (. EPE 6 OTP23
"'Q
I
I
12V
VR2
IK
C40 TBRE ~NC
0.1
16 8
7
3D 3a {0- TO SH3
U23C 26 ~~TP27
I 1N963B-1 ~ 0.39 TRI R2 5
vee GND --.!. 20
18
I'~
5 6 27
TR2 9 ; ' Tr
O IK I
OE
2a
0;'P266 -®
'I:J R59 + 5v 2 TP29
12 V f';IK
e39
54lS04
r~
>;« 29
TR3 R4
10
7 03 a3
10
II
,...l,D
vee GND
la
CD'-
~ 0.39 TR4 R3 6 02 02
1-1;,iE- '7
U7
\ ~I(c'~ TR5 R2
II 5 DI 54LS224 al
12
10
I~~
12 4 13 +5V
TR6 RI DO ao e9
FROM
SH I
(J XKXlXM
TR7 4t ..
TP9 TPB
3
LD elK 0.1
~
S,5
TR8 elR UNClK
+5V 14 VCC PE
13 13 y9 15
e5 ; 0::
0.1
U4
OUT P TRe FE
14
15
2
I
U~ 12
..r. CO-4020-20
L.!L RRe
VCC GNO
OE
SFD
54LS27
U26A 54lSII
3
'1 II 1'6
+5V 2 13 I
e'~ U230
0.1 T¥S
9 X
54lS04
C 7647- LO-039C
TPl7
FO-S. Monitor and Control A3All

+5V 54ALSIOIO
FROM SH 2 ir
IK
'2 UI8 TP48
7
I
c-;\ H \ Id. P2_,-
6.
+5V
(AJ..BJ..e1.0 J..E) RI3 A
./
22 LNA NO.1,
~ 2321
IK
3
+ov
RI'
IK
H- H B " 8T,S
./
LNA NO.2
0 ~.30
UO 10 e \. 25 LNA NO.3
HM-7603-2 I .I
Tf 00 L- +5V , ~. I
40
+ 12V
PI
+12V
10 A0 01 2 RI5
IK UIO 2 I
I
OC INPUT 17
L{LM~ m+ II AI 02
3
+ov
I
'- 2i I
!
2 12
': TP31 }C44 U29 5V 12 A2
4' I RI6 A 32 LNA NO.4
GROUND 33 (I
I 18.2
_~ ~C41
8.2
13 A3
03
04
5
IK
I
3
f
\.
6T,4 ~ 30
'& 6
+5V 28 LNA NO.5
P2
+
1~43 8.2
GNO
(eASE)
14 A4 05
06
7 1
RI7
IK
5
0
I B
.I
\.
eT,z I
~I 2
-12VOC INPUT I -12V ~G e 29 LNA NO.6
+
Q7 0
't~ vee GW " /

, 46
•
U3C 2 -5V
INPUT LMI 16 8 +5V I
I!C42
TP34 (CASE) ~ I
+~8.2
Ti9
RI8 I
IK U20
I
+5V
If
elo 7
+5V
RIO
~
I
.., A \ 12
I
17 LNA NO.7
0.1 IK
3
f
\,
ST,I ~ 14
+5V
16
vee
8 R20
Ps -j B
./
33 LNA NO.8
10 A0
GNO
00
I
01 2
IK
I
0
e \.
8\,0 ~ 31
50 LNA NO.9
+5V
R24
II AI
12 A2
13 A3
02
03
3
4
+5V
R21
" ./
+I
I
47
IK 04 I
T,'
IK U21
P2 I
so 14 A4 05 I
~ -l
55 43 12 I
+5V 27 LNA NO. 10
~+5V
5
44
I RGI
mU24~
3 /'
6
15
G
Q6
07
+5V
R22
IK
3
4
A )-
\.
ST,5 ~ 45
B
~
54LS27 16 LNA NO. II
51 7 /1
: IK
SA
UIO
HM-7603-2
R23
IK
0
\.
er.3 r+ 15
He
.6
I
n+
I
,I
5V
R62
IK
+5V CII
16f
-t ?i'
817
~II ./
'7
r4
49 SLR
48
SB vee GNO
52 8
'I 15
I
Y0
41 ~+5V A
YI
14
: R63 2 B UII 13
54LSl38 Y2
: IK I.
se 3 Y3
53 0 e
I R64 II
IK 6 Y4
42
~+5V +5V GI
Y5
10
I
I
RI
IK
r<
"U:
G2A
G28
Y6 •
7
I SO Y7
54 26
24~
I
I 7647 - LO-040B
FO-B. Monitor and Control A3All

IP/O UNIT51PY-
----- ---- -----
( ( ( (
----
~ o TO SH3
PIO PIO
.
~
'" ~
:2
~ I
MICROWAVE MICROWAVE
'";:;'" ;:;'"'" '"'"
ASSY 51A4
V36 5tA7Z1Jt - - - Wt036

ASSY 51A4
V18 51A7A13Jl0 - - Wl0t8

... ARRAY
;:;
L ---
V35 51A7A12J14 - - Wt035 V17 51A7A12Jl0 - - Wl017

51A4V19 51A4V20
V34 51A7A13J5 - - Wt034 V16 51A7A13J13 - - Wl016

51A4V31 51A4V32
v33 51A7A12J5 - - Wl033 V15 51A7A12J13 - - Wl015 51A4V8

51A4V7
V32 51A7A13J17 - - Wl032 V14 51A7A13J4 - - Wl014 51A4V23 51A4V24
51A4V35 J14
V31 51A7A12Jl?-- Wt031 V13 51A7A12J4 --Wl013
51A4V15 J13 51A4V16

V30 51A7A13J8 --Wl030 V12 51A7A13J12 - - Wl012
5tA4Vl1 51A4V12
V29 51A7A12J8 --W1029 V11 51A7A12J12 - - Wl011
5tA4V27 51A4V28
V28 51A7A13Jl'-- Wl028 V10 51A7A13J2 - - Wl010
51A4V17 51A4V18
V27 51A7A12Jl1 - - Wl027 V9 51A7A12J2 - - Wl009
51A4V3
.'"
0
51A4V4
V26 51A7A13Jl - - Wl026 V8 51A7A13J16 - - Wl008 ~
51A4V29 51A4V30
V25 51A7A12Jl - - Wl025 V7 5tA7A12J16 - - Wl007
51A4V5 J7 51A4V6
OJ
~
V24 51A7A13J15-- Wl024 V6 5tA7A13J7 - - Wl006
N
51A4V21 ... 51A4V22
V23 51A7A12J15 - - Wl023 V5 51A7A12J7 - - Wl005 51A4V33 J5

'"
;:;
51A4V34
V22 51A7A13J6 - - Wl022 V4 51A7A13J9 - - Wl004 51A4V13 J4 51A4V14
V21 51A7A12J6 --Wl021 V3 51A7A12J9 - - Wl003 51A4Vl J3 51A4V2
V20 51A7A13J18-- Wl020 V2 51A7A13J3 - - Wl002 51A4V9 J2 51A4Vl0
V19 51A7A12J18 - - wt019 V1 51A7A12J3 - - Wl001 51A4V25 51A4V26
A12 A13
INPUT OUTPUT
51A7Zt
51A4V36 -1008 ---
COUPLER
I
51A3J7 - Wl059 8 TO SH3
------------- ------ --- 13086-CD-668A
FO-9. Antenna Cable Diagram

(Sheet 1 of 3)
PIO UNIT 51A7 -----------------------------------1 ARRAY
J29 J30 J31 J35 J36 J37

18 x
MATRIX
A13
18
~ . . F" J1
VIEW A-A
LOAD X2 LOAD X2 LOAD X2 LOAD X2 LOAD X2 LOAD X2 LOAD X2
J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1
'"zw
a;
"o '"«
o
'"'"« '"'"«
<.>
J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3
J A
Jl LOGIC J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1
@
, J3 LNA
«
" '"«
xiX '"«
J3
m
« '"«
J3
'"
« '"« ...« .
«
z
§ J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4
DC
POWER
J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2
---+- TOP ~~F I
ARR~
•'"
o
•'" '"• • •
.
'"_ '"
•'" •'" •'"
"'''' '"
_ '"
",m
• •
o
•
'" •'" •'"
N
'"
;; '"« '"« "''''
~ ~ « '"« ;;
'"iOiO "''''
«« ;; "''''
««
'" :n:n ;;;
"''''
'" "'''' "''''
I II II II II II I II I II II
.'"
o
I"'lvl"'l
r-co v
0 .....
I"-CO
<»
v
wl'--I()
1'-00 v
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C\Jrt)N
r-co v
010
!.Coo L(}
oomCD
t-a:I o;t
IOW!'-
t-CD V
o;tl()o
r-a;, I()
1"-00
t-oo V
almv
WI'- V
..... N
1'-00
~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~
l
l--'--'>-ll_l------'--'>ll_l
l'-'>--l l--,-,--ll_l--,--,-ll_l---,-ll,,-----l
-------'>..l--,--l l--'--'>-ll_l-----'--'ll_l
-------,l,,---,------l -------'>..l--,--l...:..:.:=..;COAX-5:..:..::..=...:On
DOU==-=BLE ~}
SH=-IELD TO SH3
1:3086-CD-669A

(Sheet 2 of 3)
FROM SH2 C
COAX-50n DOUBLE SHIELD RECEIVER ENCLOSURE 51A3 I Jl J2 151A5A2
I IFF ANTENNA ASS Y
FROM SHt A
AR RAY _______
51A7Al J4 - - Wl068
51A7A2J4 - - Wt069
-e
-e J13
J40
Wl062
0;
0
l<
I N
U>
0
l< c'.!!...
,-- -
_1-
- --,
FROM SH2 D
51A7A3J4 - - W1070 J14
0 A BHF - -1
(11' 6) MATRIX
51A12
51A7A4J4 - - Wt071
51A7A5J4 - - W1072
-e J16
J15
B B B2-IF - -2
-e -1-
LNA C C B3-IF - -3
+15V DC
51A7A6J4 - - Wl073 POWER
51A7A8J2
Wl048
J17 (SMA) D D B4-IF - -1- -4
51A7A7J4 - - Wl074 J18
_1-
51A7A9J2
Wl049
51A7A8J4 - - Wl075
51A7A9J4 - - Wl076
-€V
J20
J19
E
F
E
F
B5-IF -
B6-IF -
-5
-6
J5
B6 \
5tA3J6 - Wl057 J17 51A7Al0J4 - - Wl077
51A7Al1J4 - - Wl078
-€V
J22
J21 J J
SERIAL
DATA - -1- -
1 9
51A7A7J2 H H EXECUTE- -1- - 8

-8
Wl047
51A7Al J3 - - Wl079
@ G SLR-IF - " - L -7
51A7Al0J2
Wl050 51A7A2J3 - - Wl0BO J24
J23
,- I SIDELOBE
<n
~
w
'"
0
on
.,.
- I F CHANNELS 1
51A7Al1J2
5tA7A3J3 - - Wl081
-€V J25 1 1REF 51A6
"'"z ~
I
<n
'" "-fl ~2
0
Wl051 51A7A4J3 - - Wl082 J26 1 U> 1
51A7A6J2
WtD46
51A7A5J3 - - Wl083
51A7A6J3 - - Wl084
eJ28
J27 LNA
LOGIC
(SMA)
1 l<
0
1 '"t--w
1
1 I
Ji II
IFF
SWITCH
I
~
A 120VAC PH - f- - 32
'"t--
W
51A7A5J2
Wl045
5tA7A7J3 - - Wl085
-€V J29 1 ;;:--' 1 J3 L~ 51A5Al
B
C
120VAC NEUT-I- - 33
SHELTER GNO - - - 54
;;j
'"<n
e
51A7ABJ3 - - Wl086 J30 ...J L -25
B4
L D - SPARE -
J2 ~
51A3J4 - Wl056 J15 51A7A9J3 - - W1D87 I>-!FF E SPARE - f- - 5 0
J31 0
INPUT
F SPARE -
I -51 "'"
B5 51A7Al0J3 - - Wl088 J32
"'
0
<0 G SPARE - - -24 '"
51A3J5 - Wl055 J16
51A7AtlJ3 - - W1089 J33 l<
"''"
0
L 'o"
51A3J3 - Wl054
B3
J14 SIDELOBE
ANDREWS
FSJ4-50A
J 0
l<
l<
l ANDREWS
~
H SPARE - -52
'""-
"-
o
REF ANT eN FSJ4-50A N t--
SMA RG142 J9 IFF - - - 1- - J6
STALO J38 Wl066
51A7A4J2
Wl044 RF TEST
MONITOR eN
RG214
Wl067-------., ~ J13
SMA
STALO - - 1- -J3
RG142 MS
SPARES J36
51A7A3J2
Wl043 e MS N/SMA
DC IN J34 Wl064~ SMA
J14 RF TEST -1- -J4
B2 MS MONITOR
51A3J2 - W1053 J13 J18 AC IN J35 W1065 ----,
LOAD
Bl
51A7A2J2
Wl042
1'----
1'----
51A7A13J2 0 - - Wl040
51A7A13J19 - - Wl039
' - - - 51A7A12J20 - - Wl038
e GP3 (SMA)
J11
J9
GP4 (SMA)
GP2 (SMA)
RX
PROT
INPUT
AZ ROTARY
JOINT OUTPUT ____
SLIP RINGS
......J
PEDESTAL
INPUT I
OUTPUT
51A3Jt - Wl052 J12 MULTI-CONDUCTOR

' - - - 51A7A12J19 - - Wl037 B GP1 (SMA)
__---51A7Z1J3 - - Wl059 J7 N
51A7A1J2
Wl041
J19
51A12J17
51A12J16
B B 6 (SMA)
J5 B5 (SMA)
'--
-eDC
POWER
GAC
POWER
NOTE' CABLE DESIGNATIONS ARE FOR
INFOR MATION ONLY CABLE
MARKE RS SHOULD DISPLAY
WHER E THE CABLE GOES "TO".
LOAD 51A12J15 G B 4 (SMA) OUT IN
51A12J14 J3 B3 (SMA)
J3 POWER
FROM SHl
R.F. TEST MONITOR OUT RG214
B~~~~~~~~----------~~--~
51A12J13
51A12J12
0 B2 (SMA)e
Jl B1 (SMA)
AC
POWER
SUPPLY
ENCLOSURE
51A2
t3D86-CD-67DA
OUT

(Sheet 3 of 3)
r--
J1 A
8
XA1
C .---
D 20
E
"\
1B
F
G 21
\
H
AMPLIFIER
J 19
DEMODULATOR
K 16 (A2A1)
L 6
M 2
L...-
r--
J2 A
C 4
D 23
E 22
F 1
G 14
K '---
'--
1
I I GND
I I 2
3
I T1
r 4
131B1-WP-0438
FO-10. Junction Box A1AllA1A4A2

Wiring Diagram
INTE.RLOCK
SWITCH
~FLI----~
~TBI-I--...J
AI
ON LINE
AC -{~ 1-_ _ :::BI-'2.
81-1
G,ND 3 , BI-3
POWER
':>UPPLY +OUT I--TBI- 4 -

-OUT I--TBI- c . , -
' - - AI-ACI
'-- A'2.-ACI
'-- AI-AC'2.
~ AZ-AC'2.
~ AH"ND
' - - A'2.-G,ND
r-A I + OUT
r-AZ+OUT
I-- AI-OUT
I--A-:I.-OLIT
A2 J2
':>TAND-BY AC{~
",ND 3-
TBI- I
TBI-'2.
TBI-3 TBI-4
TBI-S
TBI-",
:::3ffiEj A
B
C
+ 15
+ IS V
COMM.
V
ON LINE
STBY DC POWER
( PS-'2.) POWE.R OUTPUT
D SPARE.
+ouT TBI-5
-OUT TBHa
SUPPLY
7647-LD-031A
FO-ll. Power Supply Enclosure A2

Wiring Diagram
4
TYP
+15j/
A
JI2 FL6 TBI-I
FL7 TB2-1 RF RECEIVERS TYP T81(+15V)
±12V
~J4 TBI-6 W29 PWR SUPPLY A9 2
10'-='-'- T81-1 FL6
L-1'-u:.=....r--TB2 -I
AI FL8 '"z
TB2-6 +12 + "'
I-
I JI~IPQl1fj':l=:TBI-2 COMM C T82-10

FLIO
FLI2
.
~
~TBI-7
I. TB2-2 FLI4 0:
-12 FLl6
A2 W3C
~~~rnlj:::TBI-2
L T82-2 ~T82-7
FLl8
FL20
FL4 9
AC FL22 JI JI JI JI
~J4
2 FL5 FL24
I JISPQleillj:::TBI-3
I· TB2-3 FL26
A3 TBI-7 AIJ4-CTR
W31 GND T82-1I CRI CR2 CR3 CR4
~~~rnij:::TBI-3
L TB2-3
TB2-7 A2J4-CTR
A3J4-CTR
~TBI-8W32
A4J4-CTR J2 J2 J2 J2
r;.;r-,::-rKi[}-TBI- 4
L-~_~~r--TB2-4
A4
~TB2-8 STALO AMPLIFIER
PANEL AIO
ASJ4-CTR
A6J4-CTR
A7J4 - CTR "., '" ~"
N
~
. . .~
~
.,
~
, , ,
r-"""LiL""""'--TBI_4 A8J4-CTR N
'",
~TBI-8W33
1-!l.-IFL2il--TB2 -4 AI0-TBI-5 ~
TBI ~ ~ ~
AS ~ ~ ~ ~
~=~p- ~TB2-8 I
r
5 +150N LINE CR4J2GND x x x x
IJ2C;P::Jitlli=TBI-
L T82-5 52 J23-A---1
COMM r. J23-B---1
~TBI-9W34
r;:;;]-,Hffi~-TBI-5
TB2-5 / '"
O J24-A:=~
.;.:2=~:Z:m
A6 +15VOUT T81-1·1 J24-B
T81-6 P 'C TB2 - 9 +15V STNDBY
FL2 J25-A
,
l":'J-'4ffim-TB2-6 0::
en 32
J25-B :=:::l
J26-A AIO -TBI-l-:::~FiL~I~~Sf~ +15 ON-LINE
~TBI-9W35 J26-B:=~ AIO -T81-4· +15 STANDBY

~ STALO{+15V ro 30 TB2(COMM)
A~ -...;.....-- A7 @ 28 J27-A
~==~~-,
LOGIC TB2 -I COMM
I
~XAII/2-22
x..;....-- AMP COMM o 12 J27-B I
~ XAII/2-21---1 TB2-9 7
0
~
I- 46
29 J28-A
J28-B
FL3 -::::Pc(!: FL7
FL9
SPARE
""!.;O..-!-FLII
I A XA11I2-49 B 0l-~ 17 J29-A
~ XAII/2-23:==~ LNA
J3
W36 0 14 J29-B 52
-"""'-'- FLl3
L:.J--E.. XA1I/2-39 A8 XA1I/2-48 frl 33 J30-A -...""'- FLl5 120 VAC
J4 -"""'-'- F LI7
J30-8~~~~
I A T81-10 NEUTRAL
~XAII/2-25:==~ W37
zis 50 J31-A -...-.-.- FLl9
EJ-!1- XAII/2 - 40 TB2-10 31
47 J31-B -"""'-FL21 GND
I A
C,)
~ 27 J32-A
-...:;.rr- FL23 SPARE
~XAII/2-32:==~ (5 45 J32-B -"""""- FL 25
-...:;.rr-
EJ.-2- XAII/2-3C Ql 16 J33-A:=:::l
FL27
, A
~XAII/2-28:==~
CI:>
ALL WIRES NOT INDICATED SHALL BE CD. <.,) 15 J33-B
\-"'--".e;4~9-R:;- A8 J3 CTR
-"""'-'- AIJ4 GND
'" .......",,- A2J4 GND
2 6 ,
EJ-5il- XA11/2-12 ~ INSTALL MARKERS AT TERMINATIONS INDICATED ON MARKERS ~ A3J4 GND
I A ~ PER@.
51 48
44
A8 J3 GND
All S5-1 a A4J4 GND X A I I / I - 3 4 # SERIAL DATA
~ XAII/2-29:==~ G:::>
PROVIDE SEPARATE WIRE BUNDLE FOR THE AC POWER CONDUCTORS. 43 AIIS5-2 ~ A5J4 GND '-+-XAII/I-I J40
E..f-E- XA11/2-46 26 All S4-1 '" A6J4 GND
~t:~:XAlIlI- 8 H EXECUTE
I A <3::> TERMINATE WITH 0 TO CHASSIS. 24 All S4-2 8 A7J4 GND
XAII/I- 9
~ XA1I/2-17 :==~ 9 AIIS3-1 .......,.""'- A8J4 GND
~XAII/2-14
G:> CRIMP LUGS PER ®. 42 All S3-2
................ A9-COMM J36
n'M~'
I A --;..~1-,A9 -GND
8 AIIS2-1
fJ3Ol-F XAII/2-33:==~
EJ-E- XA1I/2-31 G:> TWIST LEADS FROM COAX TO CONNECTOR. 41
7
AIIS2-2
All SI-2
.-t"'·~-XAII/I -33
l::iCQ::A I 0 - TBI - 2 = r : 1
I A f"7'- 'W' TERMINAL IS CENTER CONTACT OF CONNECTOR. 6 AIISI-2
.- AI0-T81-6
fJ3i1"ij- XA11/2-S0 ---1 ~ IIB" TERMINAL 15 GROUND LUG.
EJ-"- XA1I/2-47
G:> COVER SOLDER JOINT a ANY EXPOSED CONDUCTOR. 7 5
I
~XAII/2-27---1 ~ SOLDER PER @ USING @ AND ®. TYP TBI, TB2
~ XAII/2-45---'!
~XAII/2-16:==j @> TERMINATE PER @.

~XAII/2-15
I C!I>' TWIST LEADS OF EACH CONDUCTOR PAIR EI
I ENTIRE LENGTH.
7647 -LD-036C
FO-12. Receiver Enclosure A3

Wiring Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
J40 N SMA
--- -- -' 0 (9 CD (€) CD 0 CD ® CD I

--
RF TEST
J37
- -
J38
-
STALO IN
-- --
~
RF RECEIVERS SEE SH I MONITORIN~
(
I JI
91
WI
r-1lJ
~L::n
AI @G 8- W8
---'
r---. N TO SMA
ADAPTER
IJ2
92
W2 Er::u A2 @G 8- W9
I
93
W3
r-O-J A3 @G ~WIO
~L:n
I J3
SMA
(
94 r-L:l-f @@ ~WII
~LJ1
IJ4 W4 A4
95
W5
r-r-::-u A5 @@
~L:n
I J5 §-W12
W21
W2D
r WI9
r-O-J
I J6
96
W6
C~
A6 @ @ 8- W13
W15_
WI8
WI7
WI6 ---..
N
r-E~ A7 @@ §-W14
SLR
W7
W26
W22
RF TEST IJ71 I W25 W24
MONITOR OUT 'I
I
I
"'-N TO SMA
~OUTPUT jJ Il INPUT
STALO AMPLIFIER
PANEL AIO
~
~
-
jJ~ ,,;j ~~ jJ~
ADAPTER
l IJ~ jJ~ jJ~

I
I I -IODB COUPLER DC2
d 0-2009 VARIA9LE
ATTENUATDR AIOAI
J4 J5
I
~ J2
~
i--- COUPLED
I LOAD
JI STALO POWER DIVIDER AI2
I
I
I
o - 2008 VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR AIOA2
I ---E STALO AMP
~3
AIOA3
I J2
~
I - COUPLED
J4 J2
I
I
I N TO SMA
I -IODB COUPLER DCI
I £ LNA AS
?
ADAPTER ~OUTPUT ~INPUTI
N I
} l
T81 1
E~j---W27 W28
7647-LO-037B
FO-12. Receiver Enclosure A3

Wiring Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
SUM(EI OIFFERENCE
OUTPUT (6) OUTPUT
I LOW
I
-- - -* -- - - - --, I
CUTOFF FILTER HIGH MoFFFILITR * -- "I /JI J2
r;:iiG H CuTOFFFILTER * - - - --, I LOW CU'TOFFFlLTER* -- -- - ----,
I I I I
I I, I I
it I I I I f if I I I I tf t t t t
•
I
I
I I i IJ,
I II
J,I
11
= I I = I I "
L -- ---- -- -
LOW PASS FILTER
- --~ L - - --.J L -- - - -- - - -.J L -- - - - -- - ~J
LOW PASS FILTER
RI R5
15 15
~f ~~
R2 R6
15 15
2~~PF
1/
~~ 013
~,~
ZOOPF L* IOOPF L* ZOOPF -=
II II II
~~ 01'. CI'
IOOPF CRI IOOPF CR3 , IOOPF
UM710BC " UM710BC
~t-
II
ca = =
IOOPF IOOPF
Ie I{
~~ ~~,
IOOPF IOOPF
I -- ---DIPL~R I ~:o
IOOPF
CR2
UM710BC
~,'o
IOOPF CR4
UM710BC
c'i2
IOOPF
ZI
~,~
'I
I CI
~ I6'JPF~ ~ ~~ =
50
IOOPF
I IOOPF
=
I IOOPF =
I
I
L_ -
J3
RF/VIDEO
INPUT
L*
--- -~
I
If
b~
IOOPF
-
I
If -=
ZOOPF
CI2
200PF
R3
15
R4
U.
Ra
R7
15
UI
11 ZOI~PF
~~4
200PF
15 15
J4
VIDEO
INPUT
TNC
NOTE:* INDICATES DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER
7647-LO-042A
FO-13. Electronic Switch SA-

l868!UPX Wiring Diagram
WAVEGUID£ FLANGf /
NO 7/W70
CABL E ASSY W6 ANTENNA nRIVE

(NOTE 11 MOTOR
N-!--___ J3
CEP NO 1
(REF I
J.
~ ill 1 1
J2
~~
E8 GROUND
J5
LUr. INOTE 21
\ I ~Iiii ~~~~;'Nr.
A
CEP NO t
/ I W ill
." '
GROUND
CABLE
CABLE ASSY wto

(NOTE 1)
CABLE ASSY Wli

(NOTE 1)
CfP NO 3 (REF)
CARLE ASSEM~UF.S
~L_ _ _ W5, W7, WB, WlJ
(NOTE 1)
CEP NO '] IAEF) VIEW A
NOTES
TO TFXT FOR CABLE HOOKUP

1 HfFFn OM HnMINAI fR
'} BfMOVAL (~\llI1f
r GnOlJNn lUGTnF)\;nUllND CABLE
() TO INS!
2920-BJ-022A
IN NOT tnt
SHEL TEA
f:.NTRANCE
UUOR
FO-14 •
Wavegu1'd e and Cable1 Run,
(Sheet
Shelter to Antenna of 2)
WAVEGUIDE ASSY
NOTES
NO. 8/W7
SItEL TER
(ROOf) COMPLETE WAVEGUIDE NETWORK HEOUIRES PURGING
\
1/\
·
---I
BEFORE DPERATIND RADAR. (REFER TO TEXT),
2. SPECIAL 0 RING TYPE GASKET IRF/PRESSURE),
~~~~~
/' ONE PER COUPLED FLANGE ASSY.
\) '.
3 OPTIONAL WAVEGUIDE AS.-iEMBLIES DEPEND ON
VARIABLE DISTANCE BETWEEN RADAR SHELTER
<~w"""
CABLE ANCHOR AND ANTENNA.
!SEE LOCATOR)
4 PROTECTIVE COVERS JOINED TOGETHER WHE'" STOWAGE
IN USE TO PROTECT NEOPRENE GASKET. BRACKET
(TVP)
o
\ ViEW ROTATEO IBO flEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE
ASSY NO 5
HESTRAINT
CABLE (REF) RESTRAINT
CABLE
[VIEW ROlATED 180",
Of'TlONAl WAVEGUIDE PROTECTOR
ASSY {REFI RS
(NOTE 4)
CABLE
CABLE ENTRY
u._- CABLE SUPPDRl CABLE RUN
~c
SLING IRH)
PANEl tCEP) HlSJHAllH
NO.1 CABl E (HH I
ALIGNMENT
PINS
RESTHAINT
CABLE
BRACKE T OPTIONAL WAVEGUIDE II
fl EX!BLI:. ASSY'S Wl W2 W3 I I
WAVEGUIDl AN~/OR W6 (N'OTE 3) II I
ASSY W4IRI:f-J
III
) ill CABLE SUPPORT
.; , J I, SUNG (REF)
,. ,. '",J
ALIGNMENT CAP r IVt

2 B
PIN HOLES seHE ws
WAVEGUIDE FLANGE SCHI:W
f-II:XIUI l
WAVI:.GtJlUl TIGHTENING SEOUENCE
ASSY W4
PROTECTIVE COVERS
(NOTE 41
!I I1 2920·9J·02 JA
VIEW C
VIEW B
FO-14. Waveguide and Cable Run,

Shelter to Antenna (Sheet 2 of 2)
SHELTER TO ANTENNA PEDESTAL (A 1A11) PEDESTAL TO MICROWAVE ASSEMBLY (A9) ARRAY (A4)
MICROWAVE
ASSY
Flexible Fixed Flexible Rotary Fixed Flexible Selected RF Side WIG WIG U-CAP WIG WIG WIG WIG Radiating WIG
WIG WIG WIG Joint WIG WIG Flexible Components Wall Assy Assy WIG Assy Circulator Assy Assy Element Dummy
Assy Assy Assy Assy Assy WIG Coupler 1016216 611J802 Assy 681R490 3-Port 1019889 1019890 (Stick) Load
Assy 152C009 /' 611J801
HOl G02 GOl GOl GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 9 152C007HOl
H02 GOl G02 G02 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 10 152COO7HOl
Transmit Manifold HOl G02 G03 G03 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 11 152C007HOl
Any (1)
(1D22439G01) H02 GOl G04 G04 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 12 152C007HOl
Combina-
tion HOl G02 G05 G05 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 13 152COO7HOl
Transformer (4)
of (681R464G01) H02 GOl G06 G06 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 14 152C007HOl
NoAfW4 NO.11W1 No.51W5 353D582 336D901 lDl9695 lD19122HOl HOl G02 G07 G07 GOl 335D527H04
, HOl - 15 152C007HOl
(334D183 (334Dl80 (334Dl84 GOl HOl HOl and Waveguide
G01) G01) GOl) 5ection (2) H02 GOl GOB GOB G02 335D527H04 - HOl 16 152COO7HOl
and 1D19455HOl (681R502G01)
or HOl G02 G09 G09 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 17 152C007HOl
NO.91W66
NO.21W2 (1D19164 H02 GOl G10 G10 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 18 152C007HOl
(334D181 G01)
G01) HOl G02 Gll Gll GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 19 152COO7HOl
and WIG Termination
or (2)( 152COO8H01) H02 GOl G12 G12 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 20 152COO7HOl
337D708
No.31W3 GOl HOl G02 G13 G13 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 21 152C007HOl
(334D182
G01) H02 GOl G14 G14 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 22 152C007H01
or WIG Termination HOl G02 G15 G15 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 23 152C007HOl
(1) (152COO7H01)
NO.61W6 H02 GOl G16 G16 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 24 152C007HOl
(334D185
G01) HOl G02 G17 G17 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 25 152C007HOl
H02 GOl G18 G18 G02 335D527H04 - HOl 26 152C007HOl
HOl G02 G19 G19 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 27 152C007HOl
HOl G02 G21 G21 GOl 335D527H04 HOl - 29 152C007HOl

13181-WP-001C
FO-1S. Transmit Path RF

Components
Matrix Combiner Assy (51A7) SinX Beam Data
Beam
Steering
--x- 11X16 Combiner (51A12) Receiver Enclosure (51A3)
'" 18X 18 Matrix / Aximuth

To 2 : 1 Combiner Low Noise Amp Antenna
Stick Rotary
Horizon Pedestal
No. Matrix Beam Beam Phase Joint
Time Input Output Elev Output
Beam Interleaving Steering Centering Input Output Via Input Assy Output Via Output
Delay Input Assy Output Input Assy Output Beam
No. Component Component Component Jack Jack Cable Jack No. Jack Cable
(Inches) No.
A13 A12 A13 A12 Jack No. Jack Jack No. Jack (Degrees) (Degrees) (Degrees)
1 17.712 J3 - J21 - J1 A20 J3 J1 A6 J2 +4 -40 -46.3 +20 J6 - - - - - - - - -

2 17.206 - J3
-
- J21 J2 A20 J3 J1 A6 J2 +4 -40 -46.3 +20 J6 - - - - - - - - -
3 16.700 J9 *J22 - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 J17 W1057 J6 A6 J40-F W1062 J11-F J5-6
4 16.194 - J9
-
- *J22 - - - - - - - - - - - 6 J17 W1057 J6 A6 J40-F W1062 J11-F J5-6
5 15.6B8 J7
J7
J23 - J1 A17 J3 J1 A3 J2 +1 -10 -46.3 +5 J3 - - - - - - - - -
6 15.182 - - - J23 J2 A17 J3 J1 A3 J2 +1 -10 -46.3 +5 J3 - - - - - - - - -
7 14.676 J16
J16
*J24 - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 J15 W1056 J4 A4 J40-D W1062 J11-D J5-4
8 14.170 -
- - *J24 - - - - - - - - - - - 4 J15 W1056 J4 A4 J40-D W1062 m-D J5-4
9 13.664 J2
J2
J25 - J1 A23 J3 J1 A9 J2 +7 -70 -46.3 +35 J9 - - - - - - - - -
10 13.15B - - - J25 J2 A23 J3 J1 A9 J2 +7 -70 -46.3 +35 J9 - - - - - - - - -
11 12.652 J12
J12
*J26 - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 J16 W1055 J5 AS J4O-E W1062 m-E J5-5
12 12.146 -
-
- *J26 - - - - - - - - - - - 5 J16 W1055 J5 AS J4O-E W1062 J11-E J5-5
13 11.640 J4
J4
J27 - J1 A19 J3 J1 AS J2 +3 -30 -46.3 +15 J5 - - - - - - - - -
14 11.135 -
- - J27 J2 A19 J3 J1 AS J2 +3 -30 -46.3 +15 J5 - - - - - - - - -
15 10.627 J13
J13
*J28 - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 J14 W10S4 B A3 J40-C W1062 m-c J5-3
16 10.121 - -
- *J28 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 J14 W10S4 B A3 J40-C W1062 J11-C J5-3
17 09.615 J10
J10
J29 - J1 A16 J3 J1 A2 J2 0 0 -46.3 0 J2 - - - - - - - - -
18 09.109 - -
- J29 J2 A16 J3 J1 A2 J2 0 0 -46.3 0 J2 - - - - - - - - -
19 08.603 J18
J18
J30 - J1 A25 J3 J1 A11 J2 +9 -90 -46.3 +45 J11 - - - - - - - - -
20 08.097 -
- - BO J2 A25 J3 J1 A11 J2 +9 -90 -46.3 +45 J11 - - - - - - - - -
21 07.591 J6 B1 - J1 A22 J3 J1 A8 J2 +6 -60 -46.3 +30 JB - - - - - - - - -
22 07.0B5 -
J6
-
- J31 J2 A22 J3 J1 AB J2 +6 -60 -46.3 +30 JB - - - - - - - - -
23 06.579 J15
J15
*J32 - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 J13 W1053 J2 A2 J40-B W1062 J11-B J5-2
24 06.073 -
-
- *J32 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 J13 W1053 J2 A2 J40-B W1062 J11-B J5-2
25 05.567 J1 B3 - J1 A21 J3 J1 A7 J2 +5 - 50 -46.3 +25 J7 - - - - - - - - -
J1
26 05.061 - - - B3 J2 A21 J3 J1 A7 J2 +5 - 50 -46.3 +25 J7 - - - - - - - - -
27 04.555 J11
J11
*J34 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 J12 W1052 J1 A1 J40-A W1062 J11-A J5-1
2B 04.049 -
- - *J34 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 J12 W1052 J1 A1 J40-A W1062 J11-A J5-1
29 03.S42 J8
J8
B5 - J1 A24 J3 J1 A10 J2 +8 -80 -46.3 +40 J10 - - - - - - - - -
30 03.036 -
- - J35 J2 A24 J3 J1 A10 J2 +8 -80 -46.3 +40 J10 - - - - - - - - -
31 02.530 J17
J17
B6 - J1 A15 J3 J1 A1 J2 -1 +10 -46.3 -5 J1 - - - - - - - - -
32 02.024 -
- - J36 J2 A15 J3 J1 A1 J2 -1 +10 -46.3 -5 J1 - - - - - - - - -
33 01.518 J5
J5
B7 - J1 A18 J3 J1 A4 J2 +2 - 20 -46.3 +10 J4 - - - - - - - - -
34 01.012 -
- - J37 J2 A18 J3 J1 A4 J2 +2 -20 -46.3 +10 J4 - - - - - - - - -
35 00.506 J14
J14
*J38 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
36 00.000 - - *J38 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
'" Each mputto the 18X 18 matnx appears at every output port. 13181-WP-700A
• 18 X18 matrix output ports J22, J24, J26, J28, J32, J34, and J38 are unused and terminated.
FO-16. Receive Path RF Components

1.15 MSEC
~
SERIAL DATA IN U3-20
----tIT
.... ---,, I
STOP
LfcOMMAND2! I lJooMM'AND3 I
COMMAND
I
EXECUTE U23-2
,, I
, , ,
I I I
I I
I I I I
I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
I I I I I
TBRl U3-23,DRR U3-18 I I I r I I I I r
TRE U3-24 I I I I
J U!5-4
K U5-16 I I
Q U!5-I!5(lOAD) I J
lAST WORD BIT U3-6 I
lAST WORD SITUB-16 I I

-
LDCLK U6-3, U7-3
UNCLK U6-15,U7-15
PIP CLK U8-11
OUTPUT UB-2,!5,6,-9, 812. PREVIOUS LAST WORD COMMAND r.-------T-'------------

! t
COMMAND I I I
COMMAND2
COMMAND 3
SERIAL UATA OUT U2-15 ~ESPONsE1 I,

\ I
u RESPONSEII
2 I UREsPONS~
3
I I..JRESPONSE!
4
I ljRESPONSETlJRESPONSE:
5 6
•
1.15 MSEC
7647-LD-053B
FO-17. Monitor and Control Board

A3All Timing Diagram

100.105.01 (CBRN-TPS70 (V) 5-AN-1) Antenna OM-ocr

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

100.105.01 (CBRN-TPS70 (V) 5-AN-1) Antenna OM-ocr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7cI IO(), lOS.

RADAR SET TPS-70(V)5

WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC CORPORATION

\ pa.t~s of iS5.ue for original and changed pages are:

Original ••• 0 ••• 31 JUL 1992

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 326 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:

rrti-tle ......................... 0 FO-12 Sh 1-2 •••••• 0

* Zero in this column indicates an original page.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ...................................... x

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION

1-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................ . 1-1

CHAPTER 3. PREPARATION FOR USE AND RESHIPMENT

3-1 INTRODUCTION ............ , ......... , ........................c:•• ;, ,3-.1

4-2 GENERAL ...................................................... . . 4'7 1

4-6 GENERAL ....................................................... . 4-9

Paragraph Title Page

CHAPTER 5. THEORY OF OPERATION

5-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 5-1

Section I. FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM OPERATION

5-2 GENERAL ...................................................... . 5-1

Section II. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

5-5 GENERAL ...................................................... . 5-20

Section III. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION OF MECHANICAL ASSEMBLIES

5-7 GENERAL ...................................................... . 5-38

6-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 6-1

Paragraph Title Page

6-5 ANT DRIVE CIRCUIT BREAKER lAlCB16 TRIPS

Paragraph Title Page

Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION

7-1 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 7-1

Section II. GENERAL MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

7-3 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ........................................ . 7-2

7-7 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-12

Paragraph Title Page

7-12 WAVEGUIDE MAINTENANCE ..................................... . 7-18

Section IV. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

7-14 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-25

Paragraph Title Page

7-21 VERTICAL SENSOR AIAIIA3Al ................................ . 7-74

Paragraph Title Page

7-29 STALO POWER DIVIDER BOARD A3A12 ......................... . 7-94

Paragraph Title Page

7-37 LOW-NOISE AMPLIFIERS A7Al THROUGH A7A11 ............... . 7-114

7-42 GENERAL ....................................................... 7-130

Section VI. ALIGNMENT

7-43 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-130

Paragraph Title Page

7-45 ±12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY A3A9 ALIGNMENT ................... . 7-134

Section VII. SERVICE

7-48 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-141

Section VIII. SPECIAL MAINTENANCE

7-50 GENERAL 7-143

Section IX. PERFORMANCE TESTS AND CHECKS

7-51 GENERAL ...................................................... . 7-143

CHAPTER 8. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

8-1 INTRODUCTION.. . .. . . ..... . . ....... ........... ........ . ... . . ... 8-1

GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS ............................ Glossary 1

Figure Title Page

Figure Title Page

Figure Title Page

7-58 Monitor and Control Board A3All Alignment Locations .. 7-140

8-1 Type 26LS29 Quad 3-State Single-Ended Line Drivers 8-2

FO-l Antenna Group Assembly Major Assemblies